diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-0.txt | 4473 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-0.zip | bin | 87055 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-h.zip | bin | 711531 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-h/69943-h.htm | 7038 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 546504 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/69943-h/images/i_b_044.jpg | bin | 89156 -> 0 bytes |
9 files changed, 17 insertions, 11511 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ec2986 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #69943 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/69943) diff --git a/old/69943-0.txt b/old/69943-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d0678b4..0000000 --- a/old/69943-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4473 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of The training of an infantry company, -by Edward Kirkpatrick - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: The training of an infantry company - -Author: Edward Kirkpatrick - -Release Date: February 3, 2023 [eBook #69943] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Brian Coe, Bob Taylor and the Online Distributed - Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was - produced from images generously made available by The - Internet Archive) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TRAINING OF AN INFANTRY -COMPANY *** - - - - - - Transcriber’s Note - Italic text displayed as: _italic_ - Bold text displayed as: =bold= - - - - - THE TRAINING - - OF AN - - INFANTRY COMPANY. - - - - - =CATECHISM ON FIELD TRAINING= - - (=INFANTRY=). - - -A series of Questions and Answers on all subjects of field training, -extracted from the latest official TRAINING MANUALS, together -with miscellaneous information, practical exercises and examples -progressively arranged. - - _Revised and brought up to date by_ - - =COL. H. O’DONNELL, p.s.c.= - (WEST YORKSHIRE REGIMENT). - _SIXTH EDITION._ - - - CONTENTS. - -Elementary—General Principles of Attack and Defence—Miscellaneous -Tactical Operations—Warfare in uncivilised Countries—Protection -on the Line of March—Protection when at Rest—Methods of obtaining -Information—Quarters, Camps, and Bivouacs—Field Engineering—Diary of -Training. - - _Fully illustrated with 30 pages of Plates and Diagrams._ - - - =One of the numerous Press Opinions.= - - “The book is most comprehensive, for every branch of the soldier’s - life is touched upon, and every situation or emergency seems to be - anticipated. Colonel O’Donnell’s publication is quite a military - encyclopædia.”—_Empress_, Calcutta. - - - =PRICE 3/- NET.= - - _From the Printers and Publishers_, - GALE & POLDEN LTD., - WELLINGTON WORKS, ALDERSHOT, - And at London and Portsmouth. - - - - - = _The_ TRAINING= - - OF AN - - =INFANTRY COMPANY= - - - _By_ - - Major E. KIRKPATRICK, I.A. - - —————:O:————— - - - 2ND EDITION. - - - _London_: GALE & POLDEN, LTD., - - 2, AMEN CORNER, PATERNOSTER ROW, E.C. - - Nelson House, PORTSMOUTH & - Wellington Works, ALDERSHOT. - Obtainable from all Booksellers. - - _TWO SHILLINGS & SIXPENCE_ (_Net_) - - (_Copyright under Act of 1911._) - - - - - ALDERSHOT: - - PRINTED BY GALE & POLDEN, LTD., - WELLINGTON WORKS. - - 1914 - - - - - PREFACE - - -This booklet has not been written for the use and benefit of officers -and non-commissioned officers of long experience and proved skill -in the profession of training men for battle. To such as these it -may only provide an object of criticism, for in the course of years -spent in turning recruits into trained soldiers they will have -formulated to themselves, and adopted, some system of training which -they found productive of the best results under their own guidance. -But there are many at present, and at a future time, should certain -circumstances arise in the life of the nation, there may be very many -more who may not have such stores of experience to draw on, and yet -may be faced with the problem of rapidly converting an untrained or -only partially trained body of men into a force capable of acting -successfully in real war, both in attack and defence against trained -and disciplined troops. Again, it is written, not for officers -commanding battalions, nor for officers of cavalry and artillery, -but only for officers commanding companies or other similar units -of infantry, though it may, perhaps, be of use in training mounted -troops for dismounted action. - -Meantime, while the pipes of peace are still smoking, it is hoped it -may be of some use to officers and non-commissioned officers when the -time comes to prepare schemes of company training and put them into -execution. - - E. K. - - _September, 1913._ - - - PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. - -Since the above was written, the issue of new or amended Manuals -of Training has necessitated a revision of the book, which is now -presented in a form agreeable to the four-company organisation. - -The Empire is now confronted by those circumstances to which allusion -was made in the Preface. - - E. K. - - _September, 1914._ - - - - - CONTENTS - - - PAGE - - LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS ix - - INTRODUCTORY REMARKS— - - I.—The Intention of the Book 1 - - II.—Making the Best of their Companies - to Train the Modern - Man for the Modern Battle 4 - - III.—The Standard of Training - assumed to have already - been acquired and its application - to further Exercises 9 - - IV.—Ground for Training—Its Use - and Influence—Palliation of - the Lack of a Training - Ground 11 - - V.—Company Organisation—Moral - and the Personality - of the Commander 16 - - VI.—Discipline—Moral and Means - of Supervision 22 - - VII.—Organisation by Files and its - Effect on Moral—Cohesion 27 - - VIII.—Method of Training 31 - - IX.—As to Scouts and Working - Dress 37 - - - EXERCISES - - I.—Individual Advance in Extended - Order 38 - - II.—Retirement by Pairs 48 - - III.—Individual Training in Use of - Fire and Fire Discipline 52 - - IV.—The Assault 60 - - V.—The Section and Platoon in - Attack 64 - - VI.—The Section and Platoon in - Retirement 74 - - VII.—The Section and Platoon in - Independent Attack 78 - - VIII.—The Platoon as Advanced and - Flank Guard 84 - - IX.—Preliminary for the Attack by - the Company in Battalion 89 - - X.—The Company in Attack with - the Battalion under Artillery - Fire 93 - - XI.—The Company in Attack with - the Battalion under Rifle - Fire 97 - - XII.—The Company in Attack Acting - Alone 105 - - XIII.—The Company in Retirement 107 - - XIV.—Outposts 112 - - XV.—Defence 142 - - XVI.—Hasty Expedients 163 - - XVII.—Night Operations 171 - - ———— - - A SCHEME OF COMPANY TRAINING 181 - - - REFERENCES AND ABBREVIATIONS. - - I.T., 128 (3) = Infantry Training, 1914, - Section 128, para. 3. - - F.S.R. = Field Service Regulations, - Part I. Operations, 1909 - (Reprint 1912). - - T. & M.R. = Training and Manœuvre - Regulations, 1913. - - M.F.E. = Manual of Field Engineering, - 1911. - - - - - A FEW PRESS OPINIONS. - - - “UNITED SERVICE MAGAZINE.” - -Major E. Kirkpatrick is the author of a small book on “The Training -of an Infantry Company.” There have been so many books and pamphlets -of this kind—short cuts to knowledge—that one is apt to regard -each fresh one with suspicion and even with aversion, but Major -Kirkpatrick has much that is helpful to say, he says it well, and -he shows how much good work may be done even in the training of the -emasculated companies such as our military system so often leaves us. -His instructions cover a wide field, and there must be few company -officers who will not be grateful to the author for many valuable -hints. - - - “UNITED SERVICE INSTITUTION OF INDIA.” - -There are few junior officers of infantry who will not benefit by a -study of this book. The thorough system of training elaborated in the -seventeen exercises, which form the major portion of the book, is -worthy of the attention of Regular as well as Territorial Officers. - -These elementary exercises deal with the essentials in the war -training of the Infantry soldier, from the work of the individual -in advance and retirement, and of the section in action and on -protection duties, to the training of the company in attack and -defence, and outpost. - -As an example of a system of training illustrating the necessity of -attention to detail in the early instruction of the soldier, this -series of exercises is valuable, and their value is increased by the -constant reference to training manuals. The author wisely recommends -the study of all the official books referred to as he recognises -that his exercises and comments are only of value in so far as they -illustrate and explain the principles laid down in training manuals. - - - - - THE TRAINING - - OF AN - - INFANTRY COMPANY. - - - - - INTRODUCTORY REMARKS. - - -The authorised handbooks of training rightly confine themselves to -broad principles, and do not attempt to give detailed examples of -their application, the idea being that officers should study these -regulations and apply the principles by the light of local conditions -and their own experience. Infantry Training and the Field Service -Regulations are, however, very pregnant little books, containing, -as they do, a summary of the whole of Modern Tactics, as far as -they concern infantry and the combined action of all arms. Time -and thought are necessary, if the principles contained in them are -to be translated into such intelligent action that the men trained -on the lines laid down may be capable of doing their duty in real -warfare, without first undergoing a bitter and costly schooling of -useless casualties or, perhaps, even of defeat. But if an officer -is called on to achieve this result, being himself without much -previous experience in training, he will find himself faced with a -task of great difficulty, and, with the best intentions, he may waste -precious time, as well as his own and his men’s patience and energy, -in doing parades and exercises, which are either not indispensable, -or of minor importance for the main object. As an extreme example, -it would be better, in a hastily raised corps, to combine the -disciplinary training of obedience to the word of command, with -instruction in the use of their arms, by practice in smart work in -aiming and firing, than merely to study precision in “sloping” and -“presenting arms,” which look well, but do not immediately affect -fighting efficiency. - -For these reasons, it has occurred to me that I might do some of my -brother officers _in esse_ or _in posse_ a service by setting out -certain elementary exercises in training infantry soldiers, which -I have found of value in bringing them up to a standard of battle -training sufficiently high to need only battalion training and a -baptism of fire to turn them into steady and reliable troops. It is -not contended that these few examples are anything but concrete -instances of the application of the principles of the Training -Manuals. They are intended, as has been stated, merely for those -who are short of time and experience, and, therefore, references to -the manuals are given when the exercise illustrates some particular -section of those works, and it is recommended that officers who -intend to use these examples should look up and read the sections -referred to before going on to the parade. - -Though this book is not meant for officers commanding battalions, -I have one word to say to them, and it is this, that if they wish -to have an efficient battalion they must let the company officers -have proper opportunities of training their companies, apart from -the time of company training, when the whole company is struck off -duty. If there are six parades a week, let three or four of them be -company parades, ordered and carried out by the company commanders; -the balance will be quite enough to secure combination between the -companies in battalion. On company parades, the battalion commander -should supervise, but never interfere, unless things are being -manifestly mismanaged. (See T. & M.R., 2 (2 and 3)). The days of -the one man battalion are gone for ever. The company is the thing -that matters; a good battalion can only be composed of well-trained -companies. It is the work of the battalion commander to propound -the general lines of training and to use the companies to the best -advantage in combination, but the training of the individual soldier -must be in the hands of the man who is to lead him in war. - - - II. - -On ordinary parades, the captain of an infantry company is seldom -able to get together more than a fraction of his men. The calls on -the company for men for duties and odd jobs, leave and furlough, -and, in the Territorial Force, the private occupations of the men, -allow of only a few being assembled on any one parade. This being -so, there is a temptation—sometimes yielded to by officers who have -not much experience, to say to themselves: “This is rot; what can -I do without any men?” Such a question is the result of confusing -the individual instruction of the men with the tactical practice of -the leader in handling his company as a whole. The answer too often -takes the form of an hour’s close order drill or something similar, -which may do some good, but not nearly as much as if the officer -stoutly made up his mind to make the best of a bad job and took out -those few men and did some practical training in field operations. -The fewer men there are on parade, the more individual attention -will the company commander be able to give them. He will be able -to look at each man’s work more carefully, talk to the men and get -to know their characters as soldiers, spot who are likely to make -good non-commissioned officers, and coach them far more than if the -whole company were on hand at once. So do not turn up your nose at a -company only twenty strong, but make up a scheme of exercises to be -gone through, and, since the men who are not on parade to-day will be -so to-morrow, arrange to do the same exercise on two, or, if needed, -three, consecutive days, so as to catch all, or, at least, most of -the men, and your non-commissioned officers, who are not usually so -drawn on for off-parade duties, will become well acquainted with each -exercise, learn what to do and how to run things, and so become both -a help to you as instructors, and themselves gain authority and power -of command from the knowledge of their own competency. - -It is quite likely that these exercises and the explanations given, -may seem to some readers to be absurdly simple and needlessly -long-winded, while there is also a good deal of repetition. To this -I will make early reply that they are written for officers who are -not too proud to accept other people’s advice in training a company -of young soldiers of the stamp which would be forthcoming if some -cause[1] or other tempted or constrained into military service that -great proportion of our male population who are at present quite -ignorant of a soldier’s work, and who, from apathy, or a hundred -other causes, do not join the Territorial Force. Such men probably -have never in their lives given a thought to soldiering. The majority -of them are town born and bred, and have passed most of their lives -among bricks and mortar. If they have ever looked carefully at the -large or small features of a bit of country, it has been from an -industrial, sporting, or, perhaps, sentimental, but never from a -tactical, point of view. They have everything to learn in making use -of ground for fighting. Their ideas of using modern arms are equally -crude; the primitive fighting instinct will be uppermost in their -minds, and would express itself in an incontinent desire to get to -close quarters with their enemy, when bayonet, butt or hand grips -would seem the proper way to settle the matter. A very laudable -desire it is—this of wanting to close in—and one to be encouraged by -every means, but however brave troops may be, they cannot in general -indulge their desire to attain close quarters and the resulting -facilities of fighting by the light of their natural instincts unless -they have first been successful in the fire fight—the strife of the -arms of artifice—which is waged by bullet and shell at distances -which Nature never contemplated. - -It is the artificiality of the fire fight which makes the task of -turning town-bred men into skilful soldiers such a difficult and -lengthy process. They must be led to look at ground in relation to -its capabilities of increasing the effectiveness of their own fire -and also of diminishing the result of that of the enemy, i.e., they -must learn to select good fire positions and good cover. The problem -of finding the latter for himself against a civilized foe begins, for -the individual soldier, as soon as the enemy’s rifle fire becomes -effective and compels the use by his side of extended order; this -is held to be on open ground about fourteen hundred yards from the -enemy’s infantry (I.T., 118 (4)). Prior to this the responsibility -for cover rests with his leaders, as he will then be in some close -formation. Fire positions he must choose for himself as soon as -his section commander ceases to be able to indicate his wishes, or -to secure combined action by the whole unit. This will probably -happen at about six hundred yards from the enemy, when individual -fire is expected to replace controlled fire by sections. These two -aspects of fighting—the use of ground, and the use of the rifle as a -far-reaching weapon of almost absolute precision, if truly sighted -and aimed—are foreign to our instincts, and the average man has to -be trained till he is able to override his instinct and fight an -artificial war, so as to work his way to charging distance. Some men -need less training than others; a stalker in a deer forest is an -adept in the use of cover, and in general, country-bred men should -be easier to train than town-bred, but the majority of our men -being the latter, we must lay ourselves out to teach them from the -beginning this business of the fire fight, since success in this is -usually necessary before the assault can succeed (I.T., 121 (7)). -This can only be done by training them in extended order and putting -them through various exercises chosen for the purpose. Any exercise -which does not in some way tend to fit men for battle is mere waste -of time; aimless perambulations of an extended line fall under this -category, but are quite often to be seen on parade grounds. No amount -of smartness in close order drill will compensate for a deficiency of -field training. - - - III. - -The exercises which I have drawn up, simple though they are, are of -the nature of “Instructional Operations,” as defined by T. & M.R., -40 (12), and it is presupposed that the men have received, or are -in course of receiving, sufficient instruction in the use of the -rifle (musketry in all its branches), and of the bayonet (bayonet -fighting), in drill in close order, and the drill grounding of -extended order work, including signals (I.T., 90-96). We are then to -consider ourselves to be at the stage in which the soldier is to be -taught to work over broken country as directed in the latter part -of para. 90, above quoted. But do not think the lessons learned at -musketry instruction are to be forgotten and left behind by the men -when they begin to work in extended order across country. Demand -from your men that the rifle shall be deadly, and, by unceasing -supervision, breed a habit among them of aiming and firing in -extended order, whether with or without blank cartridge, with the -same exactitude as when firing their course of musketry on the range. -Take the high standard—a hundred men’s lives in one man’s bandolier, -instead of a hundred bandoliers for one man’s life. The higher -standard of the two is at least possible, though not common, but why -not try and work towards it, so that when bullets are flying within -decisive range of the enemy, it will be your men’s fire, that is the -deadly close-hitting kind, that makes afraid, and not the haphazard -jet of bullets whose inefficacy lets unhurt familiarity breed -tolerant contempt? - -In the same way, when men are in close order at any time during a -field parade, keep up the same smartness, and quick obedience to -orders which are exacted in close order drills, in order that the -men may become truly disciplined, and not merely so in appearance, -so when they come under fire without being extended, as may happen -in the early and distant stages of a fight, they will, as a matter -of course, submit themselves to their commander’s wishes, and ignore -their own inclinations, which, just at the first experience, even -with very brave men, might be for an immediate and independent rush -in some direction—perhaps forward, perhaps in another direction—they -will be “in hand,” and free of the liability of raw troops to suffer -from sudden panic or to become a mob, full of fight, perhaps, but -still a mob, and as such, a force which cannot be controlled or used -in furtherance of any general plan. - - - IV. - -The want of a suitable and accessible bit of ground on which to train -our men is one of the chief difficulties we have to meet in the -United Kingdom, and, of course, it is greatest in the case of town -corps, varying with the size of towns, while in large cities ground -is not to be had at all, save at a distance of several miles from the -men’s dwelling places. Unfortunately, there is little doubt that the -possession or lack of suitable training grounds has a great effect -on the readiness, or otherwise, of troops to give a good account of -themselves when they come under fire for the first time in their -lives. The lack of it takes away reality from the work of the men -in the ranks and cramps the initiative of their officers, who are -given no opportunity to exercise their wits in figuring out practical -situations which might occur on service. - -I can give no recipe for obtaining the use of ground, but from what -I have just said I hope it is clear that the officer commanding a -battalion or company should use every blandishment or art of which he -is capable to get the use of a stretch of ground, and also, if it is -at a distance, and the attendance of the men at parades voluntary, -he should try to provide facilities for getting them to and from the -ground. The worst bit of country is better than the barrack square. - -The ideal ground is that which gives conditions suited to each phase -of the training, the principal requirements being fire positions -and cover, and these should occur so as to provide illustrations -of the use to be made of them in individual training, and in the -collective training of sections, platoons, and the larger units. -Thus, for training individual men, good ground would be that with -an irregular surface, giving many places twenty to fifty yards -apart, which each man could use in firing and taking cover. The -usual seaside golf course of hummocks, furze bushes, and occasional -watercourses, is good to teach individual men over—I say teach, -for we must not imagine that an enemy will be so kind as to leave -easy ground like that in his front, if he can help it. For section -or platoon training, the surface should be similar, so that the -individuals should still be called on to look out for their own -halting places, but, in addition, there should be a certain number -of small features, hillocks, banks, and so on, one to four hundred -yards apart, which will serve as fire positions and cover for the -whole unit, and provide the commanders with successive objectives, -to which it will be their duty to bring their men in good order, -and without needless exposure to the enemy’s fire. When the company -is training together, the ground should be similar, but of greater -extent, both broader and larger, so that sections and platoons may be -practised in supporting each other, some being halted in these fire -positions, and covering by their fire the movements of the others who -are in process of gaining fresh vantage points. And so on for larger -units and the combined action of all arms; good ground for early -instruction is that whose features, from their nature and distance -from each other, lend themselves to illustrate conditions under which -the power of each unit and arm may be most profitably employed in -conjunction with others. Troops trained over ground that gives the -above advantages will acquire an eye for country. A knowledge of the -uses to be made of ground will be common to all ranks, so that when -they find themselves fighting on bad ground, which does not give much -cover or good fire positions, they will be the more apt to search for -such cover and fire positions as are obtainable, while troops trained -on flat and open ground would be much slower in making the best of -a bad job. We are not concerned with anything more than a company; -therefore, get for your own use, if you can manage it—failing help -from higher powers—a bit of ground of some sort, golf course, common, -city park, or what not. It need not be very extensive. Even if it -gives only three or four positions suitable for occupation by a -section working in conjunction with another, say, six hundred by -three hundred yards, it will give room for useful instruction; but, -of course, a larger extent is preferable, as giving room for more -extended and varied exercises. If your training ground is of limited -extent, it should, nevertheless, if possible, have a wide field of -view on all sides beyond its own confines, and leave you the right -to send a few men to take positions on the adjoining country, even -if not allowed to manœuvre about it, so that when carrying out your -exercises you may be able to use men with blank cartridge to act as -a skeleton enemy, when such is needed. But if you are not allowed -to send men on to the neighbouring ground, the wide field of view -will still enable you to indicate certain distant positions as -_supposed_ to be held by the enemy. By this means you will be able -to use the whole area of your permissible ground to represent a bit -of the battlefield, and escape having to place the supposed enemy -absurdly close to your manœuvring troops, e.g., at the edge of the -training ground, or in some other position which makes heavy calls -on the imagination. Britishers are not imaginative. Lastly, if all -else fails, and you have nowhere to go except the flat parade ground, -or even the drill hall, which in large towns is often very spacious, -do not, I beg you, become discouraged and throw up all effort to get -your men ready for field work. Do the exercises on the flat, limiting -the extent of movements, if there is little room, and use flags or -anything else to represent fire positions for sections and platoons, -and let the men kneel or lie down between advances, if there is no -cover. A great deal may be done in this way to lay a good foundation -for extended order work. Your men will know the mechanism of it, and -you will save much time when you do manage to have them out on a -proper training ground. I.T., 107 (2), requires company commanders, -in preparing their schemes of training, to have regard to the ground -at their disposal; do so, therefore, even if the ground aforesaid -is only a parade ground, and make the most of it; it is better than -sitting still and either doing nothing, or only a weary round of -company drill in close order. Of course, you must let the men know -what you are driving at, or they will get bored and lose interest. - - - V. - -Having got a company of men and ground to train them on, the first -step is to organise that company for its battle training. A company -is organised into four platoons, each under a subaltern, with a -sergeant as his second-in-command (platoon sergeant). Each platoon -has four sections, and the sixteen sections of the company are -numbered one to sixteen. The men of each of the above units remain -permanently in that unit. _If possible_, maintain this organisation -on duties and fatigues, though this is often a counsel of perfection, -but quarter the men together, and insist on the maintenance of the -organisation, _without deviation_, on parades. Have lists made up of -the men of each platoon and section, and let men who so wish, belong -to the same unit. Once these lists are made up, see to it by means of -the section commanders that these men fall in on parade together in -the place in the company where their section is standing, no matter -how few there are; if there are but two men of one section on parade, -they should fall in as front and rear rank men of one file. Avoid -disseminating the men of a platoon or section among other units in -order to raise the latter to a sizeable strength. Instead of this: -supposing you have three weak platoons and one strong one on parade; -of the four sections of one of the weak platoons, send two to each of -the other two weak platoons. This will give you three platoons of, -perhaps, unequal strength, but sufficient for work—and this without -taking the responsibility of section commanders off their shoulders, -and the cohesion of each unit is preserved. Some further suggestions -on the subject of organisation will be put forward when speaking of -_moral_. - -The officer who aspires to develop whatever capabilities his men -possess of becoming individually and collectively formidable -in battle, must pay attention to much more than mere physical -considerations. Napoleon’s dictum, that the moral is to the physical -as three to one is early dinned into the ears of the officer of -Regulars, but may stand repetition in pages meant for the perusal -of others. No officer can expect to get the most out of his men -unless he directs his attention to the study of the psychical side -of the training. There are two fields in which the study must be -pursued. One is the officer’s own personality, the other that of -his non-commissioned officers and men. T. & M.R., 8, deals with the -former, and should be read and pondered over. - -In battle good men have sometimes achieved victory in spite of the -shortcomings of their officers, but good officers, as well as men, -are necessary for consistent success in the series of battles which -make a campaign. Now, good officers, given time for training, will -infallibly produce good men, provided the latter are of the average -physique and courage. Therefore, study thyself, and try to see -what you lack, in order to become a good officer. Cultivate your -skill in handling your men by reading any books you can get; there -are, unfortunately, not very many that deal with the work of such -small units as companies or even single battalions. Go out into the -country, or, if you have not time, recall to yourself some bit of -country you know, and import an enemy into the landscape. Perhaps a -few riflemen are holding ground on the flank of a road along which -your battalion wants to march, but cannot, without undue loss, until -these riflemen are driven off; and your commanding officer tells -you to do the driving. In imagination, or on the ground, decide -what position you would hold, if you were the enemy, in order to -make yourself as nasty as possible—though having no hope of being -reinforced—to the battalion trying to come along the road. Then -settle in your mind what you, as commanding your company, would do to -get rid of the annoyance. Be quite clear, what would you do? Go at -them bald-headed? There are times and enemies when this is the best -way; you would have to be fairly close, and the enemy not shooting -very straight, and rather careful of his skin; or will you march a -long way round till the enemy sees you are getting behind him, and so -manœuvre him out? Then your battalion will be a long time waiting. -Or will you look at the ground and find, let us suppose, a spot to -which you will send a section or platoon to open a fire on the enemy, -while another works its way to a point you have noted from which -fire can be brought to sweep crossways a little knoll, or some such -supposititious feature which seems to form the enemy’s left flank, -and to be occupied by ten or twelve men, and which gives command -over the rest of his position? Then, while the second lot is on its -way, you plan to lead the remainder a little way round, under cover, -in order to get to fairly close range of the knoll, so that when the -second party opens fire on it, and its defenders are hampered both -by this fire and by that of those you first posted, you may surprise -them by an outburst of fire from your reserve, and either drive -them off their perch by cross-fire from three directions, or, if -they do not shift, run in at them with the bayonet, trusting to get -across the intervening space at the cost of a few casualties, when -your superior numbers at that point should ensure your success even -if they actually await the bayonet. Learn to consider quickly how -many ways there are of doing such a job as the above, and to decide -quickly and rationally which is the best. - -These schemes, involving only a company or two, will not be presented -for your solution by your battalion commander; you must set them -yourself, and their solution, and the thinking necessary thereto -are the best methods an officer can get of training himself without -having his men on the ground. In your mind’s eye, put your company -into every situation you can think of, and get it out again, and you -will have acquired an enormous reserve of capacity for acting quickly -and rightly when your men and your enemy are both on the ground. But -beware of dealing in too short distances, or you may produce unreal -pictures of war. Do not imagine manœuvres at four hundred yards from -the enemy when every man exposed would be hit in a few minutes. The -clearness and decision of thought you acquire will be reflected in -the orders you give. Your men will give you their confidence when -they see, as they are quick to do, that you know your job. There -is nothing more disheartening for a subordinate, be he private or -colonel, than to feel he is under control of a duffer, whose mistakes -he will have to correct. This feeling saps discipline, and quickly -destroys the fighting value of a body of men. In peace training, the -men become sulky at being “bothered about,” lose interest in their -work, and wish themselves done with parade. In war, their personal -characters usurp the control of their actions, and they become a mob -in uniform. - - * * * * * - -But in addition to possessing the confidence of the men in your -tactical ability, you should seek all other means to increase your -influence over them. Gain their respect in other ways, by honesty -of purpose, by example, tact, devotion to duty, and so on. Gain -their goodwill by watching over their individual and collective -interests, though in this you must play to the gallery sufficiently -to let them identify you as the source of benefits received. Keep -an even temper, and do not show anger without good cause. Personal -attachment to their officer shows itself most when men’s powers are -taxed by hardship, fatigue, and danger; it is then a great auxiliary -in maintaining discipline among the mass. - - - VI. - -As regards the _moral_ of the men, I.T., 1 (4 to 10) must be referred -to. You _must_ introduce discipline—the habit of subordinating -personal inclination to the orders of the superior promptly and -without cavil. If your men are raw, you have to go slow just at first -till they all know what is expected of them. Let them understand that -orders are not given haphazard, but are invariably based on some good -reason, which, being so, there is no need for reasons to be always -stated, nor for recipients of orders to feel unhappy for want of -them. If you can induce a feeling among the men that slackness on -parade, slowness in obeying orders, and so on, are bad form, and -tend to disgrace the company, you will do well, and this good spirit -will enable you to enforce discipline without having recourse to -punishment, if you are vested with the power of inflicting it. - -I have already said that when in close order during tactical -exercises, you should maintain discipline in the ranks. I now go -further and say that you should maintain it when the men are extended -or detached from the company singly or in small groups. Evidently -the discipline here needed is something more than mere mechanical -obedience. What it is, is to be found in T. & M.R., 39 (4), and -F.S.R. 12 (13), and I.T., 116 and 117. Make the men understand that -when they are extended they must obey their unit commander’s orders -and signals as to fire and movement at once, and without hesitation, -and must be always on the look-out for them. Allow no talking, except -what relates to the business in hand, such as passing of orders or -information, results of fire, and so on. Hold the men responsible -that if they are out of reach of the control of their leader, it is -their duty to carry out the spirit of the orders under which they -set out. To bring their responsibility home to them, you must make a -point of calling men occasionally to give an account of what they -did when detached, and why they did it, so that they may pause for a -moment if they are of the sort that take advantage of opportunity to -sit behind a hedge and smoke a cigarette when they ought to be up and -doing. - -Here you will naturally say that this is all very well, but how is -one to look after men scattered here and there over several hundred -yards of rough country? Here come in the non-commissioned officers, -of whom, so far, no mention has been made, and also your subaltern -officers. Since success in battle will depend largely on the -efficiency of fire unit commanders, and the normal fire unit is the -section (I.T., 6 (4)), it is evident that the section commander is a -very responsible person, and much must be expected from him. - -Your subalterns and platoon sergeants you must use as your delegates -in supervising and leading the platoons to which they belong, except -when they are needed to act specifically as platoon commanders, -keeping themselves constantly on the move among the men, looking -at the details of the work, sighting of rifles, aiming, use of -cover, choice of lines of movement, not lying down themselves nor -participating in the operation as combatants. When you wish to give -them practice in setting exercises themselves, turn the whole company -over to one of them and act yourself as critic, or act as subaltern -under his orders. This is one means of supervision. - -The next is your non-commissioned officers. They are in direct -command, and you must hold them responsible for their sections, -but when their units are acting in conjunction with others, it is -evident they cannot act both as commanders and instructors unless -certain concessions are made, for if the non-commissioned officers -as well as the men of a section were to act as they would have to do -under real fire, each non-commissioned officer might be able only to -supervise a man or two on his right and left, the rest being too far -off. Therefore, at the beginning of an exercise, you should tell the -non-commissioned officers whether, in addition to giving executive -commands, they are to be at liberty to move about freely and act as -instructors also. Needless to say, in instructional exercises, and -until the men are quite seasoned, you should let them do this, but, -on the other hand, in exercises meant to illustrate actual conflict -and the limitations imposed by the presence of an enemy, they should -pay attention to those limitations so that they, as well as the -men, may be prepared to endure the disabilities imposed by Service -conditions. - -Next comes yourself. Once you have given your subordinates your -orders for any exercise, leave them to carry it through, and make -yourself as ubiquitous as may be in supervision. Keep criticism for -the end, and interference only for the prevention of absurdities. To -make yourself ubiquitous, the best way is to use your horse, and make -the noble animal do the running about with you on his back. You can -then get through about six times what you can on your own feet, by -cantering from one section to another, and you get a better view of -the whole performance, but you must remember when correcting anything -the men are doing that you are mounted, while they are probably -kneeling or lying, and much that you see is invisible to them. Equip -yourself with a pair of field glasses, and also with a megaphone, -which latter should be about fourteen inches long, and carried by a -strap over the shoulder, the strap punched so as to be capable of -being made long or buckled up close under the arm, according as you -need to use the megaphone, or wish to get it out of your way. Use -your glasses to look at what sections and individual men in them are -doing. They will reveal to you small mistakes that escape notice at -some distance with the unaided eye. The megaphone saves you a lot of -small excursions to get to earshot of men, and also a lot of shouting -at a distance, which is fatiguing, and is apt to lead to exacerbation -of tempers, both of the shouter and the listener. Moreover, it -enables you to hear as well as speak from a distance. This is done -simply by holding it aimed at the other man with your ear instead of -your mouth at the mouthpiece. Use your whistle to call attention to -orders or signals, carry it in your hand, not in your pocket, and -put a loop in the cord and pass the loop over your middle finger, -or you will be always dropping it. Instead of a cane, carry a small -semaphore flag, and give your signals with it. This saves a good deal -of arm-waving, and tends to smarten up movement, as it is more easily -seen than the arm. By bringing all these aids into your service, -you will find that you can make your influence felt, although the -sections are separated by the greatest distances which they are ever -likely to be called on to take up in battle. - - - VII. - -Besides discipline, there are certain other moral influences which -give strength to an Army. These are indicated in I.T., 1 (4 and 5). -The two mighty forces of religion and patriotism are not treated -of here, as they have their roots not in any system of training, -but in the upbringing of the youth of the nation, but there is one -force which you, as a humble commander, can call into play, and that -is shame—the dread of losing the respect of oneself and of one’s -comrades. During peace training you may make men dread the public -shame of misbehaviour by the aid of those means of supervision which -I have suggested, but in war the power to supervise is greatly -curtailed, and it is very desirable to find something to replace it, -and, at the same time, to supplement a too absolute reliance on the -stoutness of men’s hearts, for this may prove a broken reed when the -troops are largely composed of unseasoned soldiers. - - * * * * * - -To a certain extent, the organisation of the company into permanent -sections provides us with the substitute we desire, as the men of -sections are likely to be cognisant of how their comrades behave -when out of view of the rest of the company as long as the whole -of the men of the section are in view of each other; but this will -not always be the case: for example, in wood fighting or in house -fighting, both of which would assuredly occur if our men have to -fight in Europe. In such fighting everything comes down to the -pushfulness of the individual soldiers, for even sections will lose -their leaders. Therefore let us carry the principle of the company -organisation logically one step further, and make the men of a file -as they fall in on parade in the section act in conjunction for the -remainder of that parade. This arrangement is recognised in the last -edition of the Musketry Regulations, and has, at various times, been -adopted in former drill books of our Army, and has given excellent -results, while, if the present book does not prescribe it, at least -it countenances it (I.T., 123 (12)), and I strongly recommend your -introducing it into your company. It is likely to produce emulation -in the fire fight among men whose hearts are in the right place, and -in the assault it must produce the advantages of combination, for two -men coming on with the bayonet in conjunction are far more likely to -do someone an injury than if they each came on independently, since -in the latter case a cool and skilful antagonist might dispose of one -and then the other, even as the Japanese are said to have stepped -aside when charged by the Russians, who, running forward blindly and -head down, fell an easy prey to their alert little enemies, and were -bayoneted in succession as they arrived. The proof of this pudding is -the eating thereof, and if your company ever happens to be alongside -a company told off daily into haphazard sections, as is sometimes -done, in spite of rules, you will then see the difference, even if it -is only at manœuvres. In close order they may still look alike, but -let them be extended in rough country, and you will see that yours -is the blade of steel; the particles of its metal are coherent; it -will bend, but not break. The other is of wrought iron, polished on -the surface but of brittle material, and sure to fly to pieces in any -rough usage. By this file organisation you will produce in the men -in the ranks the highest degree of cohesion—the habit of regulating -their own actions in accordance with the actions and needs of others -in furtherance of one general aim. - -Having secured this cohesion among the men, you have still to -produce it within the company as between platoons and sections. -For cohesion is the coping stone of the edifice of efficiency, -and rests on a basis of discipline, moral and training. It makes -possible the application of the principle of mutual support -which is indispensable in the attack (F.S.R., 105 (4)), and it -enables retirements and defensive action to be carried out without -disorganisation, and with the minimum of loss. Whenever sections act -together, see to it that the non-commissioned officers keep an eye -on the movements of the others, and question them as to the extent -their orders to their sections should be influenced by the needs and -movements of the others. By this means they will be induced to check -the inclination to play only for their own hands, and to remember -always that their unit is part of a combination which can best attain -success by acting accordingly. - - - VIII. - -Training is the preparation of officers and men for the duties which -they will carry out in war. These duties consist in the application -of the principles contained in the training manuals, and it is your -business to provide concrete examples. But in these days of long -range arms combats take a very long time, and you cannot expect in -a parade of perhaps one or at most two hours, and with a limited -extent of ground, to carry out all the varied phases of an operation -which, in warfare, would take anything from six to eighteen hours to -complete, and would extend over perhaps five or six miles of country, -even if we limit ourselves to the extreme ranges of heavy artillery, -and take no account of movements not within the range of possible -fire. Therefore, in your training, you must be analytical, choosing -for one parade such phase or phases as you have time and ground for, -and doing the others later on. When your company knows all it can be -taught thus piecemeal, it will be early enough to try to get time and -ground to perform continuous operations. - - * * * * * - -For instance, infantry in the attack will usually have to go through -three phases: first, the advance to fire positions; second, the fire -fight (I.T., 121 (6)); and, third, the assault, which latter must be -divided into the charge and the steps which follow it according as it -is successful or not. You will have to train for these three phases. -The first, against an enemy armed with guns and rifles, would consist -in opening out from column of route into little columns—sections or -platoons—and moving forward in this formation, the main object being -to escape being smashed to pieces by his artillery fire before being -able to do him any damage (I.T., 118 (3)). Later, you would come -under his rifle fire, and your little columns must scatter out into -lines of men in extended order (I.T., 118 (5)). These movements seem, -and are, very easy, but still they must be practised in peace if they -are to be done coolly and without confusion in time of war when the -first intimation of the necessity for opening out may be the shriek -and crash of what will be to most of the men the first shrapnel they -have ever seen, and withal aimed at themselves. This phase requires -the presence of all four platoons of the company, and so may be kept -over till the men have been trained in the phase which it precedes, -namely, that of the fire fight. - - * * * * * - -The fire fight begins when the attacking infantry have got as far -forward as they can without having to reply to the enemy’s fire, and -it is quite distinct from the preceding phase of passive endurance. -Success in the fire fight is an absolute necessity for a successful -assault. Possibly your enemy has prepared your success before war -broke out by abstaining from training his men in musketry, but even -if his shooting is inferior, the fire fight will call into play -all the qualities and skill of which your men are possessed, both -individually and collectively. Accordingly you should practise them -in the fire fight from the opening of their fire up to the assault, -first individually and then collectively. - -The assault can be dissected into the fixing of bayonets with -as little cessation of fire as possible, the charge itself, -followed, according as it is held to have been successful or not, -by the rallying of the troops, pursuit of the enemy by fire and -strengthening of the captured position, or the withdrawal or such -mitigation of the results of failure as may fairly be attempted. -Thus, by considering the attack as made up of phases as above, it -is, I think, possible and instructive to practise each one of them -separately, on a short parade, and on limited ground, by placing -the men in the order in which they would be at beginning of any one -phase, and carrying on from there. - -Before beginning any exercise, call your non-commissioned officers -out to the front, and explain to them and to the men, in very full -detail, what the exercise is intended to be, what points particularly -require attention, how you want it done, and the sequence of events, -if it involves combined action between the different units; whether -the company is supposed to be acting by itself or as part of the -battalion, and, if the latter, whether your side are having the -support of artillery fire or not, where the enemy is, and what he -is, i.e., is he infantry only, or has he also cavalry and guns, what -he is supposed to be doing, attacking, defending, retiring, marching, -or what. Deal with all such points before you start, otherwise you -will find your non-commissioned officers and men filling in the -blanks each according to his own bent of imagination, and everyone -in consequence playing at a different game. To be thus able to -define the scope and arrangements of the exercise, you must have it -clearly planned out in all detail in your head. This you should do if -possible the day before the parade, so that you will have the thing -well thought out, and events marshalled in logical sequence. - -At all exercises, if possible, have the enemy represented by a -skeleton force, as directed by T. & M.R., 48, a few actual men with -blank cartridge, and a red range flag or two to roughly define the -enemy’s position. Use for this purpose old soldiers, if you have -them, or, at least, men who have already performed the exercise -you mean to do, and it is better to take one or two men from each -platoon than to send off a whole section, and so break up the company -organisation. Six or eight men are quite enough to form any skeleton -enemy that is needed for a company to manœuvre against. You must give -the skeleton enemy definite orders as to what they are to represent, -where they are to go, and what to do and not to do. If they are given -at all a free hand, especially if under the enterprising British -subaltern, they are very apt to indulge in far-reaching manœuvres, -and subject you to sudden raids and onslaughts which upset your -scheme for the parade, and leave you no enemy at the very point you -wished to have him. If you cannot arrange for a skeleton enemy, at -least never fail to indicate some position as supposed to be held -by an enemy. If your exercise ground is limited in extent, fix the -enemy’s position outside it, regardless of whether you have, or -have not, licence to traverse the intervening space, so as to avoid -carrying out your exercise within impossibly close range of the -enemy. In default of a skeleton enemy to provide you with a target, -tell your men to aim at any members of the public who are about the -enemy’s position. This is better than snapping at inanimate objects, -as it gives more interest and so keeps up careful aiming. As regards -the general method of training, follow commonsense and the manuals, -and work from individual up to collective, bearing in mind always -that collective work is built up of the work of the individuals who -throughout have to be kept up to the collar by the various arts which -I have touched on. The less of the iron hand that is shown the -better. - - - IX. - -I make no mention of scouts, as they are specialists. They must be -selected after you have got to know all the men of your company and -their capabilities. Their training as scouts cannot be carried out by -you personally at the same time that you are training the company. -To be really of use, it will be a whole-time job for one officer, -and you will either have to turn them over to one of the subalterns, -or go with them yourself, preferably the former, if the subaltern -is capable. When they are trained and fall in on parade as scouts -in their sections, it is a good plan to have places permanently -reserved for them as third files from the left of sections (the blank -file’s place) so that they can leave the ranks without disturbing the -formation for forming fours. - -As regards dress one thing is quite certain, and that is that with -only one suit of uniform men cannot appear clean and smart off duty -in it, and yet use it for field work with all the lying down and -knockabout wear involved. In time of national danger, appearances -will go to the wall, and men will do their work at the expense of the -fit of their one and only suit of uniform. - - -FOOTNOTES: - -[1] A cause now exists, and the men have come out. - - - - - EXERCISE I. - - INDIVIDUAL ADVANCE IN EXTENDED ORDER. - - -The exercise portrays what men will have to do when the rifle fire -of the enemy becomes effective, and necessitates extension of the -small columns which are used to dodge his shell fire (I.T., 118 (3)). -This will be somewhere over one thousand yards from the enemy, and -perhaps fourteen hundred may be taken as a maximum. From the point -at which extension from the small columns is made up till the time -of the assault, a line of men in extended order is the suitable -formation, unless there is some covered way leading forward which -can be traversed in file or other formation. Once the advance has -begun it should be carried through as quickly as possible without -exhausting the men too much, and fire should not be opened until it -is absolutely necessary to neutralise that of the enemy, firstly, -because it lessens the speed of the advance and so increases the time -during which the attackers are exposed to the enemy’s fire; secondly, -because once men start firing it is more difficult to lead them -forward; and, thirdly, because it uses up cartridges whose value and -difficulty of replacement increases at every yard nearer the enemy’s -position. - -The exercise is then to train men to gain ground to the front with -the minimum of exposure to the enemy’s fire, and as quickly as may -be, firstly, without firing, and, secondly, while firing themselves, -but in the latter case speed must be subordinated to the development -of a fire of sufficient accuracy and volume to largely neutralise -that of the enemy, for at this stage of the battle advances under -fire will only be possible if it is inaccurate; and the only certain -means of causing it to be inaccurate is by disturbing the enemy’s -nerves and aim by bringing to bear on him the fire both of supporting -troops and of the firing line itself (I.T., 118 (6)). - -The regulations do not encourage the opening of fire by units less -than two platoons at ranges over one thousand yards as the results -do not compensate for the delay. Under one thousand and up to six -hundred it is desired that fire should be controlled and directed, -i.e., the amount, and the target should be specified by commanders -(I.T., 116). Under six hundred yards it is recognised that -individual fire gives good results, and, moreover, control becomes -almost impossible. - -Divide your exercise accordingly. First, teach merely the advance -without firing, letting the men know that they are not to fire, as -a rule, without orders under six hundred yards, and then let them -advance firing at each halt behind cover, choosing their own target -and times of firing as they would do in the stage of “close fire,” -i.e., six or perhaps eight hundred yards up to assaulting distance, -which latter is about two hundred yards from the enemy’s line of -defences. - -This parade is one that can be done with very few men present, but it -is necessary to form them up into sections with a large proportion -of non-commissioned officers. Keep the men in their proper sections, -but, if necessary, join two or three together, so as to form sections -with three or four non-commissioned officers to each. Thus, if you -form four sections, they should each be in reality a boiling down of -the platoons. In future exercises I will also suppose that you thus -concentrate your men, keeping the members of each section together, -and form them into sections of size suitable to the work of the day, -and no further allusion will be made to this. - -Before taking the men on to the exercise ground, you should choose -a point on it from which you intend to start your advance. Some -fourteen hundred or less yards from this choose a position for your -skeleton enemy, who will consist of three or four old soldiers with -forty rounds of blank each. If men are not available, put up a few -red range flags. Whichever are used, put them into some position that -an enemy might reasonably occupy; do not simply dump them down on to -the ground. The skeleton enemy must be told to show up occasionally, -and to open a slow but regular fire as soon as they see your men -advancing, but only to keep it up as long as your men show themselves -in making their advance. A complete cessation of fire will denote -that your men are making such good use of cover as to be invisible -to the enemy. Let your men also know that these instructions have -been given, and that such an advance is the ideal to be sought for, -provided always that it is not absurdly slow. If neither men nor -flags are available you must make believe and point out a supposed -position at a supposed distance. I have already pointed out the -advantages of having a skeleton enemy to work against. - -In front of your starting point, and about four hundred yards from -it, decide on some point at which you will let the men halt after -they have made their way across the intervening space. Here I will -refer you to the diagram. The line AA´ is your starting point, CC´ -the enemy’s position. Your exercise consists in showing individual -men how to gain ground from AA´ as far as BB´, distant about four -hundred yards from AA´, with the minimum of exposure to the enemy’s -aimed fire. Draw up the sections, supposing there are two, on the -line AA´, fifty to one hundred yards apart, and let the men sit down -facing away from CC´ and, if possible, under cover, so that they may -not see how their comrades negotiate the course. Space the available -non-commissioned officers of each section along the course from A to -B and A´ to B´, with orders to supervise and criticise the advance -of each man within the limits of their beats. Allow a belt of twenty -to thirty yards broad from A to B and from A´ up to B´, within which -men must seek their cover. This belt is made broad here to afford -instruction, but when the men work together in their sections, it -will be much narrower, as they will then be extended at intervals of -five or six paces only. Start off one man at a time from each section -to cross from AA´ to BB´, to move as if under fire from the enemy in -rushes from one cover to another. As soon as a man reaches BB´ he -may fall out and watch the movements of the remainder. Do not send -off a fresh man until the preceding one has nearly reached BB´, so -that your non-commissioned officers may have good opportunity to look -at each man as he goes. As for yourself, be active in supervising -both sections, using your horse if you have one. - - DIAGRAM I. FOR EXERCISES I. & II. [Illustration: - - CC´ = Enemy’s position about 1400^X from AA´. Enemy being - represented by men with blank cartridge or flags. - - AA´ = Starting points 1400 yards from enemy’s position. - - Men start from AA´ to cross to BB´ without exposing themselves to - the enemy at CC.´ - - Crosses indicate cover, and the chain dotted lines routes by which - men may advance. - -AA´ to BB´ is about 400^X] - -The following are points to be attended to:—Before leaving their -cover, men must decide where their next halting place is to be, and -make for it quickly, and with decision. There must be no emerging -into the open, and then looking about for a bit of cover to go -for. The length of each rush should not be enough to let the enemy -have time for deliberate aim—fifty yards or so is quite the limit -for this. If there is no cover the men must lie down flat between -each rush. Occasionally it is advisable to make a long rush from -one good position to another at sprinting pace without stopping at -all (I.T., 121 (12)), so this should be practised sometimes, the -non-commissioned officers at that part of the beat being ordered -to tell the men what is needed. Once a man has decided on his next -halting place, and is in wind, he should leave his cover with a jump. -The slow uprising of a figure is sure to draw the enemy’s attention, -and make his fire more accurate than it would be if no intimation -were given him. Similarly, on reaching cover, men should fall down -quickly, and not lower themselves slowly to earth. - -Insist on a careful choice of cover, a very small depression or -elevation, even six inches, is enough to give cover from view, and -therefore helps in escaping aimed fire, but in peace time men will -not take trouble over apparently trifling things like this unless it -is rubbed into them by close supervision. Noticeable objects should -be avoided as the enemy may have taken their range, and they help -him to define a point on which to concentrate fire. If a man makes -mistakes and shows indecision at any part of the course, call him -back to the last cover he left, and let him start again from there -after pointing out what he has done wrong. - - - _II. The advance combined with individual fire._ - -The second part of the exercise is done in the same way as the first, -the men advancing and taking cover as before, but now using their -rifles. They have to be taught to use the cover to advantage, both -as a protection and as an aid to their shooting, and to take pains -in searching for a good target, and in their sighting, aiming and -firing. For purposes of instruction, six hundred yards is rather a -short range to open fire at, and I recommend your making a start at -eight hundred or so, i.e., two hundred yards beyond BB´ towards the -enemy, working up to four hundred. This necessitates judging distance -at beyond the practically point-blank ranges of the Lee-Enfield -rifle, and makes the men use their eyes keenly to spot the enemy, -while it avoids a certain amount of unreality which is apt to attach -to instructional movements carried on in front of a skeleton enemy at -the deadly short ranges under three hundred yards. - -Points which should be considered are:— - -To fire from the right and lower edge of any cover, not over the top. - -Make the men keep a count of the number of times they snap over the -course (i.e., cartridges used), and report to the non-commissioned -officer at the finish of their course. - -Let the men do their own judging distance, and let non-commissioned -officers drop at once on any man who either fails to do so, or -forgets, as they often do, to adjust the backsight. - -Cultivate a habit among the men of looking about for different -targets, not firing only straight in front of themselves, but on -their right and left, so that when they come to fire collectively -they may feel nothing new in being told to open the enfilade fire -recommended by I.T., 116 (11), and also get the custom of watching -for the enemy all along his front. - -These two exercises of advancing with and without firing are -the groundwork of the fighting efficiency of the soldier in the -attack, and will be found to call for every natural and acquired -qualification the individual possesses. Good shooting, quick -judgment, activity, wind, and everything else are needed if the -work is done with full observance of the conditions which would -exist under fire. Put the men through exercises of this sort several -times, and, if possible, on different ground, till they acquire -quickness in choosing cover and the arts that make an expert fighter. -Confidence in themselves will come with the skill they acquire, -and with confidence comes decision of mind, which is really more -important than bodily efficiency. If you have time, a useful rider to -this exercise is to work the men by pairs, as is recommended in the -Musketry Regulations for the observation of fire, and so introduce -them early to the use of the file organisation which I have advised -you to adopt. - - - - - EXERCISE II. - - RETIREMENT BY PAIRS. - - -A sound provision against panic among young troops is to accustom -them to regard a retirement as all in the day’s work, and not as -an exceptional undertaking which their anxiety may invest with -possibilities of disaster. The essence of successful retirement in -face of an enemy lies in the continuous opposition, or appearance -of it, offered to the enemy by one portion of the troops, while -others draw off to take post to cover the withdrawal of the rearmost -portion. I.T., 137, gives the idea in few words. It does not mention -individual training in this, but it is useful to put men through the -movements, both to cultivate cohesion in the ranks, and as a tactical -exercise. It may happen in war that an extended line has to give -ground when engaged with the enemy, and this under so heavy a fire as -to make movement except over short distances impossible without great -loss. Such a withdrawal would mean that the troops are in a very -tight corner, and would test them very highly, but that is another -matter. It may happen, and should be prepared for. A withdrawal -under these conditions might perhaps be carried out by the alternate -movement of men in files covered by the fire of the others, until -such a distance from the enemy had been obtained as to allow sections -or companies to take up the alteration. Up to that distance it will -be simply a reversal of what was done in Exercise I., but worked by -files—a front rank man and his rear rank man, one going back a short -distance, and the other firing to cover the movement. Again, men on -patrol or otherwise detached may have to retire to avoid capture, or -for many other reasons, when they might not be under close and heavy -fire, but still would be under the necessity of preventing the enemy -closing in on them or surrounding them. In this case, the length -of each withdrawal would be much longer than in the former case; -one man would fire while the other made off perhaps two or three -hundred yards at his best speed. Train for both contingencies; it -can be done in one and the same parade. Skeleton enemy as usual. For -the withdrawal under heavy fire, let the sections sit down and fall -out at BB´ (Diagram I.), and put out the non-commissioned officers -between BA and B´ A´ as before. Call out the men by files, tell them -to work back to A and A´, one firing, the other retiring. As a rule -they should retire past each other before halting. The same points -must be observed as in Exercise No. I, and the quicker they are in -movement the better, but they must be taught to go in quick time also -when so ordered (I.T., 137 (4)). - -For the retirement of a file as on patrol, do exactly the same, but -you should work over six hundred yards of ground or so to correct any -tendency to import the short rush into this exercise, which would -be out of place, and also to let men have more practice in looking -for suitable fire positions from which they can both fire on the -enemy, _and from which they can get away when their turn comes_, a -point they often neglect at first. The different nature of the two -exercises must be made quite clear. - -At this exercise you should bring before your men the need of using -all sorts of _ruses_ in a retirement, the use of rapid fire just -before withdrawing, the sham withdrawal acted by ceasing fire, and -retiring a few yards, but only to halt and re-open fire after a few -seconds if the enemy has been tempted to expose himself, thinking the -coast clear, the real withdrawal effected so carefully that the enemy -is not sure whether you are there still or not, and so on; and make -them put their own ideas of these plans into action and tell them if -they are doing what is feasible on service or not. Bar all “manœuvre -slimness,” i.e., anything that could not be done on service. - - - - - EXERCISE III. - - INDIVIDUAL TRAINING IN USE OF FIRE AND FIRE DISCIPLINE. - - -Early lessons in fire discipline can be given in single rank on the -parade ground, but the open country and extended order are wanted for -training men to the fullest extent under service conditions. Only -in the open country can be got the variety of targets, ranges and -the visual training which are necessary for a complete education. -Men must be taught, and taught again, that the taking up of extended -order, and movement over all sorts of ground, in no way mean that -they are to pass at once beyond the control of their unit leaders, or -that it is optional to continue to take any sort of pains with their -shooting just because their non-commissioned officers cannot stand -over them, but have to shout orders from a distance. - -This exercise consists in advancing and retiring in extended order -with fire and the use of cover when halted; but to allow for more -prolonged shooting practice and closer supervision than are possible -when carrying out an attack or retirement as on service, the halts -are longer and movements should at first be made in quick time. - -Put out your skeleton enemy on a good broad front, so as to allow -room for change of targets, and do not have them all in one straight -line, so that each target shall call for a change of sighting. Let -the sections work independently of each other under their section -commanders, who, with the other non-commissioned officers, will have -to act both as commanders and instructors. Bring the sections up to -about twelve hundred yards from the enemy; get them into a line with -intervals between them, i.e., spaces measuring from the flank of one -to the flank of the other, sufficient to admit of each section being -extended to two or three paces between men without its flank men -coming too close to those of other sections, e.g., with two sections -of eight file, i.e., sixteen men each; you must leave room for half -of each to extend to two paces towards the other, and keep a fair -interval; that is, from the centre of each of the above sections of -eight men in each rank you want 8 ÷ 2 (half the number in the front -rank) × 2 (two ranks) × 2 (two paces extension) = 16 paces for the -line extended and an interval of, say, 30 yards, which gives 46 -yards between each section centre to centre. Now, let the section -commanders order the men to extend, lie down, take cover and open -fire. The unit commander, the non-commissioned officer in charge of -the section, is to name the target and distance and also the rate of -fire, rapid or slow, at all distances over six hundred yards from -the enemy (I.T., 116 (5)), unless it is desired on occasion to train -men to do this for themselves. After fire has been delivered, direct -section commanders to proceed with the exercise, giving orders for -advancing, halting and firing, the advance to be made from cover to -cover as in Exercise No. I, but in quick time. Yourself supervise in -chief, and tell section commanders when you want to give orders as -to the firing or movement, and let them give the executive commands, -after which you and they should pass along the lines and scrutinise -each man’s actions in carrying out the orders, questioning them, and -repealing hints you may have given when telling them the object and -methods of the practice, if they appear not to be giving them effect. -The value of the practice depends on the orders you give as to the -firing and the following are suggested:— - -(_a_) Switching the fire of all the rifles on to different parts -of the enemy’s position, sometimes straight in front, _but quite -as often_ at his extreme flanks. This is to introduce the use of -enfilade fire (I.T., 116 (11)) and the habit of giving support by -fire to other units (F.S.R., 105 (4)), by concentrating the fire on -to particular targets. - -(_b_) Distributing the fire laterally along the whole or a part -of the enemy’s front (I.T., 116 (10)). This may be done by giving -the section a particular extent of the enemy’s front, e.g., “from -the dry tree to the gate in the hedge.” The section commander -then allots those of the enemy, who can be viewed within his bit -of front to individual men, or preferably files of men, who are -to treat them as their especial charge and keep on firing at them -till otherwise ordered, or till the enemy shifts. Of course, if -there is not enough of the skeleton enemy to give each file in the -section a live antagonist (and there won’t be on your parades), the -commander must indicate bits of cover which individual men of the -enemy might be expected to use and tell his men to fire at these -spots. This is a most important practice, and needs a good deal of -attention and application before the men get really quick at it. It -means, of course, that on service you will make it your business -to allow as few of the enemy’s riflemen as possible to be free of -the distraction of having some bullets landing about them, to upset -their nerves and aim. Unless some plan is adopted to do this all -along his line, it is all too probable your men will be exposed to -some accurate fire from rifles held in steady hands, and even one -rifle so held has, to my knowledge, caused a loss of eleven men in -as many minutes. This lateral distribution is rather difficult, but -it is easy, compared with the concomitant task of spotting where the -men of the enemy are hidden, if they really try to hide, at anything -but the shortest fighting ranges. The only remedy for this is for -each private to carry field glasses of sorts; you will not get them -from Government, but if any of your men are keen enough to go in -for spotting a hidden enemy for themselves with glasses and would -bring their own to parade, forbid them not, but encourage it. I have -been told that in some of the yeomanry corps in the South African -war nearly every trooper raised somehow and somewhere a pair of -glasses—some were mother o’ pearl and silver-mounted, but did the -spotting all right in spite of that. - -(_c_) Passing orders and changing targets. Under heavy fire -non-commissioned officers will not be able to move along the line, -and orders must be passed either by word of mouth or by written -messages passed from hand to hand; the former is apt to be slow, -and the orders garbled en route unless practised beforehand; the -latter is not very practical as men in action are too busy to read -bits of paper or trouble themselves to see that they are passed on -(I.T., 119 (4)). To practise the verbal method while the men are -engaged in firing at any particular target, give orders to one man -in a low tone (you would have to speak loud if ball cartridge were -being used) to fire at some other target, and to pass the word. -The man then tells his neighbours on each side, and yourself and a -non-commissioned officer then follow the order each way, and when a -man varies it admonish him to repeat just what he got from the last -speaker, no more and no less. In a little time the men will become -exact in taking and passing messages. This method should be confined -to directions about firing; orders for movement should invariably -be given by commanders by word themselves or signal, and men should -not be allowed to repeat these, as it may lead to grave mistakes on -service, as a signal may be seen and acted on by someone for whom it -was not intended. - -(_d_) Besides firing at the skeleton enemy or bits of cover, let -fire be directed at civilians who are moving about in the field of -view. Call on some individual man by name to choose some such target, -and tell him he has to pass the word to the rest of his squad what -target he has chosen and to fire at it. This gives practice in target -definition, i.e., describing its position so that other men can know -just where to look for it. It is not easy in a landscape devoid of -noticeable objects to do this quickly, but it is important, as the -difficulty of locating a well-concealed enemy with smokeless powder -requires that every pair of eyes in the ranks should be engaged in -the search till all the positions of the enemy’s riflemen are seen, -and the information given to everyone in the firing line. Until this -is done, the affair is one of trying to neutralise aimed by unaimed -fire, a pretty hopeless task. Hence train your men to use their eyes -for seeing and their tongues for description. - -(_e_) Accustoming the men to judge distance, and use their backsights -without orders. Judging distance for the men as a formal practice is -confined to ranges under 800 yards, but it does no harm to let them -judge greater ranges. Let the unit commanders define targets to be -fired at, omitting to state the range, and let the men judge it for -themselves and fire. Walk up the line and see that no man forgets to -adjust his backsight for the distance he estimates. If possible, have -the correct ranges taken previously with a range finder, and let the -men know what they are after they have aimed. Each change of target -gives the men a useful lesson in judging distance. - -(_f_) Having put the men through all sorts of paces in the way of -firing while advancing and retiring, in quick time do the same thing -again, but with the movements in double time, and, in addition, -carry out the increases and decreases of the extension, inclines and -changes of direction given in I.T., 93, throughout insisting on the -same steadiness in firing as when in quick time. All this will at -first probably get the men “rattled,” and the benefit of it is that -after some of it they will get over being “rattled,” and will not let -hurried orders or speed of movement interfere with deliberation and -steadiness in shooting. - - - - - EXERCISE IV. - - THE ASSAULT. - - -Exercise III. can suitably be wound up by a practice in delivering -an assault, as this does not take long, and the moral may be pointed -that all fire training is only a preparation for a successful -assault. The fixing of bayonets before assault commonly leads to -a complete cessation of fire in the firing line. This is quite -wrong, as such complete cessation of fire by the firing line must -largely surrender for the time being that superiority of fire which -facilitates the delivery of the assault (I.T., 121 (7)), for it gives -the enemy a chance to take aim again. Supporting fire by artillery -or infantry not in the firing line cannot be relied on when the -firing line has reached assaulting distance. Therefore, do not have a -simultaneous fixing of bayonets, but let one-half fix while the other -fires, and the best arrangement is evidently one that ensures a fire -being kept up along the whole front and not in patches. The system I -have found most satisfactory is to fix bayonets by ranks, the front -rank fixing while the rear rank continues firing, and then the rear -rank fixing while the front rank fires. It may be done by odd and -even files, or other ways, but, the company being organised in files, -the same men are usually in the front and rear rank, and there is no -difficulty in their remembering which they are. The important thing -is to adhere to one system once it is adopted, and have it well -understood by all. It does not matter much if a few men fix bayonets -out of turn, so long as the fire is merely diminished and not stopped -during the time bayonets are being fixed. In the charge, the men -should work by their files, i.e., the two men of each file should act -together and run at the same objective. The meaning of this is that -in actual conflict two men would go together for the same individual -enemy, and between the two of them they would be pretty sure to bring -him to an untimely end, if the enemy really waited for the steel, and -with less chance of his doing damage than if the combat took place -man-to-man; thereafter they could turn their attentions to some other -person. - -For the practice choose and indicate any position for assault; work -sections up to about two hundred yards from it, and then order rapid -fire and bayonets to be fixed. As soon as all are ready, order the -charge to be sounded. (I.T., 124). When the men hear the bugle they -must at once jump from their cover and go straight and hard at the -position; there must be no waiting by individuals to fire a last shot -or two. The rush should be made suddenly and swiftly, so that the -enemy has no time to see what is happening before the men are well on -their way at him. When the position is reached, pass right through -it and well beyond it, to escape hostile gunfire (I.T., 124 (5)), -and then order the “Halt,” when the men may lie down under cover and -open a pursuing fire. Walk along the line and see, with the help of -non-commissioned officers, whether men of each file are together; if -so, it will be proof that they have obeyed the directions to keep -together during the charge. Allow a minute or two of the pursuing -fire, then let section or platoon commanders sound their whistles, -close and reform their sections under cover. On the whistle-sound -(a succession of short blasts), men rise and double to where the -commander is, resume their places, and lie down. This re-organisation -is very important for you as company commander, for by it you get -your men formed up quickly into platoons and ready to be closed -into company or to take fresh orders in the minimum of time. The -usual thing seen is that after the assault the ground is covered -with a mixture of men of all companies staring about, and apparently -thinking the show at an end, whereas on service this is the very time -you may expect either a counter-attack by infantry or a burst of -artillery fire directed on the lost position. - -To repeat the orders of the assault: “Rapid Fire; Fix Bayonets; -Charge; Halt and Take Cover; Commence Fire; Rally and Close Under -Cover,” and be ready for further happenings. - - - - - EXERCISE V. - - THE SECTION AND PLATOON IN THE ATTACK. - - -Having trained the individual men in the work needed of them, the -next step is to make use of that individual skill to the best effect -in combination under orders of a commander. The section is the -lowest unit recognised for _training_ (I.T., 107), and it also is -the normal unit used in firing (I.T., 6 (4)). When the company is -advancing in the attack, or retiring, its sections and platoons will -often be widely separated from each other, and the company commander -cannot look after each one in detail, so that the platoon commanders, -and under them the section commanders, must be fully competent to -lead their men without supervision, in accordance with the general -intention given them before the company opened out. So the training -of men in combination must be accompanied by the training of your -section and platoon commanders. - -The duties of fire unit commanders are laid down in I.T., 116 (5), -and those of section commanders in I.T., 116 and 123 (10). Before -you proceed with this exercise have up these non-commissioned -officers and devote ten minutes to an exposition of what is contained -in the above paragraphs. Dilate on them, and show how neglect of -those duties hampers the company commanders. At the same time, -desire them to maintain among the men during sectional exercises the -standard of individual training which was obtained in the preliminary -exercises. Unless they do so the men will soon cease to apply what -they then learnt, and so forget it in battle until the occurrence of -casualties impresses its value afresh in their minds. Also give them -the gist of what follows as to the advance and description of fire -phases. - -The exercise gives commanders the opportunity of doing what they -will have to do when the company is attacking or retiring, but -without their having to keep an eye on the movements of the other -platoons. The men should now be extended at full intervals as on -service, five or six yards apart, this being held to be the most -that is needed. Put out the skeleton enemy in groups, one group as -objective of attack for each section or platoon on parade, and the -groups sufficiently apart to prevent them interfering with each other -when extended as above, for they are to act independently. Take up -the advance as if at fourteen hundred from the enemy, when his rifle -fire on open ground would compel you to change from small columns -of sections or platoons into the line of extended men (I.T., 118 -(5)). The advance up to assaulting distance, from fourteen hundred -yards, consists (I.T., 121 (7)), in the first place, of an advance -to fire positions. Now Musketry Regulations lay down that fire by -less than two platoons is of little effect over one thousand yards, -so do not encourage commanders to open fire till one thousand yards -at least, and use the space fourteen hundred to one thousand yards -for instruction in getting their sections or platoons forward as -quickly, and with as little exposure, as possible. Secondly, the -advance consists of a fire fight combined with further advances up -to the assaulting position. In this fire fight controlled collective -fire is better than individual fire (I.T., 116 (7) (iii)), so up to -six hundred yards let firing take place, only on the specific orders -of commanders, who accordingly are to name the targets and ranges. In -this phase therefore make them choose forward fire positions and work -their units forward, using controlled collective fire at the same -time. - -Under six hundred yards it is apparently held best to accept the -inevitable and allow individual fire, the unit commanders being still -responsible for getting their men forward up to the position of -assault—about two hundred yards from the enemy. Still at this close -range unit commanders should do what they can to direct the fire, and -especially they should see that men fire slowly and carefully. In -general the rate of firing or snapping is far too fast, and pouches -would be empty long before the assaulting position would be reached. - -Owing to the great importance of training the sections, it is -advisable to let them do this exercise, through both the phases -below, separately from each other, and not in platoon. When they know -all about it, let them work in platoon. - -Having drawn up your sections in line at fourteen hundred yards, -order the section commanders to extend and move on, and signal the -skeleton enemy to open fire. - - -_First Phase: Fourteen to One Thousand Yards, Gaining Ground Without - Firing._ - -Practise the section commanders in all ways of getting their sections -forward without undue exposure or delay, by rushes of the whole -section, man-by-man from one and both flanks and by files, together, -and any other way that suggests itself. Stand over the section -commanders in turn and tell them to advance the section by one method -and then by another, and ask them which seems most suitable for -various conditions of fire and ground (I.T., 118 (4)). The advance -should be steady and determined. Before starting the advance from one -position to another, section commanders are to decide and _must tell -the men_ to what point they mean the next advance to be made (I.T., -108 (2)), in the same way as individual men were taught to mark their -next halting places. - -Attention must be paid to the way in which advances are inaugurated. -Rushes must be sudden and simultaneous (I.T., 92 (5)). The men have -been trained to leave their cover quickly. The unit commander must -give his directions for the next move without getting up (if himself -lying) and tell the men to be prepared; when all are ready, he and -the men must jump up together and rush at once on the word or signal. -The object of this, of course, is to avoid a concentrated fire being -directed on the unit commander, and, perhaps, the two or three men -nearest him, if they get up before the others, which would make it -likely that some of them would be hit immediately, while the rest -of the unit looked for a new leader, and so no advance take place; -whereas if everyone gets on the move together a casualty or two will -not bring the whole to a standstill. Of course, commanders should -lead the way, but they must get in front by sprinting the first few -yards. - - - _Second Phase: One thousand to Six Hundred Yards (Collective Fire) - and Six Hundred to Two Hundred Yards (Individual Fire)._ - -As soon as a section begins to fire, it becomes possible for it to -practise the lessons in the use of fire which were learnt in Exercise -III., such as concentration and distribution of fire. From one -position the commander must choose his next fire position, and work -his section up to it in whatever way is most suitable. On flat and -open ground this position may simply be the halting place of the next -rush, thirty or forty paces to the front, but it is more instructive -and practical to have positions far enough from each other, say one -hundred and fifty or two hundred yards, to necessitate the advancing -section making several successive rushes and using various devices -to gain ground without attracting the enemy’s attention. Practise -sections in all ways of advancing from one position to another, -as was done before firing began, and encourage the use of covered -ways. This exercise, if properly done, represents what the section -would have to do in battle. For the purpose of instruction, the unit -commanders should be allowed to move about as instructors, but when -all ranks have been through the exercise and know what is needed, you -should practise it under service conditions, and tell unit commanders -to behave as if under fire; this is important, as it lets all see -how much will be asked of the individual man under fire, and how -difficult it is to exercise any wide control. - -For the same reason you must in this exercise begin the practice of -ordering casualties of leaders, and carry it on through the whole of -the rest of the training. Order section commanders to be casualties, -and let the next senior man carry on, then order that man to become -a casualty, and let the next one take command. Collect these -casualties with you and let them go round with you, and have for a -time the onlooker’s view of the game. Do not stint in ordering them, -but let every man be ready to take up command. This readiness to -assume command and to carry on the advance in spite of the absence -of leaders is most valuable in battle and on parade for training, -keeps men’s attention fixed on the business, and helps to counteract -disorder when companies and sections get mixed up in reinforcement in -battalion attack. - -Under six hundred yards let the men use individual fire, choosing -their own targets; at this time try to get them into the way of -looking for the targets which most require to be shot at at the -moment—they must be always looking along the enemy’s line, and must -not acquire the paralysing habit of only seeing straight in front of -themselves. - -Call on unit commanders to keep in view the question of expenditure -of ammunition. It is no good ordering men to snap-fire 200 times in -the course of an advance when they would only have 100 rounds in -their pouches on service, and no means of getting more; when blank -is being used they should see that the ammunition of casualties is -collected and redistributed. - -At some time in the course of this exercise the section must be -practised in improving cover as if under fire, i.e., working lying -down. The nature of the work depends on what tools you have, but it -should be attempted if possible. Order the section to do it when -halted together in some fire position. At first they will shape -badly and expose themselves a lot, but if you have time for practice -they get into the way of digging in very quickly. If there are stones -pile up “schanzes.” Attention should be paid to concealment of the -cover, so as not to make it a target for the whole countryside, and -it must give cover from fire or view, or both; one often sees men -making molehills which show up their position without being capable -of stopping a bullet. Better not make them at all than that way. - -Wind up the advance occasionally by an assault, as it is a mistake -to let the idea take hold that the fire fight is the end of all -things. This, I think, is the reason that the word “skirmishing” has -disappeared from the book of training, as it connoted an indecisive -action, whereas the whole spirit of the present training is that it -shall be directed to the delivery of an assault and the ousting of -the enemy from his position. Scouts are the only people who may have -to skirmish in the former accepted meaning of the word, and they -only do so until the firing line joins them, or they withdraw after -reconnoitring. - - - _In Platoon._ - -Next work the sections together in their platoons on similar lines. -Practise again all ways of gaining ground; by rushes of the whole -platoon, or if one or more sections, man by man, and so on, as taught -to the section. Fire should be directed by the platoon commander, and -controlled by the section commander. Teach the lateral distribution -of fire along a given front among the four sections of the platoon. -Teach also the principle of covering fire, one section being sent -to make its way with every use of cover to a forward fire position, -while the remainder continue firing. The first section, on arrival -at the new fire position, opens fire, and the others follow in -due course, one section only being dumb while the movement is in -progress. If there is a choice of good lines of advance it is better -that sections should not follow each other on one line, as the enemy -may have noticed the move and be waiting for them. - - - - - EXERCISE VI. - - THE SECTION AND PLATOON IN RETIREMENT. - - -For the general principles of retirements see I.T., 137. The platoon, -when working with the company, will take its turn at being the -rearmost portion of the troops, and will have the difficult task of -getting away while in touch with the enemy, but its retirement will -be covered by the fire of other portions of the company. On the other -hand, if a platoon or section finds itself beyond support from other -troops, as might happen often enough, it will have to act itself as a -rearguard and retire by alternate parts. - -In both cases great advantage is gained if the position held can be -vacated so stealthily that the enemy shall not be aware of its having -been vacated till the defenders are well on their way to the rear. -For this reason it will be worth while to accustom the men to employ, -when practicable, a procedure used in mountain warfare, withdrawing -the bulk of men first and leaving only a few quick-footed men to keep -up appearances and fire as long as possible and then retiring them -at speed. Also all men must be taught to grovel backwards on their -stomachs from the crest of their fire position till sufficiently -under cover, if there is cover, to stand up without being seen, after -which they rise and make off. - -Send out the skeleton enemy with instructions to follow up the -retirement slowly, and not to close in on the sections, as it is easy -and tempting to do this when there are no bullets in the rifles. - - (_a_) _As a Section or Platoon Acting with the Company._ - -Do the practice first by sections and then in platoon. Draw up the -unit on a fire position about eight hundred yards from the enemy, the -men in extended order, lying down, and open fire on the enemy. Tell -the commander to choose his next halting place and retire his unit -on it, which he should do on the lines before indicated. The halting -places should be chosen as far apart as two to four hundred yards; -short retirements merely prolong the time exposure to fire and should -not be used unless the enemy are very close or the fire very heavy. -Once the men are clear of the position, they should move as fast as -they can, trusting to escape casualties, by speed, the alteration -of range, and the fire of the few men left on the position. As a -rule, carry out all retirements at the double, so that the men shall -not be confused by the hasty movement. As soon as the first party -has reached the new position, the fringe of men left on the old one -should creep back and go as hard as they can to rejoin their section -or platoon, and they should be taught to judge the time of going for -themselves, so as not to “let in” the section or themselves, by going -too early or staying too late. Repeat the movement to one or two -further positions. It is a strenuous practice and makes demands on -the men’s limbs, wind, and willingness, but the rearguard is the post -of honour and danger. Order casualties of leaders from time to time, -and let the men be called to move in quick time sometimes, which they -would have to do if there were signs of unsteadiness. - - (_b_) _As a Section or Platoon Acting Alone._ - -Act on the same lines as before, but let the commander run the -show, which he should be able to do, after having done it under -supervision. One party (a file or two in the case of a section, -or one or two sections in that of a platoon) gets back to a fire -position and opens fire to cover the retirement of the other. In -general, it is better that both parties should not fall back on one -and the same fire position; on the contrary, if they act on a wide -front in ordinary country—say, three hundred yards apart—their fire -is equally effective, but the enemy is broken up, and the danger of -their being outflanked or surrounded is less. For the same reason it -is good practice, if the platoon is strong, to send out groups of -four or five men still further on the flanks, and a group to precede -the whole on the line of retirement by six hundred yards or so, in -order to occupy positions and deny them to the enemy, and after one -or two turns of this exercise tell the skeleton enemy to follow on -harder and try to work round the flanks. In this part also continue -to order casualties of leaders. - - - - - EXERCISE VII. - - THE SECTION AND PLATOON IN INDEPENDENT ATTACK. - - -It is very important to secure the intelligent co-operation of -section and platoon commanders in the operations in which their -company or battalion is taking part. I have read that in the -Russo-Japanese War the result of one of the battles—I think at -Penlin, 31st July—turned on the action of an infantry section who -gained a footing on the extreme flank of the Russian line, and -drove off the defenders in the immediate vicinity, opened a way for -the advance of the greater numbers, and led to the outflanking and -retreat of the whole Russian force. If you give your unit commanders -some chances of carrying out attacks, acting as if unsupported by -other troops, they will find themselves faced with the same problems -which confront commanders of larger bodies in the attack, and they -will be more likely, when acting in combination, to look beyond just -the limits of their own commands; they will be led to comprehend -the object of operations and the difficulties in the way, and -will become quick to seize any opportunity to further the general -plan without waiting for orders. It is true that so small a body -as a section would seldom be formally told to attack an objective -single-handed, but there are often occasions on service when a -platoon might have to carry out an attack on a small scale, as when a -few of the enemy’s riflemen are making themselves unpleasant, while -not in sufficient force to do more than “snipe,” or to require the -diversion against them of a whole company. Though a section as now -constituted is a very small unit to work with, I think no excuse is -needed for performing the attack with the smallest unit, having in -view the excellent training it forms for non-commissioned officers -and men. However, for this practice, it is advisable to form sections -somewhat above the usual strength, by joining two together, so as -to give at least eighteen rifles in the whole. After having put the -sections through the exercise, you will, of course, let the platoon -commanders carry out the attack with their platoons. - -Put out a skeleton enemy of three or four men for each platoon or -section, or one only for all to attack in turn, and post this enemy -in some commanding place, with a good field of view and fire so -that if possible the unit shall have twelve to eight hundred yards -to manœuvre over before coming to close quarters. As an example, -give out the supposition that this enemy are a cavalry patrol of the -enemy, who have dismounted and are using their rifles on the company -as it is on the move from somewhere to somewhere else. The section or -platoon is ordered to drive them off, neutralise their fire, or hold -them in check, in case they should be the forerunners of a greater -number. The enemy should begin to fire on a signal from you (with -your flag), which you should give as you tell off the commander for -the duty. If the other units are to attack the same enemy in turn, -you should halt them under cover or turn them to the rear, so as not -to see too much of the method the first lot choose to carry out their -job. - -The method of the attack will depend on the nature of the ground—what -suits one case may not suit another, and there may be two or three -courses open in attacking any one position. The commander should -accordingly look well at the ground before deciding how he will carry -out the attack, but there are certain principles common to attacks, -great or small, which he should put into practice. He should secure -himself from interruption on his flanks and rear, and he should -provide a supporting fire to distract the enemy and cover the advance -of his main force. He cannot make large detachments or indulge in -wide patrolling, nor would such small bodies as platoons be sent -off to attack if such were advisable; but, at least he can post a -file or two on some high ground, or, failing that, on one flank out -of decisive range of the enemy, i.e., about eight hundred yards -from him, with orders to keep up a steady fire until his advance -masks their fire. This will prevent, or at least give warning of, -an attempt to cut in on the rear. He may also send a file perhaps -two or three hundred yards to either flank, to move parallel with -his advance and prevent his being enfiladed at short range, if the -enemy should be tactless enough to avail himself of a chance of -meeting the advance by a counter-attack. Until he sees pretty well -what he has in front of him, he should divide his party into two, -sending one to engage the enemy and keeping the other as a reserve to -support the first by fire if they get into difficulties, and to be -available to carry on the attack after the other has got the enemy -well busy, either by reinforcing it directly, or, better still, by -continuing the advance along a fresh line leading to some position -from which the enemy can be finally turned out, either by fire or -by a charge, the first half joining in and advancing as soon as the -enemy has turned his attention to the new attack. Both parties should -keep scouts or a patrol of some sort out in front of them until the -foreground is proved not to contain any hidden body of the enemy, -or until the opening of fire by their own side makes it necessary -for the scouts to merge into the firing line. I have seen on service -a half-company go off to take post as a piquet on a long ridge; it -neglected the above precautions, beyond having some scouts in front. -There were four or five of the enemy on the ridge, and they waited -till the scouts were close, shot some down and drove the others to -cover, and then turned their fire on to the half-company, who were -also driven to ground, and, as there was little cover, they were -tied up till set free by some more infantry, who had to be specially -sent off to move along the ridge. Had the half-company moved in two -portions, the first would have contained this weak enemy, and the -rear party could easily have circled round and got on to the ridge -farther along, which would at once have caused the enemy to clear -out. See F.S.R., I., I, as to the results of the violation of the -principles of leading troops, and as therein directed, impress the -principles taught on the minds of your non-commissioned officers, who -are commanders, albeit only of platoons and sections. - - - - - EXERCISE VIII. - - THE PLATOON AS AN ADVANCED GUARD AND AS A FLANK GUARD. - - -(_a_) When the company is on the march, it should always be preceded -by an advanced guard—either a party of scouts, or, more usually, by -one of the platoons. After the advanced guard comes in contact with -the enemy its further action becomes either an attack to drive off -the enemy, or a defence to delay his advancing, according to his -strength and tactics; so I propose here merely to indicate suitable -formations of march in ordinary, i.e., non-mountainous country, so -that the platoons may be practised in taking them up without delay on -being told off for the duty. The exercise takes little time, and can -be done on the same parade as the flank guard exercise. - -An advanced guard may come under Are at any moment, and to provide -against surprise (F.S.R., 64), its leading portions may move in -extended order. The duties are given in F.S.R., 68, and apply quite -completely to so small a body as a platoon. The platoon should be -divided into a vanguard and a main guard. For the vanguard, a common -plan is simply to extend a section on either side of the road, but I -prefer to divide the section into three patrols, or more if strength -permits, who work along in a general line—one to search the road -and its immediate vicinity, and one on each side. The nature of the -country regulates the breadth of ground the centre patrol can search -from the road, and the distance to which the others are sent out on -each side. The other sections follow as main guard, not so close as -to be at once mixed up with the vanguard if fire is opened on the -latter, nor so far as to be unable to support it quickly with fire. -The advanced guard is responsible for keeping touch with the main -body (the company) (F.S.R., 64 (4)), but the company commander should -satisfy himself that this is being done. If view is restricted, the -main guard must drop a connecting file to keep connection. This file -must march with their beards on their shoulders, to see what the -company is doing, and let the commander know, and also to signal -to the company, if the platoon has had to halt. If the country is -open, the commander should still tell off a file for this duty, who -will march with the platoon, but be continually on the look-out to -the rear. The platoon commander ought, of course, to keep a watch -himself, but may have other things to attend to, and it is well to -take precautions against the platoon either getting too far in front -or letting the company get too close to it, by marching on while the -platoon is investigating some suspicious locality. - - - (_b_) _The Platoon as a Flank Guard._ - -A platoon may sometimes be used as a flank guard, as when a small -convoy is on the march with only a company or two as escort. Flank -guards are dismissed in a few words in F.S.R., 70. It is worth while -to practise them once or twice to avoid delay in taking up the -formation when the march is being started, or in improvising a method -of fighting off the enemy if he attacks. - -Represent the convoy or whatever it is by a man with a red flag to -move along the road; the platoon is then to move along parallel to -the road, and far enough off to afford protection from effective -rifle fire, i.e., at least eight hundred yards in open country. The -skeleton enemy should be instructed to keep about the same distance -again on the flank beyond the platoon, and to move along parallel -with it without closing in, opening fire on an agreed signal. - -The march formation should be on the same principles as those for the -advanced guard. The platoon should move in two bodies, and patrols -or scouts should precede it, both in the direction of the march and -towards the flank which is being guarded. It is important to keep -touch with the main body by connecting files at all times, otherwise -if the road changes direction out of view of the flank guard it may -separate them too far or bring them too close to the company. - -The method of fighting merely to hold off the enemy resembles that -used by a rear guard for the same purpose, i.e., fire and movement -by alternate portions. When the enemy opens fire on your signal, the -patrol on the flank either falls back, or the platoon reinforces it. -The patrol in the line of advance should still continue to precede -the movements of the platoon in that direction, and should be told to -conform to its movement. The platoon replies to the enemy’s fire as -soon as possible and begins the lateral fight—one half is sent, if -possible under cover, to take up a fire position farther along the -direction of the line of march, preceded by the patrol, which, to -some extent, secures it from surprise from that direction. As soon -as the leading party has found a fire position and opens its fire, -the other follows it, and either halts alongside it, so allowing it -to go off to a new position, or continues its movement beyond it -and takes up a third position to cover the further movements. The -latter method is the quicker, as it saves the time of replacing men -of the first party in their fire position by those of the second. The -exercise need not be prolonged, as a few of these lateral movements -are quite sufficient illustration to enable the men in future to take -up their duty quickly. - - - - - EXERCISE IX. - - PRELIMINARY FOR THE ATTACK BY THE COMPANY IN BATTALION. - - -A company attacking as part of the battalion is sure to find the -men of different platoons mixed up in the course of the attack with -those of other platoons, both of that company and of others. Before -practising the attack, accompanied with this mixture of platoons, -it is advisable to train them and their non-commissioned officers -for their duties without allowing any mixing up. This may be done by -bringing all the platoons of the company up into one line, and then -extending each on its own ground. The result is that each platoon -may be taken to represent the leading platoon of four companies told -off to furnish the firing line and supports (I.T., 122). The four -platoons form thus the firing line, the other three supposititious -platoons of each company being in support. This formation would be -taken up when the enemy’s rifle fire began to be effective, i.e., -at or under fourteen hundred yards. Within this distance the firing -line has to press on through the zones in which it uses collective -and individual fire up to assaulting distance, being reinforced as -needed, firstly by the supports, and finally at the time of the -assault by all or part of the local reserve, which, in this case, -would be composed of the four companies of the battalion not detailed -to furnish the firing line and supports. - -Put out a skeleton enemy with orders to remain in one position, and -fire slowly, but continuously. Draw up the four platoons, or as many -as are present of the company at fourteen hundred yards or so from -the enemy, in one line and at sufficient intervals to allow of their -extending to five paces, _plus_ some space between flanks of sections -after extension, to allow plenty of choice of lines of advance. -Indicate to each platoon a part of the enemy’s position which it is -to regard as its final objective of assault (I.T., 121 (3)). Have the -men extended to five paces, and carry out the attack right through on -the lines of Exercise V., and finish with an assault and rally after -it. Each company would have an officer with its platoon in the firing -line to direct the fire. If fire is opened between fourteen hundred -and one thousand yards, it will not be effective against ordinary -targets unless the whole four platoons direct their fire on the same -target. Under one thousand yards fire should be controlled by section -commanders and directed by platoon commanders. - -Practise concentration of the fire of the four platoons on one part -of the enemy’s line and lateral distribution of fire _within the -limits of that part_. Give each platoon a fraction of this fraction -of the enemy’s frontage to deal with, and let the platoon commander -again tell off his sections to fire at various marks inside _his_ -limits. Again switch the fire of all four platoons on to some other -particular bit of the enemy’s position, as done in previous exercises. - -To do this you must introduce and work with thoroughness a system of -inter-communication (I.T., 119), but it should be one approved and -adopted by your battalion commander, otherwise each company of the -battalion may be found using a different one. It is to be understood -that orders as to the direction of fire in no way interfere with the -gaining of ground to the front, a platoon firing at one object ceases -fire in order to advance, but resumes its fire on the same object -when it again halts. - -As soon as section fire is opened, encourage mutual support, some -part of the line firing while others advance, and make section -commanders continue to observe this principle. - -At some one parade for this exercise halt the whole line during the -attack and practise entrenching under fire, the men working lying -down (I.T., 121 (13)). Thereafter resume the advance. - -Move about yourself and let your section commanders do so also, and -check any slovenly work on the part of the men in using, quitting, -or getting into cover, and in the use of their rifles and judging -distance if, as should often be done, it is left to them to estimate -how far they are from the target of the moment. - - - - - EXERCISE X. - - THE COMPANY IN ATTACK WITH THE BATTALION UNDER ARTILLERY FIRE. - - -When the battalion is moving forward to attack, and before the -enemy’s rifle fire is more than a distant and future danger, that of -his artillery becomes an imminent and formidable menace as soon as -the limits of its range are crossed, because of the suddenness with -which it is capable of dealing destruction. Whether his artillery -actually opens on the battalion is another matter. If the battalion -shows up as a tempting target in column of route or mass, he most -certainly will fire on it, but if it is skilfully led it may possibly -escape his notice altogether; at the same time, it is hardly likely -that it can move from five thousand to fourteen hundred yards from -the enemy’s infantry without giving some indications of its movement, -and the probability is, that at some part of the advance it will -find itself the recipient of the enemy’s attention. To escape the -effect of this fire, the battalion and the company will have to -break up into small shallow columns such as platoons or sections at -least 50 yards from each other laterally (I.T., 118) and two hundred -yards from front to rear; in fact, a lot of little groups of men -sufficiently apart to prevent the burst of one shell covering more -than one group. The advance in this order constitutes the first phase -of the infantry attack. The company must be practised in getting into -this formation, and moving in it so as to avoid confusion in action, -and also to let non-commissioned officers and men understand that -this formation does not free them from the control of their commander. - -At manœuvres and exercises the adoption of this formation is -sometimes burked on various pretexts, of which the most heinous is to -say that the results of artillery fire are overrated, and the risk -run in keeping in closed formation is more than compensated for by -the comfort of the men, maintenance of control and saving of time. -This theory I fancy had its origin in the South African War, where -the Boer artillery was skilful but exiguous, if judged by European -standards. I have not been under shell fire myself, but I have seen -the results of it on a column of about two hundred men who came along -a watercourse two thousand yards or so from the guns, in something -resembling a march formation. The guns had the range, and the enemy -left about fifty dead in that watercourse in a few minutes, so -personally I am going to open out my company and trust to my peace -training of it to keep it in hand and get it along fast enough to be -on the spot when wanted. - -I need hardly give details how to practise this. The point is, to get -the company opened out quickly and without confusion, and this is to -be done by telling your platoon commanders what you want and where -they are to go, and not by any drill. Platoons may further split up -into columns of sections. Leave it to your platoon commanders to have -the sections moved apart to intervals of fifty yards. If the enemy’s -artillery is straight in front, a diamond formation seems suitable—a -platoon at each angle—the length of the diagonal front to rear being -over two hundred yards and side to side over one hundred; or the -platoons may simply follow each other at two hundred yards distance, -though this is not a very handy arrangement. But, subject to keeping -the distances large enough, it is not the formation that matters, but -the way it is taken up, and I will leave it at that. - -At the end of this phase of endurance of the enemy’s artillery fire -the company comes under rifle fire and has to take to extended -order, and on service it would perhaps have to do this and plunge -into the attack without the platoons closing in from the scattered -formation in which they have so far moved. But for the first few -times you should close up at fourteen hundred yards and start from -there, so as to tell the men what is next to be done when they come -under rifle fire, and in any case the size of your exercise ground -would probably necessitate your doing the two phases over more or -less the same bit of ground. - - - - - EXERCISE XI. - - THE COMPANY IN ATTACK WITH THE BATTALION, UNDER RIFLE FIRE. - - -The immediate objects of the fire fight within effective rifle range -are to produce a fire sufficiently heavy to overcome the fire of -the defence, and to reach a position from which the assault can be -delivered (I.T., 121 (5 and 6)). In theory, then, the desideratum -is to get so many men up to about two hundred yards from the enemy -that they form a line practically shoulder to shoulder, in order -that their fire may be at least as heavy as that of the enemy, -if the latter are also in one continuous line, and in default of -circumstances admitting of effective covering fire being maintained -from positions in rear or on a flank. On this supposition it is -frequently argued that a battalion and its companies, when advancing -to the attack, should do so on a front not greater than that which -the battalion would occupy if it were in single rank, but this does -not really follow. The nature of the ground may be such that to -attempt to build up a shoulder-to-shoulder firing line all along -the enemy’s position within charging distance, may be merely to send -men to useless destruction by exposing them on fire-swept spaces, -where they are sure to be knocked over before they can do any good. -On the other hand, there may be other points where men may be massed -so as to give not only a firing line of maximum density, but also -a supporting force both to replace casualties and to carry out the -assault. These are the points which it is of importance to gain and -hold in strength sufficient to carry out the object of the attack—the -assault. It is the duty of the battalion commander to give each of -his firing line companies some such point as their objective, and to -define the frontage and direction of their attack. It is similarly -the duty of the commander of a firing line company to give each of -his sections an objective within the limits assigned to his company -(I.T., 122 (4) and 123 (3-)). The problem for solution is, how to -get to those points, and so it does not appear to matter much what -frontage the battalion and its companies occupy when they start off -for the attack at the fourteen hundred yards limit of effective -rifle fire, provided of course, they do not encroach on the frontage -of other units. Indeed, an attack which starts on a wide base and -concentrates only in its later stages seems much more likely than one -which starts from base equal to a single rank frontage to keep the -enemy uncertain of its objective, and to be able to bring oblique -or enfilade fire to bear on portions of his line. Therefore, when -practising the company in attack, do not be bound by cast iron rules -as to the breadth of the zone of ground within which you are to -bring your company from fourteen hundred yards up to the charging -position. Four platoons following one straight behind the other, at -two hundred yards distance, make a very unwieldy procession, and, -in general, I would advise you to use something in the nature of a -diamond formation at first, the three platoons in rear making their -own way forward till they reinforce the leading portion which finally -consists of the whole company. - -Put out the skeleton enemy on a front of, roughly, what your company -will occupy in single rank, and let the position, if possible, have -within it two, or at most, three points, which you can assign as -objectives to the platoon commanders. You must consider this position -as having been assigned to you as objective by your battalion -commander, the ground on the right and left of it being the prey -of other companies, and not the object of your assault, though it -should, nevertheless, frequently be the object of your _fire_ during -the advance. - -Draw up the company at about fourteen hundred yards from the enemy. -Tell the platoon commanders the relative positions the platoons are -to take up when the advance begins, roughly the distances between -them (I.T., 123 (7)), the direction of the attack, if the enemy’s -position is not quite clearly to be seen, the frontage on which the -company is free to manœuvre, and the points which the sections are to -regard as their objectives; the details contained in I.T., 123 and -124, may also be enumerated if the commanders are not experienced. -As regards these details, I recommend that scouts be formed not in a -line of men extended at wide intervals, but as a line of patrols of -four or six men each, and you or a subaltern should halt them early -in the attack and tell them to send back word that they are held up -by fire, or that they have defined the enemy’s position; on this the -nearest platoon reinforces them, and the process of building up the -firing line begins from that point. As regards inter-communication, -use connecting files and semaphore signalling to join up the various -parts and make real use of them, but avoid sham messages. - -As soon as the object and manner of the attack have been detailed to -all, tell the platoon commanders to move off their platoons to their -positions and extend them ready to advance, and the scouts to get off -in front. Five paces is the least extension to ensure that a bullet -aimed at one man may miss him with a fair chance of not hitting his -neighbour. Do not let the scouts go too far away, because at this -time of getting to grips with the enemy, their usefulness, when -acting with their companies is mainly limited to guarding against -ambush at close range, and as ground scouts to prevent the company -coming against some unseen obstacle, barbed wire, donga, canal, or -what not. - -As soon as all are in position, the company may be considered as -being in the formation in which it would have arrived at the point -where, in addition to the enemy’s artillery fire, it comes under -heavy and fairly accurate rifle fire. Give the signal to advance, -and let the platoon commanders begin to work their platoons forward, -using what covered ways they can find. After a little of this, have -the scouts halted and reinforce them by one platoon, order fire to be -opened, bearing in mind that one platoon’s fire is probably useless -at over one thousand yards from the enemy, but if your company is in -the diamond formation the platoons on each flank will probably be -able to fire, and with favourable ground, e.g., a knoll, or bluff -somewhere on the line of advance, the rear platoon also will be able -to fire over the heads of the firing line. There is no danger in this -if the men hold their rifles straight, and it would assuredly be done -in war. I have myself seen it, and the chances of an accident are -minimised by practice in peace. During this early opening of fire -use every effort to keep the fire from being merely a make-believe, -i.e., send word round by your connecting files or semaphore to fire -at certain targets, and see that section commanders direct their -fire accordingly. In battle the information as to which part of the -enemy’s position seemed most to demand attention would, of course, -reach you from those of your side who were suffering fire coming from -that part of the position, and the result of your passing the word -to fire at it as above would be that a shower of bullets would come -dropping all round it, to the upsetting of the aim of the hostile -marksmen. Under cover of this fire your firing line may be allowed to -gain a little ground, platoons moving alternately so as to avoid a -cessation of fire. Thereafter continue to gain ground, and gradually -reinforce the firing line till all your supports are absorbed and -the whole company is in the firing line. When this has taken place -the line will consist of a mixture of men of different sections -and platoons. Avoid unreal movements in attempting to keep the men -of each unit together in reinforcing and recognise that admixture -is unavoidable. (I.T., 93 (11) and 123 (9)). The organising of the -resultant disorder is one of the essential objects of training for -the attack. Make your section commanders call on the men to right and -left of them, if they are nearer them than any other unit commander, -to act under their orders. Thus: “Private A to Private J under my -orders.” Have this done constantly till it becomes a matter of -course. The men of files can always hang together, but prove that -this is being done by asking men where their file mates are. Get this -system started as soon as reinforcement is begun, and keep it in full -swing throughout. Once it is started, these extemporized fire units -must apply the principles learnt by the intact sections and squads -in Exercise IX., i.e., supporting fire by part to cover movement of -the others, control and distribution of fire, etc., and so work on -up to assaulting distance and deliver an assault. After this, let -section and platoon commanders reform their men and units as quickly -as possible, and then reform the company under your own orders. At -subsequent parades introduce casualties among the section and platoon -commanders, and let the senior privates in each of the mixed up fire -units step into their places and carry on the attack without halt or -confusion. - - - - - EXERCISE XII. - - THE COMPANY IN ATTACK ACTING ALONE. - - -On service a company may often have to attack some post of the -enemy without having the support of either artillery or infantry, -and exercises framed to illustrate these conditions are very useful -in developing the initiative of all ranks. In paragraph V. of the -preamble I gave an example, and I think, if you will peruse it again, -you will see what sort of thing you should arrange for the exercise. -At inspections one sometimes sees a company sent off by itself to -carry out such an attack, and the method often adopted is to tell -off the company into the firing line and supports, and, perhaps, a -reserve. The whole then go straight for the object and perform a -sort of travesty of what the company does when acting as part of a -battalion. By this time I trust you will be quick to perceive that -this is just what it ought not to do. As an isolated force it has -to do much more than simply to form a firing line and bring off an -assault. It must secure its flanks, have a real reserve, employ a -flank as well as a frontal attack, provide for its own withdrawal -if worsted, be prepared to deal with a counter-attack, and observe -all the principles laid down in I.T., 121. _Mutatis mutandis_, your -reserve may consist of only a platoon, your flank guards a file or -two of men, your flank attacks a section or platoon with a subaltern -accompanying it, and so on, but the precautions must be taken and -the principles put into practice, or your attack would run risk -of failure. You would do it all on service; therefore, do it all -in peace. Carry out such exercises, carefully planned, and with -observance of service conditions, and I am quite sure you will see -what a great deal there is to be done in this direction before you -feel yourself and your company quite competent to undertake a similar -task in the field. That first exercise against a skeleton enemy will -be the forerunner of many others. Your criticism of the action of -your non-commissioned officers must be carefully considered, as there -are usually several justifiable ways of doing a thing, and it should -always be constructive and not merely destructive (T. & M.R., 2 (2)). - - - - - EXERCISE XIII. - - THE COMPANY IN RETIREMENT. - - -The men have been practised in retirement in pairs in Exercise -II., and the sections and platoons have also learned their part in -Exercise VI. It remains to train the company for this duty, which -it might have to do either as acting as rearguard to the battalion, -whether the latter was, or was not, in conjunction with other troops, -or as if effecting its withdrawal when isolated. In both cases the -procedure and distribution are pretty much alike. In the former case, -the company, if it gets into difficulties, _may_ be able to get help -from the rest of the force, but in the latter it will not be able -to do so, and the commander should be especially careful to have -in hand some portion of his company which he can use to extricate -any detachment which gets “tied up.” On the other hand, it is very -desirable that the main body should not be called on to reinforce -the rearguard when the company is not acting alone. So that in both -cases you should be prepared to meet eventualities from your own -resources. Again, a rearguard is bound to have the majority of -its force in action in order to hold back the enemy and present an -appearance of force, so that it is not always possible to set apart -a portion of so small a body as a company to act solely as reserve, -and to remain continuously outside the actual combat. The solution -of the difficulty seems to lie in an intelligent application of the -principles of rearguard fighting given in F.S.R., 71 to 73, and the -early but timeous withdrawal from the fighting line of a portion -of the company who move back to a position in rear from which they -can cover the withdrawal of the remainder, but are still available -to be thrown into the fight, if it is necessary to inaugurate some -sort of a counter attack to give portions heavily engaged a chance -to break away from close grips. It is important in this exercise -to teach non-commissioned officers and men to be ready to adopt -quickly any method of withdrawal that may be ordered, because the -nature of the ground must determine the way in which a withdrawal can -best be effected, and the nature of the ground may vary every few -hundred yards. Therefore I merely suggest some ways of practising -retirements, and during the course of the exercise you should change -from one to another, and also encourage commanders to act on their -own initiative, when, as will probably happen, your system of -inter-communication fails to act with sufficient speed and accuracy. -I.T., 137, gives general rules as to the action of platoons and -sections, and the standard set up in Exercises II. and VI. should be -adhered to. Send out the skeleton enemy with orders to follow up the -retirement, but not to close in under six hundred yards. - -(_a_) Get the whole company deployed into one line of platoons, -with intervals between them, occupying a wide front, four to eight -hundred yards, the men at five or more paces extension. This may -seem too wide a front, but, after all, the intervals between the -platoons are only two hundred and forty yards, and an enemy trying -to break straight through the line would be under fire at one -hundred and twenty yards or less, while a wide front is the best -precaution against having your flanks turned and your retreat -intercepted. - -Send back a platoon from one of the flanks to take up quickly a -position in rear clear away from the firing line; three hundred to -six hundred yards is not too much; let it open fire, and let the -remainder of the firing line work back by retirement of alternate -sections, each running back thirty or forty yards, beginning this -movement from the flank from which the first platoon went, the -platoon on the other flank holding on and only giving ground when the -two centre platoons have got well on their way to the line on which -the first platoon is halted. This is a slow retirement, but gives a -maximum of continuous fire and the flanks are strong. - -(_b_) With the whole company extended in one line, and no intervals -between platoons. Retire by short rushes of alternate sections; -the rushes must be quite short, twenty yards at most, so that the -sections that have retired can fire through the intervals of the -rear portion of the line the instant that it begins to retire. This -is meant for use after an unsuccessful assault, and only on flat -ground. - -(_c_) With the company extended in one line, but with intervals -between the platoons. Order the flank platoons to retire and take -post to cover the withdrawal of the two centre platoons, who remain -in position till the flank platoons are ready to open fire. Watch -how the platoon commanders handle their platoons; they should do so -artfully, as taught in Exercise VI. - -(_d_) Retire by half-companies, two platoons together, using your -subalterns as half-company commanders, and putting the onus of -finding suitable covering positions on them, merely telling them -to cover each other’s retirement. - -(_e_) With the company all holding one position, leave the scouts -or picked men to cover the retirement by rapid fire, and withdraw -the remainder at full speed, then cover the retirement of the -scouts by the fire of the whole from a position in rear. Watch -that the scouts creep back from their cover without letting the -enemy know they are going; and of this screen of scouts the flank -men ought usually to be the last to go in order to make the enemy -believe that the position is still occupied. - - - - - EXERCISE XIV. - - OUTPOSTS. - - - I. - -The general rules for outposts and the part played by an outpost -company are to be found in I.T., 147 to 157, and it is necessary -accordingly to train for those duties in peace. Let us begin from -the beginning, and see what infantry outposts are and what they have -to do. A line of infantry outposts will very often have to be taken -up after a day’s fighting, or in close proximity to the enemy before -a battle. The commander of an outpost battalion will be told by the -staff to take up with his battalion a certain length of the front, -say, from Farm A to Hill B, inclusive—perhaps a mile or even two in -extent. He cannot possibly have time to ride all along the front and -fix places for piquets and sentries. Instead of this, he looks at -the ground and comes to the conclusion that it will require, say, -all his four companies in the outpost line. He divides up his front -into four parts, and gives each of his companies one part. It is -his duty to see that the eight companies form along the line that -combines the best facilities for defence and reconnaissance to the -front. Accordingly, he tells the captain of A Company to take from -Farm A to, say, the wood X, inclusive, the captain of B Company -from the wood X, exclusive, to, say, the stream ML, inclusive, and -so along. The captains of companies then have to go off and take up -their frontages. As beforesaid, infantry outposts must expect to take -up their line close to the enemy, and often when dusk is falling. -This gives you your clue as to how it should be done. You must march -your company in fighting formation, so as not to be ambushed—a screen -of scouts or other covering troops in front and on the flanks, a -party, section, or platoon ready to succour the covering party, and -hold up the enemy, and a reserve ready to act under your orders, -either for attack or defence. Your movement and the taking up of -your line should be unseen by the enemy; therefore, move carefully -under cover both from distant and close positions, from which you -may be seen. The line must be taken up quickly. The main thing is -to get it occupied; therefore, it is a mistake to halt the company -while you plod round the whole of the front and plan just where each -piquet and sentry will be. Instead, take a good look at the line as -you march and decide what are the essential points to be held for -defence and as observation points. As soon as your scouts have made -good the ground a little in front of those points, send off what you -think are necessary, sections or platoons, to seize these points, -and act as piquets till you go round and adjust details. Thus your -company will occupy the line in rough-and-ready fashion as quickly -as they can advance. When the company breaks up to go to the piquet -posts, go with any one of the piquets which is to be on one flank and -settle the exact position of the piquet with reference to the line -you intend to hold as your line of resistance, and any other details -which you think the piquet commander should attend to, such as what -localities should be patrolled, and estimate the number of men -required. Any surplus sections should accompany you from this piquet, -and you and they then go along the line to the other piquets which -you arrange similarly, using the surplus to reinforce those piquets -that need them, and if at the end you have still a surplus of men you -may either form them as a support in rear or dismiss them to remain -with their own platoons. For purposes of messing on service the -latter is convenient, but, tactically, a support is often needed, in -which case the men’s comfort must take second place. - -You must make a clear distinction between day and night outposts, -though you practise the latter by daylight. Infantry outposts by day -and until the enemy advances, are firstly patrols and look-out men, -whose business is to look for any movement on the part of the enemy, -and to prevent his seeing their own side’s doings, and to report -what they see of the enemy’s, and, secondly, a line of piquets who -occupy the line decided on as the line of resistance, and who may -fall out and rest while things are quiet, with supports and sometimes -a reserve behind them. The patrols are active agents in getting -information in front of the outpost line, and they will mostly -consist of mounted troops except in close country or thick weather. -The look-out sentries are passive obstacles to the enemy’s patrols -or scouts penetrating the line; the piquets are the reserve of force -ready to be called into action when needed. But a line suitable for -observation and resistance by day is seldom suitable by night also. -Fighting by day is done by shooting, and rough ground affording cover -is likely to be chosen for the advance of the attackers. By night, -however, the attack will be made with the bayonet, and the attacker -will avoid broken country, which will confuse and delay his advance. -Choose your outpost line accordingly. By day seek for a good field -of fire, mutually supporting positions, and good facilities for -observation, and strengthen the position you mean to fight on. By -night close the likely ways by which an enemy may advance by putting -piquets on them in strengthened positions with obstacles prepared -in front, and patrols lying out on intervening ground to intercept -scouts. Thus, in an undulating hedge-covered country with many roads, -by day your piquets would be behind the crests of the undulations, -sentries only on the look-out, and patrols scouting in front. By -night your piquets would be on the roads, which they would block with -barbed wire or abattis of cut hedge stuff, and your patrols in the -fields between and lying out along the road in front at some place -where they could watch anything passing, and get back to the piquet -line without running risks of being shot by their own side. We will -see below what training is required for non-commissioned officers -and men in their duties on piquet, patrol and sentry. When you have -trained them in these duties, take up an outpost line as a tactical -exercise with your company, acting as an outpost company by day, -and then as by night, and if you have scouts send them out to act -as an enemy’s patrol in front to see how much of the operation of -taking up the line is visible to them; then, after a certain hour, -let them try to make their way through the line unseen. They must -not work round the flanks as _ex hypothesi_; these are held by other -outpost companies; finally, let them start sniping the outposts as -if ushering in an attack, and let your piquets take up the line of -resistance, your patrols falling back on the firing beginning. - - - II. - - _The Training of Men and Platoons in Outpost Duties._ - -An outpost company will more often consist of two or more small -piquets of one or more platoons with a support, than simply of one -large piquet with its support, so that when you come to train the -whole company, as above, in taking up a part of an outpost line, the -performance of the work will depend largely on the ability of your -platoon and section commanders to direct the men in their duties. -Unless they are capable of doing this, time will be wasted as you -will be occupied with one portion of the line while the rest are -doing nothing and awaiting your arrival, for in this class of work -the instructor must remain for some time with each piquet while the -men are being put through the various duties, and cannot supervise -concurrently at all points. Therefore, it is best, before taking -the men out for instruction, to give a day or two solely to the -instruction of subalterns and non-commissioned officers. When they -have got a knowledge of what is required, have the men out, divide -them into piquets under subalterns and section commanders, who will -put them through the duties, and the work will go on on proper lines, -and you will be free to go round and supervise each in turn. - -You will have four subalterns, sixteen section commanders, and other -non-commissioned officers, a total of twenty rifles or so, but if you -are short of non-commissioned officers, have out enough privates to -give you sixteen or twenty rifles. Form them up as a piquet and make -the supposition that it has just received its orders to break off -from the company and go to a certain point in the outpost line and -take up its duties there. - - - _Day Piquets._ - -Indicate some such point as a day piquet position at a reasonable -distance from where the piquet is when you give it its orders, -and let the senior non-commissioned officer march it there, as on -service, the point chosen being, if possible, such a one as would be -occupied on service. - -(_a_) This advance to the piquet is the first duty. In spite of the -company covering troops being supposed to be somewhere in advance, -the piquet on its march should be protected by a small patrol -(F.S.R., 64 (1)). In taking up the position, it must not let the -enemy see it; that is, neither the men nor their commander should -show themselves. Very often the men are kept under cover, but the -commander wanders about fixing places for sentries in full view of -everyone. He should lie down and peep over the crest or whatever it -is while making his plans. - -Having arrived at the piquet position, indicate a position on the -right and on the left where other piquets are supposed to be and -proceed with:— - -(_b_) Duties of outpost sentries.—These are given in I.T., 152. Post -as many groups as will use up the whole strength in places which -would need watching on service; if there are not enough such places -near by, then merely for the purpose of this semi-drill, post two or -more groups close together. A group consists of one or two men on -duty, and their reliefs, who lie down near them. These groups are -relieved every eight or twelve hours. Let it be understood that the -position of their own piquet is occupied by the reliefs of these -groups and of patrols, and it is a good plan to show the position -by a flag. The sentries must see without being seen, know where -other groups are, where their own and other piquets are, be told to -challenge and halt anyone approaching as in I.T., 152 (3), and what -to do if attacked. Let them do this to you personally, as if you were -someone not belonging to the troops, and impress on them that they -must be careful to teach it to their men so that _no stranger may -ever be allowed to get close_ to a group, and to shoot if he does -not halt. Neglect of this simple rule has led to many mishaps in all -armies. Concealment is not easy, but must be got somehow—by artifice, -if the ground is unfavourable. After putting all through “sentry go” -close to the groups and teach them:— - -(_c_) Patrolling, for which see I.T., 111 and 156. Patrols are not -meant for fighting, but to get information or watch dangerous places. -But they may have to fight to avoid capture, and they do no good -by walking blindly into an ambush. To bring back information or -news that the enemy are coming on, it is evidently essential that -whatever happens to the rest of the party, one man at least should -always be able to escape, and to avoid ambush the patrol should move -in a formation which will prevent a surprise overwhelming the whole -party. In short, one portion must scout, and the other be prepared -to cover their movement and help them to get away, if possible, but -in any case to get away itself and carry news of the enemy. But -patrols must be limited in strength, or they will not be able to -escape notice, and must make up for their weakness by cunning and -stealthiness of movement. - -For patrolling by day, tell off the whole strength into patrols of -four or six men, one of whom will command in each patrol. Let each -take up the formation it would usually adopt; that is, one or two -files in advance, followed by the rest at a distance sufficient to -prevent the surprise of the whole by one and the same opening of -fire. Teach the method advocated for movement across country, i.e., -a careful but rapid advance from one cover to another, also how to -approach suspicious localities. The leading file halts and looks -for any signs of the enemy; meanwhile the rear file comes nearly -up to it; the leading file then moves forward while the rear file -lies down with rifles loaded and sighted, ready to fire at once to -cover the others if the enemy shows himself. If the locality to be -searched can be outflanked, the leading files should move round one -or both flanks before closing in on it. If it is one that cannot be -outflanked, as, for instance, a straight edge of a large wood, they -should approach it under cover, creeping up a hedgerow perhaps, and -so get inside. If there is no cover they may try some ruse to draw -the enemy’s fire before getting too close, halting as if they had -seen something, shading the eyes with the hand, pointing and then -starting to run back as if alarmed, which might lead the enemy to -open fire to prevent their escape. But it is rather hard to get -men to do this play-acting unless there is a real force of “Blue” -or “Red” enemy against them. The commander of the patrol, when -approaching any place, should tell his men what they are to do if it -is seen to be held by the enemy, i.e., to lie still and watch, or -retire. If the latter, he should fix some place in rear where the -patrol could rally after getting out of harm’s way. - -Show them how to look over a ridge, wall, or hedge, without -attracting notice, taking off their headdress and raising the head -slowly, keeping the rest of the body carefully under cover, and -also to move unseen, keeping in the shadow of hedges or roadside -trees, and covering up any polished metal work of their uniform; to -lie up on any place that commands a good view, and look long and -carefully all over the country to catch sight of anything. Finally to -report what they see, and to do this at once, if there is need, by -sending one, or better, if the patrol can spare them, two men back -to the piquet with a _written_ report, the rest still remaining in -observation. Without having an actual force opposing you, you can -only do this exercise with some appearance of reality by giving out -verbal situations to the patrol. Thus: “Go and reconnoitre that wood -which an enemy may be holding.” On this the patrol would get into -formation and move forward. Then, when approaching the wood, “You -have seen small parties of the enemy beyond the wood both on its -right and left, and they are perhaps in the wood also; try and get -into it unseen,” if there is any cover, or, if not, “show what you -would do to draw their fire before getting close.” Then “the wood is -held by the enemy, withdraw your patrol if you can.” As the patrol -attempts to retire “a heavy fire is opened on you as you retire, -showing that there is at least a company in the wood, your first -duty is to send news of this to your piquet—how and whom would you -send, and how would you frame your message?” - -(_d_) Duties on piquet.—Close the platoon and take it to the place -where the piquet is to be. A piquet on arrival at its position has -at once to strengthen the position against attack, and this without -waiting for orders (I.T., 151 (4)). But as we are here only training -the non-commissioned officers in their duties we will not ask them -actually to dig trenches or make loop-holes and entanglements; -indeed, this, as one may term it, executive work, has its proper -place in “Defence.” Bearing in mind, then, that we are dealing with a -day outpost, ask or show the platoon how to strengthen the position. -Bring out a few picks and let them spitlock on the ground the lines -of any trenches that might be needed, paying great attention to the -siting of the trench so that fire could be brought over all the -ground in front. Let them indicate with exactness where and how they -would improve and adapt existing cover. Great regard need not be had -to the number of men in the piquet, as outposts, if attacked, should -make as much show of force as possible, and it does good and not harm -if there are alternative loop-holes facing in different directions; -also accommodation must be provided for the support. The commander -should look for ground outside the outpost line from which enfilade -rifle or artillery fire might be brought to bear on him, and mark how -he would protect his men from it by traverses, breaking the line of -loop-holes into short lengths, keeping under lee of existing cover -and so on. The strengthening of the piquet must be done with the aid -of common-sense. It will seldom be enough to propose to dig one bit -of trench all in one piece and hope the enemy will be good enough to -come and knock his head against it. Cover may be made or adapted in -several separate groups, if this is needed, so as to make it possible -to bring fire to bear on any part of the ground in front. The piquet -must be prepared to make as brave a show as possible, therefore the -commander, while strengthening the point near which his piquet is to -rest, must decide what he will do if attacked. Probably there will be -within the limits of his piquet’s frontage one or two other points -which might be useful for defence, and he must not expect attack -just from one direction. With regard to such alternative positions -he should settle when and how he will use them, and whether he can -afford time and men to strengthen them, and, last but not least, -whether he will be able to get men from one to the other if the enemy -does develop a strong attack. If he can do all these he will have -added immensely to his power of defence, provided he handles his men -skilfully, as he will be able to hold one position till the enemy -thinks he has defined its location, then dodge to another, while -they will go on firing at the old one, and so make his piquet appear -many times stronger than it is. Concealment of the defence is very -important, and the non-commissioned officers should be reminded that -this must be attended to. They may forget it as there is no actual -digging. - -(_e_) Duties in Piquet.—The position of the piquet and alternative -defence positions having been fixed, and trenches or other defences -marked out on the position, and on the alternative positions if any, -assemble the platoon at the piquet and show the non-commissioned -officers how to tell off reliefs and other duties. Each group -furnished by the piquet consists of three to eight men, and mounts -one or two men as sentry, as the circumstances of the post require -(I.T., 152 (3)), the sentry, single or double, being relieved in turn -by the others of the group. The whole group is under command of the -senior soldier or a non-commissioned officer. The men who are to -form the reliefs of the groups stay with the piquet, which usually -is composed solely of the reliefs of groups and patrols. Extra men -who have no specific duties are not advisable unless the position is -very exposed. Suppose your group sentries are single, and the groups -of three men each, and relieved every eight hours, then for every -group posted and in position there will be six men in the piquet -resting and waiting their turn, each group thus needing a total of -nine men—three out, six in. Patrols start from the piquet or support, -as the commander of the company directs, and the piquet commander may -send them out on his own initiative, if he thinks it needful. As they -are practically all on duty as long as they are out, a turn of four -hours is enough for them, or, rather, a third of the daylight time. -Take your patrols from this piquet to be four strong, there will be -for each patrol eight men in the piquet and four out on patrol, a -total of twelve needed to furnish each patrol. - -In telling off a piquet on the above conditions of relief, and before -dismissing the men to rest, the commander must pay attention to two -main points. Firstly, he must tell off the reliefs, and give each -relief a place to rest in. Men on outpost are usually tired and need -all the rest they can get, especially if they are up all night. -Therefore reliefs should be kept together and rest in one place, so -that the commander can find them at once without stirring up the -others to see who’s who. Secondly, the men must be told off to alarm -posts, which they are to occupy in case of attack—each relief and -each man of it should be given a position on the entrenchment which -he is to hold. To ensure that they will do this at once and without -confusion they should be made to go to these places and occupy them -before being dismissed. There will then be no needless running about -with consequent casualties if fire, either of artillery or infantry, -suddenly opens. - -Say you have sixteen rifles (non-commissioned officers and others) in -your instructional piquet give out that it is to furnish— - - 1 Sentry over the piquet. - - 2 Groups of three men each, Nos. 1 and 2. - - 2 Patrols of four men each, Nos. 1 and 2. - -The sentry over the piquet alone being actually posted, the two -groups and two patrols being supposed to be out in front, as this -part of the lesson is only concerned with the inside work of the -piquet, and you have already shown them this work on sentry and -patrol. As your strength is not sufficient you must make a further -supposition, and make believe that for the reliefs of the groups one -of your rifles represents three, and for those of the patrols one -rifle represents two. Appoint one of the non-commissioned officers in -turn as commander, and let him tell off accordingly. - - 3 Rifles for piquet sentry, one of whom he actually mounts. - - 1 Rifle (representing three) as second relief, No. 1 group. - - 1 Rifle (representing three) as third relief, No. 1 group. - - 2 Rifles (representing two each) for second relief, No. 1 patrol. - - 2 Rifles (representing two each) for third relief, No. 1 patrol. - - And a similar number for No. 2 patrol and No. 2 group. - -Having told off these reliefs the commander should then tell them -where they are to have their resting places and where their posts are -in case of alarm. At this time also he would give out any special -orders which concern the piquet. Then without dismissing the men -he should order them to go to their resting places, and as soon as -they are there order them to occupy their alarm posts, which should -be done in double time, the men lying down on the places that have -been marked out for entrenchment or improvement of existing cover. -Make this falling in on alarm posts a standing order in the company. -After this has been done, and each man knows exactly what he has to -do on the alarm, the men should be dismissed to their resting places, -which, as before said, should be separate for each relief and apart -from each other. After being dismissed, the men would on service be -allowed to make themselves as comfortable as possible. Other duties -of the piquet commander are:— - - (1) The opening of communication with piquets in right and left and - the support. - - (2) The fixing of places for purposes of nature. - - (3) The arrangements for getting up food to his men if they have - not their rations with them. - - (4) Keeping his piquet in a state of readiness; besides keeping - accoutrements on, the men should have their rifles at their - sides when resting, and take them with them wherever they go. - There should be no such thing as piling arms on outpost. - - - _Night Piquets._ - -In the dark the bullet is a fool unless fired at close quarters. -No practicable amount of shooting, even at only a hundred yards -distance, will dislodge determined men posted under cover, and a -serious attack must be made with the bayonet or by shooting within -the distance at which a man may be distinguished—ten yards or so. -F.S.R., 138 (2), lays down for the British Army that the bayonet only -is to be used in night attacks, and we may assume that any civilized -army we may have to meet will pursue similar tactics. Aerial -reconnaissance may nowadays allow an enemy to locate the position -held by the main body of his opponent, in spite of its being covered -by outposts, but such reconnaissance does not admit of any hope of -a successful night attack being made on that main body by eluding -or passing through the outposts, because the surface of the ground -cannot be sufficiently searched from above to discover the small -obstacles which must be avoided or known if the advance of a large -body of men is to be carried out at night. So we may take it that -now, as formerly, any large attack will fall first on the outposts, -supposing, as we must, that these are placed so as to hold or watch -all possible lines of advance. In addition to this, outposts must -expect isolated attacks made against one or two points held by them -which the enemy desires to gain possession of. The duties of outposts -by night are, then, to hold and defend the outpost line in sufficient -strength to prevent any large body of the enemy breaking through, -or getting a footing in some tactically important position on the -line, and also to prevent the enemy’s scouts from getting through and -making observations, and, lastly, but of most importance, to get news -of the enemy both as a means of forestalling any attack, and for the -use of the force commander in framing his plans. Bringing the matter -down to the level of a piquet of an outpost company, it seems to -resolve itself into night patrolling and night defence of a position. -As before pointed out, enclosed country allows of piquets closing -the lines of advance by which large bodies can only hope to move -undiscovered, while intervening ground can be searched by patrols. On -the other hand, open country leaves the front vulnerable everywhere, -and calls for a greater number of piquets and closer patrolling than -are needed by day. - -Of course, elementary instruction in these duties must be carried out -by daylight to allow of supervision; so now assemble your platoon -of non-commissioned officers and give out that you are going to -practise night work. Choose some place for your night piquet, -realistic as may be, a bridge, a cutting, or anything else that -constitutes a defile or otherwise blocks a likely line of advance -from the enemy’s direction. Also choose, and point out to the -platoon, positions where the adjoining piquets on the right and left -would be. Give out the following instructions to the non-commissioned -officers:— - - (1) Piquets must take up their night positions when it is getting - dusk, the strengthening of the piquet and construction of - obstacles being done in advance, secretly if possible, and - towards evening the working party should withdraw and leave - the intended night position empty till it is time to move - into it, further work being completed by twilight. - - (2) The provision of obstacles is more necessary than entrenchment, - as securing the piquet from being rushed while completing the - latter. - - (3) Men must rest on their alarm posts, and bayonets may have to be - kept fixed by all, if there is a possibility of a sudden - attack (I.T., 151 (7)), to ensure instant readiness. - - (4) All piquets must stand to arms one hour before light and remain - ready for action till the patrols have found that there is no - sign of an immediate attack. When relief takes place in the - morning, night outposts will not return to camp till the - patrols report all clear. - -After this, let the non-commissioned officer in command withdraw the -piquet from its day position and march it to the night position. On -arrival ask the non-commissioned officers in turn where they would -place the piquet exactly and where they would put their obstacles. -Obstacles for a night piquet should be under close fire, i.e., ten or -twenty paces, but, in addition, booby traps and alarms may be placed -further in front. Barbed wire is the best of all obstacles. The -actual defensive measures to be taken do not differ from those taken -for the defence of any position not on outpost. - -The position of the piquet and obstacles being decided on, let the -non-commissioned officers mark on the ground the actual work they -would undertake, having regard to the time available, which you -should tell them, and, on the same lines as for the day piquet, let -them as commanders in turn divide the men into reliefs of sentries -and patrols, tell them off to their alarm posts, and order them to -occupy them once as if on alarm. - -A piquet by night, no matter how well entrenched, has a very limited -field of action. Even with most carefully arranged night rests for -the men’s rifles its fire effect is small except at close ranges, -and to resist attack by relatively larger bodies it must in general -keep behind its defences. Hence a well organised scheme of patrols is -necessary to supplement the passive opposition which the piquet can -offer. The patrols are charged with the duty of bringing news of any -advance of the enemy to attack, and, if he is close enough, of spying -out his movements on and within his outpost line, of preventing -his patrols or scouts penetrating their own line, of watching any -localities which are of particular importance and unoccupied by -piquets, such, for example, as villages beyond the outpost line which -the enemy might try to occupy by night, and, lastly, of keeping -up communication between the various bodies of the outposts. The -strength of patrols is limited by the necessity of their being able -to do this work without making a noise, and a strength of three to -eight men is advised. A patrol performs its duty of observation -either by going from point to point, or by watching one particular -place, when it is called a “standing patrol.” If a piquet posts any -group sentries by night, away from the piquet, such groups have just -the same work as standing patrols, except that they may be ordered to -maintain their position in case of attack as they are near support, -whereas patrols would fall back as soon as they had made sure the -enemy was advancing, and possibly, if in accordance with their -instructions, after treating him to a short burst of rapid fire. An -ordinary patrol will also have to halt and listen perhaps for long -periods, and so becomes for the nonce a standing patrol. - -Form up the platoon at the piquet position, and let the commander -tell it off into three patrols to practise this duty, disregarding -reliefs, all three to be sent out at the same time in different -directions, one man in each to be commander. Before they start off, -tell them the following, which piquet commanders must see to:— - - (1) If there is no countersign published for the force, piquet - commanders must arrange either a word or a sign by which men - may know their own side in the dark. - - (2) Patrols going out are to tell the nearest sentry which way they - are going (I.T., 156 (5)). - - (3) For patrols a code of signals should be arranged, e.g., a hiss - or half-whistle, to call attention, answered by the same to - show that the man called has heard it, followed by the - signal, whatever it is:—a double hiss for “come up to me,” a - click of the tongue for “retire,” but anything will do - provided it cannot be clearly heard much further off than the - listeners for whom it is intended, and is neither a very - common nor a very uncommon sound. - - (4) The piquet commander must tell patrols how long they are to - stay out and any places he thinks must be visited, in - addition to what they themselves may find advisable, on - closer acquaintance with the ground. - -A suitable formation for a night patrol of six men would be four in -the advanced party, followed at ten to fifty paces by the rear party -or two. The reason for the stronger party being ahead is, firstly, -that fighting at night begins with suddenness and ends rapidly, while -reinforcement of one party by another is slow and uncertain, and, -secondly, to ensure that some part of the patrol may have a good -chance of getting away with news, whatever happens to the rest: -Bayonets should be fixed and rifles sloped on the right shoulder, the -right hand holding the small of the butt so as to come to the charge -at once, and not to have any chance of a rifle falling on the ground. - -Tell patrol commanders to get their patrols into formation and -practise movement in silence along a road and on ordinary road. If -along a road, let them move on each side of it, off the metal on the -roadside grass or dust, and under trees or close to the hedge or -wall. On ordinary country the ball of the foot should be put down -first as if to feel the surface, before putting the full weight -of the body on the advanced foot. A stick or broom-handle, _à la_ -“boy scout,” is invaluable in moving over unexplored ground, as by -it the real nature of objects dimly seen at one’s feet can be made -out, and awkward spills thereby avoided. The movement of patrols -under these conditions will be very slow over any but quite level -ground. As the patrols move let them practise the code of signals, -halting, advancing, coming up into one line, etc., also the keeping -up of communication by one file moving back and forward between the -two parts of the patrol. They should practise also breaking up and -scattering as if attacked by overwhelming numbers, each individual -getting away as quickly and quietly as possible, and the whole -rallying again at some place in rear. The patrol commander as he goes -out must fix these rallying places, usually one is enough over the -whole of a patrol’s beat, and they should be _outside_ the outpost -line. Have the patrols moved so that on their beats they may meet -each other once or twice, and use the sign to reply when challenge -is made. As a second practice, direct one of the meeting patrols to -consider itself hostile, and let the commander of the other patrol -excogitate how he would deal with men who did not stand fast on being -told to halt and could not give the countersign. - -Next tell the patrols to get into position to watch various -localities, a farm steading, a ravine, or such like, as they would -have to do for limited periods as patrols reconnoitring on their -beats, or for the whole night as standing patrols. One of the best -ways in which patrols can fulfil their office is by halting and -listening with ears near the ground for sounds of human movement. -There is no rule for thus lying up except that they must not get -caught themselves. A couple of men should be left quite clear of the -patrol to get away if the others strike trouble, and the commander -of the patrol should have word passed to these two from time to time -that all is well with the rest, or they may wait in their place -while the others have been quietly downed. - -Lastly, let patrols return to the piquet, and learn how to approach -without getting themselves fired on, or causing useless alarm. A -good way is for two of the patrol to advance a few steps at a time -when near the piquet, halting and quietly code-signalling the piquet -sentry till they get His attention and warn him that the patrol wants -to come in. - -It has taken longer to write about outposts than it may take you -to put your men through them, and I have purposely been discursive -because a knowledge of what is needed from outposts is more important -than any set exercise, and also because this duty is the one which -newly raised troops are most likely to perform negligently, and at -the same time the one which, if neglected, allows the enemy to bring -raw troops to quick demoralisation. I have also purposely written as -if unlimited ground were available, and, speaking generally, I think -it is. You can, and should, practise your piqueting and patrolling on -the ordinary countryside, with its main and bye-roads, paths, fields, -and hedges. The practice of outposts when piquets are not entrenched, -causes no damage, so that leave to move over the fields should not -be hard to get, but even if it cannot be got, the principal and most -important work of patrolling and watching all roads and paths, will -be done on the ground on which they would be done on service. If -fighting ever takes place in Britain, which Heaven forefend, outpost -lines will be along the ordinary country and not on Salisbury Plain, -so do not go into wild and desolate places for your outposts, but -take the ordinary country round where you are. - - - - - EXERCISE XV. - - DEFENCE. - - -The subject of defence is treated of in F.S.R., 107-110, I.T., -125-135, and in Chapter VII., M.F.E., 1911. The duties required of -the company commander and his subordinates are briefly defined by -I.T., 132, to be similar to those they carry out in the attack. The -whole spirit of the regulations is that the active Defence is merely -a means to an end, viz., the ultimate assumption of the offensive, -which may be carried out either by the same troops which have acted -on the defensive or by fresh troops detailed for the purpose. In both -cases the troops that have acted on the defensive must be ready to -become the aggressors. Therefore, in training your men, you should -keep this constantly in view and conserve a spirit of aggressive -mobility. Men must not be allowed to think that once a position -has been taken up and entrenched it is to be their location till -fighting ceases; on the contrary, they should be encouraged to look -for opportunities while still on the defensive, to occupy alternative -positions which will make the task of the attacking enemy more -difficult. Quickness in seizing and strengthening a position must be -combined with mobility in leaving it to take up and strengthen a new -one. Of course, the time available regulates the work that can be -undertaken (M.F.E., VII. (2)); deep trenches and concealed head cover -cannot be made with an enemy pressing in to assault, but the first -requirement is the ability to choose positions that give a good field -of fire and to strengthen them as thoroughly as the time available -and the proximity of the enemy admit. - -In dealing with a company, the onus of choosing what localities it is -tactically necessary to occupy and strengthen rests with the company -commander, subject to the orders of his battalion commander. In the -same way as on outpost, you will be given a bit of ground to defend, -either acting with the battalion or as an isolated company, and the -rest will be on your head. I do not propose to deliver a treatise -on the tactical occupation of ground, but instead I will ask you to -procure and read two books. The first is “The Defence of Duffer’s -Drift,” by Backsight Forethought (W. Clowes and Sons), the second -is “A Staff Officer’s Scrap Book,” by Sir Ian Hamilton (Edward -Arnold). They are both most readable books, and are quite free of -soporific effects. The first is small, and deals with the efforts -of a half-company, under Lieutenant B. F., to defend a drift over a -South African river. In the second the author takes you along with -him through the Russo-Japanese War, of which he was a privileged -spectator, and in your journeyings you look on at victories and -defeats in the making, while the causes that led to them, great and -small, are set forth, along with many shrewd comments on human nature -and how it translates itself in the day of battle. Every fight bears -its own lesson of what to do and what not to do in defence, and this -told in no pedantic strain, but with the saving grace of humour, to -mitigate the darker side of human carnage. Read them both, get to -yourself the wisdom and understanding with which they are filled, and -you will know how to take up a position for defence. - -Having educated yourself to choose the points of a defensive position -that must be occupied if the position is to be effectively held, -you have still to train your men to the work of defending them, and -they must learn to be able to do without the help of a supervising -officer, as will often be the case on service. - -Daylight defence is almost entirely a matter of fire, the immediate -object being to make it impossible for the enemy to come to close -quarters. Platoon and section commanders then must be able to dispose -their men with this in view to the best advantage within the limits -of the ground allotted to their units, and the men must be able to -site their trenches or whatever form of cover has to be constructed -so as to use their rifles to the best effect. It is no good to teach -men to dig trenches and make loop-holes unless they know the proper -places for them. (M.F.E., 18 (7)). - -At the same time, practice in digging and the use of tools is very -necessary for men who are not accustomed to such work. The hands of -the untrained man blister and his muscles tire under the unusual -effort, while he expends much energy with results small in comparison -with what he can accomplish once he has learnt to use his strength -well. Moreover, a certain amount of technical skill is required in -making any but the most simple cover. - -To practise the execution of work, you _must_ have ground which you -are at liberty to turn up, as well as some materials for loop-holes -and obstacles. These may not be obtainable at any and every parade, -but you can give practice in the selection and siting of trenches -on any bit of country without causing damage, the men merely -spitlocking or marking with stones or anything else the position of -the trenches on the surface of the ground, and describing what they -propose doing. - -I would, therefore, advise that you make your training consist of -two parts, firstly the siting of trenches and the planning by unit -commanders and men of defensive work, the choice and occupation of -alternative positions, and the assumption of the offensive from the -defensive, all this without actually breaking ground, and, secondly, -ground and tools being then available, the performance of a course of -making real cover and obstacles. - -But the first part cannot be carried out unless the men have a -knowledge of what trenches, loop-holes and so on are like, and the -objects with which they are made. In a company of raw recruits taken -from the populace at large, there will be plenty who have no ideas -on the subject at all. You must then precede your exercises either -by a short lecture, materials for which you will find in plenty in -the “Defence of Duffer’s Drift,” and the manuals of training, or, -better than a lecture, by showing them specimens of entrenchments -made by regular troops. The main points to insist on are the securing -of a field of fire, the necessity of concealment of the defences, -the importance of head cover as a help to the delivery of an -accurate fire by letting men keep the enemy in view without showing -up themselves, the avoidance of enfilade fire by making traverses, -or by taking advantage of intervening high ground, the provision -of cover from downward shell fire by making the trenches deep and -steep enough to let men stand close up to the edges, and, in the -case of isolated posts and points held as pivots of a position, the -necessity of preparing an all-round defence so that these pivots will -be able to continue fighting whatever happens on the intervening -ground. The course of work actually performed for the second part -should include digging all kinds of trenches, by which the men will -learn to use their tools to the best advantage, and their hands and -muscles will become hardened, the use of the excavated earth to form -parapets and parados (cover from fire from the rear of the trench; -forty inches of earth are needed to keep out a bullet), the drainage -of trenches, the making of traverses against enfilade fire, the -making of loop-holes and head-cover with the aid of all sorts of -materials, sand bags, brushwood and heather, straw and twigs, stones -and bricks (which must be covered with earth to deaden the effects of -splinters), packing boards, and so on, the concealment of trenches -and loop-holes so as to be invisible to the enemy (this is of great -importance), the masking of loop-holes when not in use to prevent -light showing through, the making of dummy trenches and loop-holes to -draw the enemy’s fire away, the improvement of existing cover, such -as loop-holing walls and the use of hedges with or without ditches, -making sangars, if stones are available, the making of obstacles of -barbed and plain wire, and measuring and marking of ranges round -a position, which should be done by some means not obvious to the -enemy, and clearing the field of fire. It will seldom be practicable -to obtain subjects for practical demonstration of some of the latter -in peace time; people will object to their walls being experimented -on or their shrubberies laid low, and so even here a description of -the method will have to be substituted for actual performance. For -night defence the construction of night rests for rifles is needed. -The best I know is a packing case, filled with earth, with the front -and rear edges notched to hold the rifle stock. The magazine is laid -hard up against the outside of the rear edge and the notches, front -or rear, slowly deepened with a penknife till the sights bear on the -target; afterwards earth is banked up outside the box and head-cover -made above. The foregoing may seem a formidable list, but they are -things that will undoubtedly be required as soon as you get on -shooting terms with an enemy; while if you exhaust this list and feel -the want of further occupation, the Engineering Manual will supply -you with further subjects for your activities. - -Pending your getting facilities of ground, tools, and materials -to execute work, you can proceed with the first part of training -outlined above. If your non-commissioned officers have not had -experience, take them out as an instructional section in the same way -as when teaching outpost work, and put them through the exercises -which follow. But if they are already fairly competent, take the men -on parade, forming them, if possible, into not less than two sections. - - - _Instruction in Siting Trenches._ - -Choose any position on undulating ground, form the men in extended -order in one line in rear of it, and order them to move up, and -mark where each would place his trench in order to fire on an enemy -advancing from the front. In doing this it should be an invariable -rule that men must lie down, bring the rifle into the firing -position, look along the sights, and move forward or back till they -see that they have got the best position to sweep the ground in their -immediate front (see M.F.E., 31 (3)). Dead ground close to the trench -gives the enemy a place in which to collect and organise an assault. -Take the men in the same way on to other positions and repeat the -lesson till they all understand that the _first thing to be done is -this aiming with the rifle to secure a good field of fire_. At first -halt them close to what you see is the best line, and afterwards halt -them thirty or forty yards from it, and then give the order to choose -sites. For instance, halt them on the top of a convex slope and let -them find out that the best place to bring fire on to flat ground at -its base is somewhere on the enemy’s side of the convexity, for if -the trench were made on the top of the slope the ground immediately -in front would be hidden by the convexity. The section commanders -must help the men in choosing sites. - -After the men have fixed and marked the proposed sites, let them lay -down their rifles three paces in rear and kneel or lie down at the -rear edge of the site as if waiting to commence work while you and -section and platoon commanders go round and examine the line. Ask -details from the men—how high they would make the parapet, how thick -it should be, how they would make head-cover, how they would conceal -the work, and so on. - - - _Traverses and broken lines of Trenches._ - -Repeat the exercise as above, but this time have the men in sections -or small groups, and the trenches made not in one line, but in -short lengths, separated by traverses. You will have to explain -the construction and use of these to prevent enfilade fire (if not -from long range), and to localise shell bursts. Again, have lines -of trenches mapped out in short lengths on an irregular front, some -a little forward, some a little back, with the earth at each end, -banked up on the flanks with the same object (M.F.E., 33). - - - _Short Trenches for Two Men._ - -Bring the men extended to six or eight paces on to a position, and -let the men of each file close to two paces from each other. Each -file is then to choose and mark a site for a short trench to hold -both of them, or, as it would formerly have been called, a rifle pit, -marking where they would make loop-holes to fire both to the front, -and obliquely towards the right and left, so as to rake the ground -in front of the line of the other men’s pits. This arrangement is -not officially recognised, and it does not give the closest possible -firing line, but it is an excellent way of making men think for -themselves. - -When the men have got their bearings in the matter of taking up a -line for entrenchment, make them get into the way of changing from -defence into attack. Take up a position as before, and as soon as -the trenches are marked out, indicate a position at some distance as -an objective for attack and start an advance against it, as done in -the attack practices, forming a firing line rapidly of some named -platoons and the support of the others. A skeleton enemy kept hidden -till needed adds much to the realism. - - - _Defence of Pivots (M.F.E., 50 (3), and I.T., 129)._ - -Find a position in which there are some points separated from each -other which command the ground between, and also form such pivots -for defence of the position as are described in the paras. above. -According to the nature of the ground, such pivots might be, for -platoons, as much as four hundred yards apart, i.e., attackers coming -between them would be under fire at not more than two hundred yards. -Send a platoon under a commander to each pivot, and let him plan and -mark out his defensive measures, which must include:— - - 1. An arrangement for all-round defence, so that the pivot may be - self-contained and capable of continuing the fight, although - others may have been captured. - - 2. The siting accordingly of trenches and loop-holes to fire all - round and especially to sweep the front and rear of adjoining - pivots. - - 3. The adaptation of existing cover to save labour. - - 4. The provision of protection against enfilade and reverse fire, - and the _recognition of distant localities_ from which such - fire, whether of artillery or rifle, might be brought to bear - on the post. - - 5. The marking of ranges in each direction. - - 6. The provision of obstacles. - - 7. Any feasible scheme for alternative positions which his men - could reach and occupy under fire. - - 8. The concealment of the defences, provision of dummy trenches, - and loop-holes and any other shifts. - - 9. The telling off and posting of look-out men and fixing and - occupying of alarm posts when work has been completed. - - 10. Drainage and sanitation. - -The concealment of defences from aerial reconnaissance will, perhaps, -soon claim more attention than it gets at present. - -Practise an attack after defence, starting off one platoon under your -own orders to “go for” an indicated enemy, and sending word either -by messenger or by semaphore to the others, either to join you and -form a firing line, or to move out in support, but, if the latter, -do not fail to finally call them up to reinforce the firing line; -counter-attacks must usually be made with a relatively strong firing -line and small support. - - - _The Company in Defence Acting Alone._ - -When you have put non-commissioned officers and men through the -preceding course, plan some scheme on the lines of the defence of -Duffer’s Drift, to deal with a company isolated and beyond reach of -immediate reinforcement. Any bridge over a railway line, a group of -buildings supposed to contain stores, or a ford or bridge over a -river, will provide you with an object to defend. Choose a line of -defence round it and determine what are the essential pivots to be -held. To do this, so as to furnish an instructive lesson, it will -usually be necessary for you to pay a visit to the place by yourself -and formulate your proposed defence before bringing the company on -to the ground. Pay great attention to crossing and supporting fire -from the pivots, and look at the surrounding country with a view to -meeting attack from any direction, for in this case the company, as -well as the pivots in its line of defence, must be self-contained. -Also have regard to the certainty that you will have artillery -fire against you, to which you will not be able to reply, and in -consequence your proposed defences must include deep trenches or -recesses to shelter the men from shell. Your defences will take the -form of a chain of isolated groups about the point to be defended -and separated from each other by possibly several hundred yards. It -is no use simply to go and sit inside a group of buildings which -the guns would knock about your ears and against which the enemy -can concentrate. The better plan is to break up his attack and hide -your weakness by occupying well-strengthened pivots, behind whose -protection you may have some freedom of movement, and so be able, -if the weakness or rashness of the enemy gives opportunity, to -inaugurate local counter-attacks. These, if successful in inflicting -a sharp and sudden loss, will make him hesitate to deliver a decisive -attack till he has found out all about you. With one company you -cannot expect to achieve decisive results against any considerable -body of the enemy, but must be content with keeping him in play for -as long a time as possible, and an attitude of active bluff is the -best means of doing so. - -When you have got your plans completed, take out the company -as strong as possible and complete in its proper platoons and -sections—if there are too few men let one man count for two or three. -Send off platoons to occupy and plan the defence of the pivots as -done when practising it before. Do the same scheme on two separate -occasions. The first time do not send out a skeleton enemy, so that -the men may have time to look round, but for the second time send out -some scouts under a subaltern, and let the platoons fall out on their -positions with patrols out in front. Fix a certain hour by which you -expect the arrangements to be all ready, and arrange for the enemy to -advance at that time, and open fire on the patrols if they are met. -When the patrols have fallen back the enemy closes in and starts -sniping at the position. Then bring off a counter-attack, withdrawing -some men for the purpose from pivots that are not threatened, and -coming in on the flank of the attackers. In theory, of course, you -should have a support or reserve available for this, but it does no -harm to move men out of their trenches with the object of assuming -the offensive, while the men learn the essential part of their work -by all being employed on the perimeter. - -Have out the company yet a third time on the same or a similar -scheme, pivots and skeleton enemy as before. On this occasion, if the -scheme is the same, change round the platoons to different pivots -from what they occupied before, and when the arrangements for defence -have been settled, leave only sentries and their groups on the pivots -as look-outs, but have patrols in front. Form the remainder of the -men into a support in some central position, and tell them off to -occupy as alarm posts the pivots from which they were withdrawn. When -the skeleton enemy attacks, reinforce the threatened part of the line -by the men of the units told off for its defence, and with part, or -even the whole of the rest, make a counter-attack. - -It is very desirable, though unfortunately not often possible, to -perform these last three practices on ground where you are at -liberty to dig, and with an enemy of three or four companies instead -of a few snipers. - - - _Night Defence._ - -A night attack may be delivered as a sequence to fighting by -daylight, in the course of which the enemy has established himself -sufficiently close to the defences held by his opponent to see -clearly the way to reach the point against which he intends to lead -his force. Or he may deliver an attack without previous fighting, -hoping to get the better of the defenders by surprise, and basing -his plans solely on the results of reconnaissance. In the latter -case the attack must be preceded by a night advance, long or -short, according as the defenders’ outposts and their patrols have -succeeded in keeping the hostile troops at a distance or not, unless, -indeed, the troops or their scouts or spies have not been in touch -at all during the day in which case an attack would not be a wise -proceeding, because the needful information about the ground and -your forces is lacking. Such attacks as require a night advance as a -preliminary are likely to be made either over open ground or along -roads, for the difficulties and delays occasioned by moving troops -over broken ground which is not thoroughly known are very great. -But in the first case, when fighting has been going on by day, and -the two forces are in close contact at nightfall, separated perhaps -by only a few hundred yards, the presence of broken ground in front -of the defences is no guarantee that the enemy may not consider an -attack by night to have a reasonable chance of succeeding against -any of the points which he has been trying to carry by daylight. It -follows then that in preparing a position for defence the pivots must -be ready to withstand attack by night as well as by day, and also -that roads or paths leading into the position from the surrounding -country should be held and defended by night, in spite of their being -innocuous by daylight owing to being swept effectively by fire from -the adjacent pivots. It will be admitted, I think, that fire by night -is ineffectual unless at very short ranges, or when delivered by men -of extraordinary skill such as the up-country Boer and the American -backwoods-men were pictured to be. A European enemy will seek to -bring off his attack with the bayonet. The defenders will try to foil -this attack, firstly, by the use of fire at the close range, which -allows it to be effective, and, secondly, by the use of the bayonet. -This plainly translates itself into obstacles to keep the enemy under -fire, obstacles to hamper him when at bayonet distance, and night -rests to help the accuracy of the fire in certain desired directions. -I have told you one good form of night rest, and there are several -others, but all require some material if they are to be even -approximately accurate. Failing material of any sort, tie white rags -round the muzzles of the men’s rifles if you can get them. After a -week in the field your men will have nothing that is not very dirty, -but in a civilised country some member of the population may perhaps -be found ready to oblige a soldier. - -Working still on your daylight scheme show your non-commissioned -officers and men how to make night obstacles in addition to those -meant for daylight defence, which latter may be any distance up to -one hundred yards in front of the trenches. The night obstacles, on -the other hand, should be quite close, the fire obstacles as close -as ten yards, the bayonet obstacles, say a narrow ditch and a wire, -close under the trenches so as to make a man stumble when trying to -reach the defender with his bayonet. Make or plan these arrangements -round the pivots, and then practise blocking and defending paths or -roads by the same methods as for pivots, but with this variation, -that a parapet which can only be used for defence at night may -be as high as you consider needful without paying regard to its -invisibility, while those to be used by day are kept as low as -possible. In a practical exercise the men to hold these night posts -would have to be furnished either from your support or by thinning -some of the pivots. - -Yet the most carefully arranged trenches and obstacles will be of -no value unless the men occupy them in time to avail themselves of -their advantages. Time sufficient to allow of this, must be got by -patrolling in front as for outposts, by making automatic alarms in -front of the obstacles (M.F.E., 55 (12)), by having alert sentries -on the defence line, and by having a good and well understood -arrangement of alarm posts by which each man shall be ready to occupy -at once, in silence, and without confusion, the place which has been -assigned to him. Patrolling has been dealt with under “Outposts,” -the alertness of your sentries will depend largely on the state -of discipline to which you have brought your company, and on the -commonsenseness, to coin a word, of their training. Alarm posts -are practised in the same way as on outpost. In many corps it is a -standing order that when in camp or bivouac, on manœuvre as well as -on service, men are to fall in on their alarm posts once a day, the -usual times being at retreat or on arrival in camp (F.S.R., 48 (2)), -and this is done whether in Brigade (F.S.R., 47 (2)) or not. If such -is the order in your battalion, adhere to it within your company when -detached, if not, do it off your own bat. It does not fatigue the men -and ensures attention being paid on all occasions to this important -duty. - - - - - EXERCISE XVI. - - HASTY EXPEDIENTS. - - -I.T., 93 (iii.), directs the training of the section to include -rough and ready expedients so as to form a fighting front in any -direction. This training is of great value, both from a disciplinary -point of view, as it makes men quick to move on an order, and also -from the point of view of _moral_, as men accustomed to get sudden -and unexpected orders given under imaginary circumstances will be -more likely to keep cool, when such orders are necessitated by the -stress of actual battle, than men who have always been trained in a -deliberate fashion. - -Such sudden orders must in general mean one of two things, either -that the enemy has got you, or you have got him, “on the hop,” if I -may introduce an expression from the cricket field, and that there -is every chance of the bowler, whoever he is, being badly scored -off, unless he treats the batsman to something more difficult than -the expensive half-volley. If you are fortunately able to find the -enemy at a disadvantage, you will act against him by rifle fire -alone; but, on the other hand, you may find yourself caught in a bad -situation, by either artillery or rifle fire, or possibly by cavalry, -who mean to use the steel. It follows then, in practising expedients, -based, as they should be, on some possible situation, that you should -make the central idea either offensive, as if attempting to bring -your men into a position to get the best results from their fire, or -defensive, as if to escape, or mitigate shell fire or rifle fire, to -which you are subjected under adverse conditions. - -Against artillery fire from ranges or in positions at which you -cannot reply effectively with rifle fire, your action at first, at -all events, must be purely defensive, i.e., all you can do, will be -to escape being overwhelmed by the shell fire, and even at effective -rifle range, the shields of modern field guns, enable them to engage -infantry on very equal terms, so long as the infantry is in front, or -not far on a flank, of the line of guns. - -In the days of muzzle-loaders, it was the cavalry who possessed the -power of suddenly annihilating infantry, when caught unprepared to -withstand their charge. The magazine rifle has reduced this danger, -but the quick-firing cannon has now equal, if not greater, powers of -dealing out swift destruction to any infantry that it finds exposed -in close formation, if only the range be known. At least once in the -Russo-Japanese War, and again in the Turko-Bulgarian war, if we may -believe the somewhat ill-authenticated reports yet to hand, have -artillery wiped out of existence in a few moments several hundred -unfortunate infantrymen, who were caught in the _rafâle_ fired at a -range either ascertained previously, or got at the moment by good -luck or good judgment. The contingency of being thus caught by -artillery is evidently one that should be prepared for by infantry, -as was the forming of squares in the old days, when a cavalry charge -was an ever present peril. In this case of artillery fire, the -conditions and the object desired are practically always the same—the -infantry is in close order of some sort, and wishes to break up into -a congeries of small groups, so as to isolate the effect of the burst -of each shrapnel. The matter of rifle fire is different, as there -are any number of ways in which you may seek either to escape the -results of the enemy’s fire or attempt to use your own, and this is -the proper field in which to practise expedients. - -Whenever you intend to carry out some such movement to meet a -supposed situation, you must let the men know exactly what you are -picturing, so that they also may understand what is needed. The -essence of these practices is that they should be performed without -time for deliberate thought—the men must learn to think and act -quickly. The most satisfactory way is to be yourself mounted, as you -can then get the whole company to hear you at once, whereas, if on -foot, the men who are farthest from you often lose the first part -of what you say; you then have to repeat it, and the thing loses -its character of surprise for the rest, who have already heard it -once. Give out the situation in a loud voice, and in as few words as -possible, then try and give the very order you think you would give, -if the situation was a real one on service; use your own imagination, -in figuring what you would say, and how you would say it. To call -attention, it seems legitimate to use your whistle, as on service -the men would have some warning that things were about to happen, -either by the arrival of shell or bullets, the sight of the enemy, or -by the signal of their own scouts. In giving the situation, if you -are receiving fire, give out what kind of fire it is, the enemy’s -position, if it is allowable to suppose it known, or if you are -going to be on the offensive, give out where the enemy is, and what -he is doing, and how you learn this, i.e., by your scouts, or by -first-hand observation. For example, while the company is marching -in fours along a road, you see, in imagination, two shells burst -simultaneously near by, and about two hundred yards from each other, -and you wisely deduce that the enemy is ranging on your company. Blow -your whistle and give out “Artillery fire is opening on the company, -from such and such a direction—open out to columns of sections.” If -you have taught your men what to do to escape artillery fire, they -will open out at the double into columns of platoons, at not less -than fifty yards interval, measuring roughly at right angles to the -direction of the supposed fire (I.T., 118 (3)). - -In practising this opening out under artillery fire, which, as I have -said, is the one specific hasty manœuvre performed under conditions -nearly always similar, it is inexpedient to lay down any fixed rules -for the positions to be taken up by the platoons. It sounds simple to -say that the platoons of the leading half-company go to the right, -and those of the rear half to the left, but when men are marching at -ease, and shells begin bursting round them unexpectedly, I do not -think there will be time for anyone to see which half-company is -leading. The main thing is to get the platoons instantly away from -the road on which the enemy has laid his guns, and from each other. -Direct platoon commanders to lead their men at the double in any -direction away from the platoon in front, except, of course, towards -the rear. In theory, of course, this might result in all four making -out towards one flank, but, even so, this is better than having any -deliberative halts on the road, and in practice the platoons in rear -can see which way those in front are heading, and wheel to go to -the other flank. There is no advantage to be had from getting the -men in the ranks into extended order, as the shrapnel scatter the -whole width of their bursting zone in an impartial manner, nor is it -any use to seek such slight cover as gives only a screen from view, -unless with a view to getting away from the shell-swept locality -without attracting notice. Platoon commanders should, of course, make -for any cover that is sufficiently steep on the rear side to shelter -them from the downward dropping shrapnel bullets. If there is no -cover, the best thing after getting out into the line of platoons -separated by fully fifty yards intervals, is to move rapidly forward. -If cover exists with open ground round it, the men may be got away by -“dribbling” man by man, in the hope that the enemy may not spot the -movement, and continue or resume his shell practice, to defeat it. - -As regards expedients against rifle fire, I will only suggest a few, -and leave you to invent others suited to the nature of the ground you -have got to exercise on. - - 1. The company in close order is surprised by a heavy rifle fire; - there is cover near by sufficient to hold the whole company - crowded together. Order the men to get into the cover helter - skelter, and then advance or retire, by the successive - movement of platoons or sections, who take extended order at - their best speed as they emerge from shelter. If facilities - exist, tell one or two platoons to reply to the fire, from the - cover, till their own turn comes to move, by which time the - first lots that went out should have got into position to open - fire. - - 2. The company in close order is again surprised by rifle fire, but - there is no cover near to act as a base. Get the company - quickly into extended order, and let men reply to the fire as - soon as they have extended, using studiously slow fire. - - 3. The company or platoons in extended order have to change front - to meet an attack from a flank. As in the book, call on them - to line a hedge or ditch, facing so as to fire in the new - direction. - - 4. Coming through a gap in a hedge or wall, either in advance or - retreat, scattering off right and left, so as to get out of - the way of fire concentrated on the gap. - - 5. The scouts from a position some distance from the company report - a body of the enemy unaware of their presence and exposed to - fire. Bring the company quickly up to the scouts’ position, - halt, load, and adjust sights under cover and just short of - the firing position, and on your whistle the men advance at - once to the edge of the fire position and surprise the enemy - by a simultaneous fire from all the rifles. - - 6. Taking up quickly an all-round defensive position; the platoons - or sections go off and find the best positions in different - directions which you merely indicate roughly. - - 7. Hastily organised attacks, to dislodge an enemy unexpectedly - found in occupation of a position, also taking up action as - flank and rearguards under fire. - - - - - EXERCISE XVII. - - NIGHT OPERATION TRAINING. - - -I.T., 113, gives some instructions as to how men are to be taught to -march and to use their ears and eyes at night, while F.S.R., chapter -ix., goes into the subject at length. These operations are divided -into night marches, night advances, and night attacks. The men of -a company will not be fit to take a useful part in night tactical -exercises either in company or in battalion, unless they have had -some elementary training as laid down in “Infantry Training,” -and have also been practised in the two indispensable duties of -maintaining connection (F.S.R., 129 (4)) and in reconnaissance -(F.S.R., 130 (1)). Night patrolling and the duties of night sentries -have been dealt with under outposts, and I will not say anything -more about them here. The rest of the elementary training contained -in “Infantry Training” requires no explanation, and you can practise -your men in it in small parties. There remains the maintenance of -connection, and I have found that training for this is best done at -first by daylight. It is very simple, and after one or two daylight -lessons the men will work quite well by night, but to begin straight -off under darkness will only lead to waste of time, as mistakes -cannot easily be corrected, nor the working of a system made plain. -The company should parade as strong as possible in this exercise, -as, with only a few files on parade, the necessity of maintaining -connection, and the difficulty of doing so, are not so obvious as -when a fairly large body of men has to be handled without making a -noise. Connection has to be maintained within the company itself, -and also with the other companies in front or rear, if in column of -route, or on the right and left, if deployed. In order to practise -this connection with other companies, represent the front and rear, -or flank section commanders of the supposed adjacent companies by a -man for each company, who should move where those section commanders -would be, i.e., in fours, at the head or tail of the directing flank, -in line, on the flanks of the front rank. Use these dummies as the -recipients of all orders and signals passed along, so that your -company may get the habit of keeping touch with the others before it -works with the battalion. - - - _I. Connecting Files._ - -The only sure way of keeping connection between bodies of troops -moving in separate parties is by connecting files, who keep within -sight of each other and so can seldom be at more than twenty yards -distance apart. These files must be taught to pass commands with -exactitude, and never to open their mouths otherwise, i.e., they -must never speculate between themselves “Are they advancing?” or so -forth, or talk at all, because the next file may hear some word of -their talk and mistake it for an order. When connecting files are -needed they must take up their places without its being necessary to -tell them off loudly, and when no longer needed they must close into -company in silence and in good order. - -Form the company into fours, turned to a flank as in column of route: -tell the dummy section commander of the preceding company to march -off; string the company out after him, the men marching off in files -at about ten paces between each file without further command after -the first one has gone, each as it moves off touching the next to -follow, to give it notice. When they are all strung out, let the rear -dummy section commander follow. Then pass orders up the line; use -only the form given in I.T., 96 (3). To make sure that such verbal -orders have reached the intended recipient, the only way, though a -slow one, is to require him to send back a report that he has taken -the action required. Thus, a message from the rear to the leading -portion to halt would be answered from the leading portion by a -report passed down the line to the commander “The leading portion, -or, etc., has halted.” Let your first order be to halt, passed from -the dummy company in rear up to that in front “From Colonel A. to all -companies—halt.” On receiving the order one man of each file halts -on his ground and turns to the rear, the other goes forward to the -next file as quickly as he can without noise, delivers the order, and -returns to his former place, when he halts and faces the other way -from his comrade. Thus, on the completion of the order to halt, one -man of each file will be facing each way. Bayonets will usually be -fixed in night operations, and it is important, especially in Rifle -Battalions, to accustom men to carry the rifle on the right shoulder, -with the hand round the small of the butt and never at the trail, -otherwise there is much danger of someone getting a stab as well as -an order. - -After the halt, get on the move again by passing up the word to -advance, and practise any other likely orders:—“Go fast in front,” -“Go slow in front,” “The rear cannot keep up,” and so on. Follow the -orders up the line and see that men do not tamper with the form of -the order en route, and that they speak in a whisper when giving it -over. Section and platoon commanders must be told all orders as they -pass, see that their units conform, and look after the maintenance of -the distance between files. - -Next practise lateral communication, the four platoons in one line -in close order, with company intervals between each, representing -the leading platoons of four companies drawn up in line of columns -of platoons at deploying intervals and ready for a night advance. -Lateral connecting files need to be closer than when following -each other, so put out connecting files to the flanks in a similar -way to what was done before, but at six, or eight yards interval. -Then move, halt, and deploy the supposed column by means of these -files, dressing and interval being kept up by the files moving up or -stepping short, and closing on or inclining from any named company of -direction without specific orders. - - - _II. Marching and Formations._ - -Form up the company and get it into fours as if in column of route, -dummy company section commanders as before. Practise marching off -from the halt, and halting, passing the word from the front or rear -company along the men on the flanks of the fours. As the order comes -along, the flank men of the fours nudge or shove the other men in -their respective fours, and whisper to the flank men in the four in -front or behind. There is seldom any need to speak, as a push or -pull is enough. The platoon commanders get the word from the flank -men of the sections of fours, and from one another as well, as they -are to follow the order along their own platoons, and go forward or -back to the commander of the next platoon to whom they must repeat -it, and then resume their proper places. The platoon commander of -the leading, or rear, platoon is responsible for passing the word -to the nearest platoon commander of the next company. The company -officers must arrange also to hear all orders, and should have fixed -positions, known to all, which they will only quit temporarily. -In marching off from the halt, the rear portion of the company -should step out well, as soon as the order reaches them, so as to -avoid straggling, while the leading fours preserve a uniform pace. -In halting in battalion, the leading fours should close up on the -company in front, and continue to do so, till it is seen that it -has finished closing up; there is always bound to be a good deal -of straggling at first owing to the method of giving orders. When -this system is in good working order, move and halt the company on -your own audibly whispered word of command, the platoon commanders -repeating it, the system of communication being kept up as before, -but the men moving at once on the word; this will give a fairly -simultaneous action throughout the company while ensuring against -loss of touch. - -On the same lines, practise forming line from column of platoons, -mass, and column of platoons from column of fours, and marching in -line, paying attention throughout to dressing and the covering of -files in line. - - - _III. Night Assault._ - -Choose a position as objective, and form the company, in line or in -column of platoons, about three hundred yards from it, with scouts -about eighty yards in front of the company (F.S.R., 137 (4)). This -is the formation which would usually be adopted at the position of -deployment. When the scouts have got about one hundred yards from the -position, or up to a line which they would recognise in the dark as -being in close proximity to it, they should halt, and wait for the -arrival of the company. The whole then move silently forward towards -the position till you give the word or signal for assault, when all -charge. Practise this stealthy advance right on to the position, -as if the enemy were not alert, and also make the charge from -some distance, as would be done if the enemy opened fire, which is -recognised to be what will most often happen. After the assault the -men should be rallied by the non-commissioned officers taking all men -within their reach, and forming them into extemporised sections ready -to be reformed into platoons and to begin entrenching. - -If by chance you get material, you may introduce refinements, in the -way of wire-cutting men with each section, sand bags with each man, -and bags stuffed with straw carried ready to throw on to abatis or to -fill up trenches, to be carried in a fixed place in the company. - - - _IV. Night Entrenching._ - -Practise marching with arms and tools, and taking up a position to -be entrenched, with especial regard to avoidance of noise. When -entrenching by night, the trenches cannot be chosen to give a -field of fire unless it has been possible to obtain access to the -locality by day, and mark them in advance; failing this the company -commander, as soon as the position is reached, must send patrols, -and go himself, to ascertain that no commanding ground, at least -in the immediate vicinity, has been left unoccupied, and, at the -first light, all other such points within effective range as it is -possible to hold, should be secured and entrenched, without orders -from higher commanders. A full illustration of this, however, can -only be done by parading at night. - - - _V. Search Work._ - -Practise the company in going off, as if detached from the column to -get touch with other troops, or to find a gate or bridge by which -some obstacle, wall, canal, etc., met with, can be passed. The -company moves off dropping connecting files to keep touch with the -halted column, the files halt at their distances, and pass word if -the company has achieved its mission, and close on the company when -the column comes up, but not before, else the column will be left out -of touch; or, if the need has passed and the company is recalled to -the column, the connecting files again remain at their posts till the -company is gathered back on them. - - - _VI. Surprises._ - -When only a few men are on parade, advanced education, combined with -some amusement, may be got by experimenting in the best ways of -laying out obnoxious persons, such as hostile patrols, who have to -be rushed in silence (F.S.R., 138 (5)). Before beginning a stalk, -the quarry should be kept under observation to see which way he looks -when halted, and any other idiosyncrasies. The assailant should creep -up to him either on his flank, or from behind, moving one foot at a -time, and bending down, though not on all fours. If the sentry looks -his way, he must stay absolutely motionless, till he again looks -away. My informant on this matter was a friend of a successful rifle -thief in Upper India. - -After putting the company through the above daylight course, you -should, of course, put theory into practice and do some real night -work whenever you get the chance, putting out a skeleton enemy or -some observers to tell you how much noise you make, and follow out -the full instructions as to orders, watchwords, etc., given in -F.S.R., 138 and 139. Test your men as to their ability to see in the -dark; some men can see much more than others; spot these men and tell -them off as “Night Scouts.” Even if they are not otherwise qualified -as scouts, they are most useful in guiding the company over rough -ground. - - - - - A SCHEME OF A COMPANY TRAINING. - - -I give below, as an example of the application of the foregoing -exercises, a scheme of company training which I actually carried out. -This was in the days before platoons, so I have altered the scheme to -show what I should have done had the company organisation been what -it now is. I was given from Monday in one week to Saturday the next -week to march out into camp, about 10 miles, and get back, i.e., two -days of march, and ten halted working days. I had thirty-five rounds -per man of ball cartridge available for field practice musketry, and -a sufficiency of blank for the requirements of skeleton enemy and -for use with the men in one or two of the exercises. My men were -Regulars, and during the previous furlough season I had grounded them -piecemeal in field work. - ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- -DAY. | | FORENOON WORK. | AFTERNOON WORK. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 1 |Monday | March out to camp. March | - | | discipline and work of | - | | connecting files. Advanced | - | | guard. Sanitation. Water | - | | piquet and sanitary patrols. | - | | Pitched a perimeter camp as | - | | for savage warfare. Trenched | - | | tents against rain, and | - | | made a shelter trench round | - | | camp. Alarm posts. | ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 2 |Tuesday | Individual advance in | Improved and - | | | deepened camp - | | extended order. Retirement | entrenchments, made - | | by pairs. | loop-holes, night - | | | rests, and obstacles. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 3 |Wednesday | Platoon and Section in | Field practice - | | attack as part of Company. | Musketry:—Individual - | | | advance in extended - | | | order. 7 rounds ball - | | | per man. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 4 |Thursday | Platoon in independent | Field practice - | | attack. | Musketry:—Section - | | | in independent - | | | attack, 7 rounds - | | | ball per man. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 5 |Friday | Platoon in retirement. | Preliminary - | | | training for Company - | | | attack. Fire - | | | discipline and - | | | control. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 6 |Saturday | Company in attack with the | Prepared target - | | battalion. | positions and markers - | | | butts for - | | | snapshooting. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 7 |Monday | Company in attack with | Snapshooting, 7 - | | Battalion. | rounds per man. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 8 |Tuesday | Company in attack acting | Snapshooting, 7 - | | alone. | rounds per man. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 9 |Wednesday | Outposts. | Company in attack, - | | | 7 rounds ball. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 10 |Thursday | Defence. | Company in - | | | retirement. ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 11 |Friday | Night attack. Parade at | Hasty expedients. - | | 2.30 a.m. | ------+----------+------------------------------+---------------------- - 12 |Saturday | March back to quarters. | -=====+==========+==============================+====================== - - - - - Transcriber’s Notes - - Catalog page Changed Miscellaneous Tactica to: Tactical - pg 62 Changed close and re-form to: reform - pg 63 Changed expect either a counterattack to: counter-attack - pg 67 Changed this exercise, though to: through - pg 76 Added period after: left on the position - pg 124 Changed trenches or make loopholes to: loop-holes - pg 125 Changed the line of loopholes to: loop-holes - pg 136 Changed: (I.T, 156 (5)) to: (I.T., 156 (5)) - pg 182 Added comma after: entrenchments, made loop-holes - pg 183 Added period after: 7 rounds ball per man - pg 184 Added period after: Friday Night attack - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TRAINING OF AN INFANTRY -COMPANY *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: - -• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - -• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - -• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you “AS-IS”, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ - -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™'s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/69943-0.zip b/old/69943-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3fc9cb1..0000000 --- a/old/69943-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69943-h.zip b/old/69943-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c2fae20..0000000 --- a/old/69943-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69943-h/69943-h.htm b/old/69943-h/69943-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index fa64eb4..0000000 --- a/old/69943-h/69943-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7038 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html> -<html lang="en"> -<head> - <meta charset="UTF-8"> - <title> - The Training of an Infantry Company | Project Gutenberg - </title> - <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover"> - <style> - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - - h1,h2,h3 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; -} - -p { - margin-top: .51em; - text-align: justify; - text-indent: 1em; - margin-bottom: .49em; -} - -.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} - -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb {width: 45%; margin-left: 27.5%; margin-right: 27.5%;} -hr.chap {width: 65%; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} - -hr.r5 {width: 5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 47.5%; margin-right: 47.5%;} -hr.r15 {width: 15%; margin-left: 42.5%; margin-right: 42.5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} -hr.r35 {width: 35%; margin-left: 32.5%; margin-right: 32.5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} -hr.r65 {width: 65%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 17.5%; margin-right: 17.5%;} -hr.r90 {width: 90%; margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em;} - -div.chapter {page-break-before: always;} -h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;} - -.fs60 {font-size: 60%} -.fs80 {font-size: 80%} -.fs120 {font-size: 120%} -.fs130 {font-size: 130%} -.fs150 {font-size: 150%} - -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} -table.autotable { border-collapse: collapse; } -.tdl {text-align: left; line-height: 1.5em;} -.tdr {text-align: right; vertical-align: top; line-height: 1.5em;} -.tdc {text-align: center;} -.tdrx {text-align: right; padding-right: 1em; line-height: 1.1em;} -.tdlx {text-align: left; padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; text-indent: 1em; line-height: 1.1em;} - -.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: small; - text-align: right; - font-style: normal; - font-weight: normal; - font-variant: normal; - text-indent: 0; - color: #A9A9A9; -} /* page numbers */ - -.blockquot { - margin-left: 5%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -.bb {border-bottom: 2px solid;} - -.bt {border-top: 2px solid;} - -.br {border-right: 2px solid;} - -.center {text-align: center;} - -.right {text-align: right;} - -.wsp {word-spacing: 0.3em;} - -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.allsmcap {font-variant: small-caps; text-transform: lowercase;} - -.caption {font-weight: normal;} - -.bold {font-weight: bold;} - -/* Images */ - -img { - max-width: 100%; - height: auto; -} -img.w100 {width: 100%;} - - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; - page-break-inside: avoid; - max-width: 100%; -} - -/* Footnotes */ -.footnotes {border: 1px dashed; margin-top: 2em;} - -.footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} - -.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align: super; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: - none; -} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.transnote {background-color: #E6E6FA; - color: black; - font-size:small; - padding:0.5em; - margin-bottom:5em; - font-family:sans-serif, serif; -} - -/* Illustration classes */ -.illowp100 {width: 100%;} - -.pageborder {width: 400px; border: 1px solid; padding: 10px; margin: auto;} - -.no-indent {text-indent: 0em;} - - </style> -</head> -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The training of an infantry company, by Edward Kirkpatrick</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: The training of an infantry company</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Edward Kirkpatrick</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: February 3, 2023 [eBook #69943]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Brian Coe, Bob Taylor and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive)</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TRAINING OF AN INFANTRY COMPANY ***</div> - -<div class="figcenter" style="width: 65%"> -<img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="Cover"> -</div> - - - -<h1> -THE TRAINING<br> - -<span class="fs60">OF AN</span><br> - -INFANTRY COMPANY.</h1> - -<div class="chapter"> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> -</div> - -<div class="pageborder"> -<p class="center fs150"><b>CATECHISM ON FIELD TRAINING</b></p> - -<p class="center">(<b>INFANTRY</b>).</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p>A series of Questions and Answers on -all subjects of field training, extracted -from the latest official TRAINING -MANUALS, together with miscellaneous -information, practical exercises -and examples progressively arranged.</p> -</div> - -<p class="center"> -<em>Revised and brought up to date by</em><br> -<span class="fs130 wsp"><b>COL. H. O’DONNELL, p.s.c.</b></span><br> -<span class="fs80 wsp">(WEST YORKSHIRE REGIMENT).<br> -<em>SIXTH EDITION.</em></span></p> - -<hr class="r65"> - -<p class="center">CONTENTS.</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p>Elementary—General Principles of Attack -and Defence—Miscellaneous Tactical -Operations—Warfare in uncivilised Countries—Protection -on the Line of March—Protection -when at Rest—Methods of -obtaining Information—Quarters, Camps, -and Bivouacs—Field Engineering—Diary -of Training.</p> -</div> - -<p class="center"><em>Fully illustrated with 30 pages of Plates and Diagrams.</em></p> - -<hr class="r35"> - -<p class="center"><b>One of the numerous Press Opinions.</b></p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>“The book is most comprehensive, for every -branch of the soldier’s life is touched upon, and -every situation or emergency seems to be anticipated. -Colonel O’Donnell’s publication is quite -a military encyclopædia.”—<cite>Empress</cite>, Calcutta.</p> -</div> - - -<p class="center"><b>PRICE 3/- NET.</b></p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p class="center wsp"><em>From the Printers and Publishers</em>,<br> -GALE & POLDEN LTD.,<br> -<span class="smcap">Wellington Works, Aldershot</span>,<br> -And at London and Portsmouth.</p> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="center wsp"> -<span class="fs150"><b><em>The</em> TRAINING</b></span><br> -<br> -<span class="fs80">OF AN</span><br> -<br> -<span class="smcap fs150"><b>Infantry Company</b></span><br> -<br> -<br> -<span class="fs80"><em>By</em></span><br> -<br> -<span class="fs130">Major <span class="smcap">E. Kirkpatrick</span>, I.A.</span><br> -<br> -<br> -—————:O:————— -<br> -<br> -<br> -<span class="smcap fs120">2nd Edition.</span><br> -<br></p> - -<hr class="r15"> - -<p class="center wsp"><br> -<em>London</em>: <span class="smcap">Gale & Polden, Ltd.</span>,<br> -<br> -2, AMEN CORNER, PATERNOSTER ROW, E.C.<br> -<br> -Nelson House, PORTSMOUTH &<br> -Wellington Works, ALDERSHOT.<br> -Obtainable from all Booksellers.<br> -<br></p> - -<hr class="r90"> - -<p class="center fs130 wsp"> -<em>TWO SHILLINGS & SIXPENCE</em> (<em>Net</em>)<br> - -<span class="fs80">(<em>Copyright under Act of 1911.</em>)</span><br> -</p> -</div> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="center"> -<span class="smcap">Aldershot</span>:<br> -<br> -PRINTED BY GALE & POLDEN, <span class="smcap">Ltd.</span>,<br> -<span class="smcap">Wellington Works</span>.<br> -<br></p> -<hr class="r5"> -<p class="center"><span style="margin-left: -1em;">1914</span></p> -</div> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="PREFACE">PREFACE</h2> -</div> - - -<p>This booklet has not been written for -the use and benefit of officers and non-commissioned -officers of long experience -and proved skill in the profession of -training men for battle. To such as -these it may only provide an object of -criticism, for in the course of years spent -in turning recruits into trained soldiers -they will have formulated to themselves, -and adopted, some system of training -which they found productive of the best -results under their own guidance. But -there are many at present, and at a future -time, should certain circumstances arise -in the life of the nation, there may be very -many more who may not have such stores -of experience to draw on, and yet may -be faced with the problem of rapidly -converting an untrained or only partially -trained body of men into a force capable -of acting successfully in real war, both -in attack and defence against trained and -disciplined troops. Again, it is written, -not for officers commanding battalions,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</span> -nor for officers of cavalry and artillery, -but only for officers commanding companies -or other similar units of infantry, -though it may, perhaps, be of use in -training mounted troops for dismounted -action.</p> - -<p>Meantime, while the pipes of peace are -still smoking, it is hoped it may be of -some use to officers and non-commissioned -officers when the time comes to prepare -schemes of company training and put -them into execution.</p> - -<p class="right"> -E. K.<br> -</p> - -<p><em>September, 1913.</em></p> - -<hr class="r15"> - -<p class="center">PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION.</p> - -<p>Since the above was written, the issue of -new or amended Manuals of Training has -necessitated a revision of the book, which -is now presented in a form agreeable to -the four-company organisation.</p> - -<p>The Empire is now confronted by those -circumstances to which allusion was made -in the Preface.</p> - -<p class="right"> -E. K.<br> -</p> - -<p><em>September, 1914.</em></p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS</h2> -</div> - -<table class="autotable"> -<tr> -<td class="tdl"></td> -<td class="tdl"></td> -<td class="tdr"><span class="fs80">PAGE</span></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl" colspan="2">List of Abbreviations</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_ix">ix</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl" colspan="2">Introductory Remarks—</td> -<td class="tdl"></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr" style="width:13%">I.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Intention of the Book</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">II.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Making the Best of their Companies to Train the Modern Man for the Modern Battle</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_4">4</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">III.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Standard of Training assumed to have already been acquired and its application to further Exercises</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IV.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Ground for Training—Its Use and Influence—Palliation of the Lack of a Training Ground</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">V.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Company Organisation—Moral and the Personality of the Commander</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VI.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Discipline—Moral and Means of Supervision</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_22">22</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Organisation by Files and its Effect on Moral—Cohesion</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VIII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Method of Training</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_31">31</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IX.—</td> -<td class="tdl">As to Scouts and Working Dress</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td> -</tr> -<tr style="height:40px"> -<td class="tdc" colspan="3"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_viii">[Pg viii]</span>EXERCISES</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">I.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Individual Advance in Extended Order</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_38">38</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">II.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Retirement by Pairs</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_48">48</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">III.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Individual Training in Use of Fire and Fire Discipline</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_52">52</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IV.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Assault</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_60">60</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">V.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Section and Platoon in Attack</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_64">64</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VI.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Section and Platoon in Retirement</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_74">74</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Section and Platoon in Independent Attack</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_78">78</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">VIII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Platoon as Advanced and Flank Guard</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">IX.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Preliminary for the Attack by the Company in Battalion</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_89">89</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">X.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Company in Attack with the Battalion under Artillery Fire</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_93">93</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XI.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Company in Attack with the Battalion under Rifle Fire</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Company in Attack Acting Alone</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_105">105</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XIII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">The Company in Retirement</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XIV.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Outposts</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_112">112</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XV.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Defence</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_142">142</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XVI.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Hasty Expedients</td> -<td class="tdr"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_ix">[Pg ix]</span><a href="#Page_163">163</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr">XVII.—</td> -<td class="tdl">Night Operations</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_171">171</a></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdr"></td> -<td class="tdc">————</td> -<td class="tdr"></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl" colspan="2">A Scheme of Company Training</td> -<td class="tdr"><a href="#Page_181">181</a></td> -</tr> -</table> -<br> - -<p class="center fs120">REFERENCES <span class="fs80">AND</span> ABBREVIATIONS.</p> - -<table class="autotable"> -<tr> -<td class="tdl" style="width:20%">I.T., 128 (3)</td> -<td class="tdl">= Infantry Training, 1914, Section 128, para. 3.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl">F.S.R.</td> -<td class="tdl">= Field Service Regulations, Part I. Operations, 1909 (Reprint 1912).</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl">T. & M.R.</td> -<td class="tdl">= Training and Manœuvre Regulations, 1913.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdl">M.F.E.</td> -<td class="tdl">= Manual of Field Engineering, 1911.</td> -</tr> -</table> - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="A_FEW_PRESS_OPINIONS">A FEW PRESS OPINIONS.</h2> -</div> - -<hr class="r15"> - -<p class="center">“UNITED SERVICE MAGAZINE.”</p> - -<p>Major E. Kirkpatrick is the author of a small book on -“The Training of an Infantry Company.” There have -been so many books and pamphlets of this kind—short -cuts to knowledge—that one is apt to regard each fresh -one with suspicion and even with aversion, but Major -Kirkpatrick has much that is helpful to say, he says it -well, and he shows how much good work may be done -even in the training of the emasculated companies such -as our military system so often leaves us. His instructions -cover a wide field, and there must be few company -officers who will not be grateful to the author for many -valuable hints.</p> - - -<p class="center">“UNITED SERVICE INSTITUTION OF INDIA.”</p> - -<p>There are few junior officers of infantry who will not -benefit by a study of this book. The thorough system of -training elaborated in the seventeen exercises, which -form the major portion of the book, is worthy of the -attention of Regular as well as Territorial Officers.</p> - -<p>These elementary exercises deal with the essentials in -the war training of the Infantry soldier, from the work of -the individual in advance and retirement, and of the -section in action and on protection duties, to the training -of the company in attack and defence, and outpost.</p> - -<p>As an example of a system of training illustrating the -necessity of attention to detail in the early instruction of -the soldier, this series of exercises is valuable, and their -value is increased by the constant reference to training -manuals. The author wisely recommends the study of -all the official books referred to as he recognises that his -exercises and comments are only of value in so far as they -illustrate and explain the principles laid down in training -manuals.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"></div> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</span></p> - -<p class="center fs150"><b>THE TRAINING</b></p> - -<p class="center fs80">OF AN</p> - -<p class="center fs150"><b>INFANTRY COMPANY.</b></p> - - -<hr class="r35"> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="INTRODUCTORY_REMARKS">INTRODUCTORY REMARKS.</h2> - -<p>The authorised handbooks of training -rightly confine themselves to broad principles, -and do not attempt to give -detailed examples of their application, -the idea being that officers should study -these regulations and apply the principles -by the light of local conditions and their -own experience. Infantry Training and -the Field Service Regulations are, however, -very pregnant little books, containing, -as they do, a summary of the whole -of Modern Tactics, as far as they concern -infantry and the combined action of all -arms. Time and thought are necessary, -if the principles contained in them are to -be translated into such intelligent action -that the men trained on the lines laid -down may be capable of doing their duty -in real warfare, without first undergoing -a bitter and costly schooling of useless<span class="pagenum" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</span> -casualties or, perhaps, even of defeat. -But if an officer is called on to achieve this -result, being himself without much previous -experience in training, he will find -himself faced with a task of great difficulty, -and, with the best intentions, he -may waste precious time, as well as his -own and his men’s patience and energy, -in doing parades and exercises, which are -either not indispensable, or of minor -importance for the main object. As an -extreme example, it would be better, in -a hastily raised corps, to combine the -disciplinary training of obedience to the -word of command, with instruction in the -use of their arms, by practice in smart -work in aiming and firing, than merely -to study precision in “sloping” and -“presenting arms,” which look well, -but do not immediately affect fighting -efficiency.</p> - -<p>For these reasons, it has occurred to -me that I might do some of my brother -officers <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">in esse</i> or <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">in posse</i> a service by -setting out certain elementary exercises in -training infantry soldiers, which I have -found of value in bringing them up to a -standard of battle training sufficiently -high to need only battalion training and -a baptism of fire to turn them into steady -and reliable troops. It is not contended -that these few examples are anything but<span class="pagenum" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</span> -concrete instances of the application of -the principles of the Training Manuals. -They are intended, as has been stated, -merely for those who are short of time -and experience, and, therefore, references -to the manuals are given when the exercise -illustrates some particular section of those -works, and it is recommended that -officers who intend to use these examples -should look up and read the sections -referred to before going on to the parade.</p> - -<p>Though this book is not meant for -officers commanding battalions, I have -one word to say to them, and it is this, -that if they wish to have an efficient -battalion they must let the company -officers have proper opportunities of training -their companies, apart from the time -of company training, when the whole -company is struck off duty. If there are -six parades a week, let three or four of -them be company parades, ordered and -carried out by the company commanders; -the balance will be quite enough to secure -combination between the companies in -battalion. On company parades, the -battalion commander should supervise, -but never interfere, unless things are -being manifestly mismanaged. (See -T. & M.R., 2 (2 and 3)). The days -of the one man battalion are gone -for ever. The company is the thing that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</span> -matters; a good battalion can only be -composed of well-trained companies. It -is the work of the battalion commander -to propound the general lines of training -and to use the companies to the best -advantage in combination, but the training -of the individual soldier must be in -the hands of the man who is to lead him -in war.</p> - - -<h3>II.</h3> - -<p>On ordinary parades, the captain of -an infantry company is seldom able to -get together more than a fraction of his -men. The calls on the company for men -for duties and odd jobs, leave and furlough, -and, in the Territorial Force, the -private occupations of the men, allow of -only a few being assembled on any one -parade. This being so, there is a temptation—sometimes -yielded to by officers -who have not much experience, to say to -themselves: “This is rot; what can I do -without any men?” Such a question is -the result of confusing the individual -instruction of the men with the tactical -practice of the leader in handling his -company as a whole. The answer too -often takes the form of an hour’s close -order drill or something similar, which -may do some good, but not nearly as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</span> -much as if the officer stoutly made up his -mind to make the best of a bad job and -took out those few men and did some -practical training in field operations. The -fewer men there are on parade, the more -individual attention will the company -commander be able to give them. He will -be able to look at each man’s work more -carefully, talk to the men and get to -know their characters as soldiers, spot -who are likely to make good non-commissioned -officers, and coach them far more -than if the whole company were on hand -at once. So do not turn up your nose at -a company only twenty strong, but make -up a scheme of exercises to be gone -through, and, since the men who are not -on parade to-day will be so to-morrow, -arrange to do the same exercise on two, -or, if needed, three, consecutive days, so -as to catch all, or, at least, most of the -men, and your non-commissioned officers, -who are not usually so drawn on for off-parade -duties, will become well acquainted -with each exercise, learn what -to do and how to run things, and so -become both a help to you as instructors, -and themselves gain authority and power -of command from the knowledge of their -own competency.</p> - -<p>It is quite likely that these exercises and -the explanations given, may seem to some<span class="pagenum" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</span> -readers to be absurdly simple and needlessly -long-winded, while there is also a -good deal of repetition. To this I will -make early reply that they are written for -officers who are not too proud to accept -other people’s advice in training a company -of young soldiers of the stamp -which would be forthcoming if some -cause<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> or other tempted or constrained into -military service that great proportion of -our male population who are at present -quite ignorant of a soldier’s work, and -who, from apathy, or a hundred other -causes, do not join the Territorial Force. -Such men probably have never in their -lives given a thought to soldiering. The -majority of them are town born and bred, -and have passed most of their lives among -bricks and mortar. If they have ever -looked carefully at the large or small -features of a bit of country, it has been -from an industrial, sporting, or, perhaps, -sentimental, but never from a tactical, -point of view. They have everything to -learn in making use of ground for fighting. -Their ideas of using modern arms -are equally crude; the primitive fighting -instinct will be uppermost in their minds, -and would express itself in an incontinent -desire to get to close quarters with their -enemy, when bayonet, butt or hand grips<span class="pagenum" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</span> -would seem the proper way to settle the -matter. A very laudable desire it is—this -of wanting to close in—and one to -be encouraged by every means, but however -brave troops may be, they cannot in -general indulge their desire to attain -close quarters and the resulting facilities -of fighting by the light of their natural -instincts unless they have first been successful -in the fire fight—the strife of the -arms of artifice—which is waged by bullet -and shell at distances which Nature never -contemplated.</p> - -<p>It is the artificiality of the fire fight -which makes the task of turning town-bred -men into skilful soldiers such a -difficult and lengthy process. They must -be led to look at ground in relation to its -capabilities of increasing the effectiveness -of their own fire and also of diminishing -the result of that of the enemy, i.e., they -must learn to select good fire positions -and good cover. The problem of finding -the latter for himself against a civilized -foe begins, for the individual soldier, as -soon as the enemy’s rifle fire becomes -effective and compels the use by his side -of extended order; this is held to be on -open ground about fourteen hundred -yards from the enemy’s infantry (I.T., -118 (4)). Prior to this the responsibility -for cover rests with his leaders, as he<span class="pagenum" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</span> -will then be in some close formation. Fire -positions he must choose for himself as -soon as his section commander ceases -to be able to indicate his wishes, or -to secure combined action by the whole -unit. This will probably happen at -about six hundred yards from the enemy, -when individual fire is expected to -replace controlled fire by sections. These -two aspects of fighting—the use of -ground, and the use of the rifle as a -far-reaching weapon of almost absolute -precision, if truly sighted and aimed—are -foreign to our instincts, and the -average man has to be trained till he is -able to override his instinct and fight an -artificial war, so as to work his way to -charging distance. Some men need less -training than others; a stalker in a deer -forest is an adept in the use of cover, and -in general, country-bred men should be -easier to train than town-bred, but the -majority of our men being the latter, we -must lay ourselves out to teach them from -the beginning this business of the fire -fight, since success in this is usually -necessary before the assault can succeed -(I.T., 121 (7)). This can only -be done by training them in extended -order and putting them through various -exercises chosen for the purpose. Any -exercise which does not in some way tend<span class="pagenum" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</span> -to fit men for battle is mere waste of -time; aimless perambulations of an extended -line fall under this category, but -are quite often to be seen on parade -grounds. No amount of smartness in -close order drill will compensate for a -deficiency of field training.</p> - - -<h3>III.</h3> - -<p>The exercises which I have drawn up, -simple though they are, are of the nature -of “Instructional Operations,” as defined -by T. & M.R., 40 (12), and it is presupposed -that the men have received, or -are in course of receiving, sufficient instruction -in the use of the rifle (musketry -in all its branches), and of the bayonet -(bayonet fighting), in drill in close order, -and the drill grounding of extended -order work, including signals (I.T., -90-96). We are then to consider ourselves -to be at the stage in which the soldier is -to be taught to work over broken country -as directed in the latter part of para. 90, -above quoted. But do not think the -lessons learned at musketry instruction are -to be forgotten and left behind by the -men when they begin to work in extended -order across country. Demand -from your men that the rifle shall be -deadly, and, by unceasing supervision,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</span> -breed a habit among them of aiming and -firing in extended order, whether with -or without blank cartridge, with the same -exactitude as when firing their course of -musketry on the range. Take the high -standard—a hundred men’s lives in one -man’s bandolier, instead of a hundred -bandoliers for one man’s life. The higher -standard of the two is at least possible, -though not common, but why not try and -work towards it, so that when bullets are -flying within decisive range of the enemy, -it will be your men’s fire, that is the -deadly close-hitting kind, that makes -afraid, and not the haphazard jet of -bullets whose inefficacy lets unhurt -familiarity breed tolerant contempt?</p> - -<p>In the same way, when men are in close -order at any time during a field parade, -keep up the same smartness, and quick -obedience to orders which are exacted in -close order drills, in order that the men -may become truly disciplined, and not -merely so in appearance, so when they -come under fire without being extended, -as may happen in the early and distant -stages of a fight, they will, as a matter -of course, submit themselves to their -commander’s wishes, and ignore their own -inclinations, which, just at the first experience, -even with very brave men, might -be for an immediate and independent<span class="pagenum" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</span> -rush in some direction—perhaps forward, -perhaps in another direction—they will -be “in hand,” and free of the liability -of raw troops to suffer from sudden panic -or to become a mob, full of fight, perhaps, -but still a mob, and as such, a -force which cannot be controlled or used -in furtherance of any general plan.</p> - - -<h3>IV.</h3> - -<p>The want of a suitable and accessible -bit of ground on which to train our men -is one of the chief difficulties we have to -meet in the United Kingdom, and, of -course, it is greatest in the case of town -corps, varying with the size of towns, -while in large cities ground is not to be -had at all, save at a distance of several -miles from the men’s dwelling places. -Unfortunately, there is little doubt that -the possession or lack of suitable training -grounds has a great effect on the readiness, -or otherwise, of troops to give a -good account of themselves when they -come under fire for the first time in their -lives. The lack of it takes away reality -from the work of the men in the ranks -and cramps the initiative of their officers, -who are given no opportunity to exercise -their wits in figuring out practical situations -which might occur on service.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</span></p> - -<p>I can give no recipe for obtaining the -use of ground, but from what I have just -said I hope it is clear that the officer commanding -a battalion or company should -use every blandishment or art of which -he is capable to get the use of a stretch -of ground, and also, if it is at a distance, -and the attendance of the men at parades -voluntary, he should try to provide facilities -for getting them to and from the -ground. The worst bit of country is -better than the barrack square.</p> - -<p>The ideal ground is that which gives -conditions suited to each phase of the -training, the principal requirements being -fire positions and cover, and these should -occur so as to provide illustrations of -the use to be made of them in individual -training, and in the collective training of -sections, platoons, and the larger units. -Thus, for training individual men, good -ground would be that with an irregular -surface, giving many places twenty to -fifty yards apart, which each man could -use in firing and taking cover. The -usual seaside golf course of hummocks, -furze bushes, and occasional watercourses, -is good to teach individual men over—I -say teach, for we must not imagine that -an enemy will be so kind as to leave easy -ground like that in his front, if he can -help it. For section or platoon training,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</span> -the surface should be similar, so that the -individuals should still be called on to -look out for their own halting places, but, -in addition, there should be a certain -number of small features, hillocks, banks, -and so on, one to four hundred yards -apart, which will serve as fire positions -and cover for the whole unit, and provide -the commanders with successive -objectives, to which it will be their duty -to bring their men in good order, and -without needless exposure to the enemy’s -fire. When the company is training -together, the ground should be similar, -but of greater extent, both broader and -larger, so that sections and platoons may -be practised in supporting each other, -some being halted in these fire positions, -and covering by their fire the movements -of the others who are in process of gaining -fresh vantage points. And so on for -larger units and the combined action of -all arms; good ground for early instruction -is that whose features, from their -nature and distance from each other, lend -themselves to illustrate conditions under -which the power of each unit and arm -may be most profitably employed in conjunction -with others. Troops trained over -ground that gives the above advantages -will acquire an eye for country. A knowledge -of the uses to be made of ground<span class="pagenum" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</span> -will be common to all ranks, so that when -they find themselves fighting on bad -ground, which does not give much cover -or good fire positions, they will be the -more apt to search for such cover and fire -positions as are obtainable, while troops -trained on flat and open ground would be -much slower in making the best of a bad -job. We are not concerned with anything -more than a company; therefore, get for -your own use, if you can manage it—failing -help from higher powers—a bit of -ground of some sort, golf course, common, -city park, or what not. It need not be -very extensive. Even if it gives only three -or four positions suitable for occupation -by a section working in conjunction with -another, say, six hundred by three -hundred yards, it will give room for useful -instruction; but, of course, a larger -extent is preferable, as giving room for -more extended and varied exercises. If -your training ground is of limited extent, -it should, nevertheless, if possible, have -a wide field of view on all sides beyond -its own confines, and leave you the right -to send a few men to take positions on the -adjoining country, even if not allowed to -manœuvre about it, so that when carrying -out your exercises you may be able to use -men with blank cartridge to act as a skeleton -enemy, when such is needed. But if<span class="pagenum" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</span> -you are not allowed to send men on -to the neighbouring ground, the wide field -of view will still enable you to indicate -certain distant positions as <em>supposed</em> to -be held by the enemy. By this means you -will be able to use the whole area of your -permissible ground to represent a bit of -the battlefield, and escape having to -place the supposed enemy absurdly close -to your manœuvring troops, e.g., at the -edge of the training ground, or in some -other position which makes heavy calls on -the imagination. Britishers are not -imaginative. Lastly, if all else fails, and -you have nowhere to go except the flat -parade ground, or even the drill hall, -which in large towns is often very spacious, -do not, I beg you, become discouraged -and throw up all effort to get -your men ready for field work. Do the -exercises on the flat, limiting the extent of -movements, if there is little room, and -use flags or anything else to represent fire -positions for sections and platoons, and let -the men kneel or lie down between -advances, if there is no cover. A great -deal may be done in this way to lay a -good foundation for extended order -work. Your men will know the mechanism -of it, and you will save much time when -you do manage to have them out on a -proper training ground. I.T., 107 (2), requires<span class="pagenum" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</span> -company commanders, in preparing -their schemes of training, to have regard -to the ground at their disposal; do so, -therefore, even if the ground aforesaid is -only a parade ground, and make the most -of it; it is better than sitting still and -either doing nothing, or only a weary -round of company drill in close order. -Of course, you must let the men know -what you are driving at, or they will get -bored and lose interest.</p> - - -<h3>V.</h3> - -<p>Having got a company of men and -ground to train them on, the first step is -to organise that company for its battle -training. A company is organised into -four platoons, each under a subaltern, with -a sergeant as his second-in-command -(platoon sergeant). Each platoon has -four sections, and the sixteen sections -of the company are numbered one -to sixteen. The men of each of -the above units remain permanently in -that unit. <em>If possible</em>, maintain this -organisation on duties and fatigues, -though this is often a counsel of perfection, -but quarter the men together, and -insist on the maintenance of the organisation, -<em>without deviation</em>, on parades. Have -lists made up of the men of each platoon -and section, and let men who so wish,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</span> -belong to the same unit. Once these lists -are made up, see to it by means of the -section commanders that these men fall in -on parade together in the place in the -company where their section is standing, -no matter how few there are; if there are -but two men of one section on parade, they -should fall in as front and rear rank men -of one file. Avoid disseminating the -men of a platoon or section among other -units in order to raise the latter to a sizeable -strength. Instead of this: supposing -you have three weak platoons and -one strong one on parade; of the four -sections of one of the weak platoons, send -two to each of the other two weak platoons. -This will give you three platoons of, perhaps, -unequal strength, but sufficient for -work—and this without taking the responsibility -of section commanders off their -shoulders, and the cohesion of each -unit is preserved. Some further suggestions -on the subject of organisation will be put -forward when speaking of <em>moral</em>.</p> - -<p>The officer who aspires to develop whatever -capabilities his men possess of -becoming individually and collectively -formidable in battle, must pay attention -to much more than mere physical considerations. -Napoleon’s dictum, that the -moral is to the physical as three to one is -early dinned into the ears of the officer of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</span> -Regulars, but may stand repetition in -pages meant for the perusal of others. -No officer can expect to get the most out -of his men unless he directs his attention -to the study of the psychical side of the -training. There are two fields in which -the study must be pursued. One is the -officer’s own personality, the other that of -his non-commissioned officers and men. -T. & M.R., 8, deals with the former, and -should be read and pondered over.</p> - -<p>In battle good men have sometimes -achieved victory in spite of the shortcomings -of their officers, but good officers, -as well as men, are necessary for consistent -success in the series of battles -which make a campaign. Now, good -officers, given time for training, will infallibly -produce good men, provided the -latter are of the average physique and -courage. Therefore, study thyself, and -try to see what you lack, in order to become -a good officer. Cultivate your skill -in handling your men by reading any -books you can get; there are, unfortunately, -not very many that deal with the -work of such small units as companies -or even single battalions. Go out -into the country, or, if you have -not time, recall to yourself some bit of -country you know, and import an enemy -into the landscape. Perhaps a few riflemen<span class="pagenum" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</span> -are holding ground on the flank of a -road along which your battalion wants -to march, but cannot, without undue loss, -until these riflemen are driven off; and -your commanding officer tells you to do -the driving. In imagination, or on the -ground, decide what position you would -hold, if you were the enemy, in order to -make yourself as nasty as possible—though -having no hope of being reinforced—to -the battalion trying to come -along the road. Then settle in your mind -what you, as commanding your company, -would do to get rid of the annoyance. -Be quite clear, what would you do? Go -at them bald-headed? There are times -and enemies when this is the best way; -you would have to be fairly close, and -the enemy not shooting very straight, and -rather careful of his skin; or will you -march a long way round till the enemy -sees you are getting behind him, and so -manœuvre him out? Then your battalion -will be a long time waiting. Or will you -look at the ground and find, let us suppose, -a spot to which you will send a -section or platoon to open a fire on the -enemy, while another works its way to a -point you have noted from which fire can be -brought to sweep crossways a little knoll, -or some such supposititious feature which -seems to form the enemy’s left flank, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</span> -to be occupied by ten or twelve men, and -which gives command over the rest of his -position? Then, while the second lot is on -its way, you plan to lead the remainder a -little way round, under cover, in order to -get to fairly close range of the knoll, so -that when the second party opens fire on it, -and its defenders are hampered both by -this fire and by that of those you first -posted, you may surprise them by an -outburst of fire from your reserve, and -either drive them off their perch by -cross-fire from three directions, or, if they -do not shift, run in at them with the -bayonet, trusting to get across the intervening -space at the cost of a few casualties, -when your superior numbers at that -point should ensure your success even if -they actually await the bayonet. Learn -to consider quickly how many ways there -are of doing such a job as the above, and -to decide quickly and rationally which is -the best.</p> - -<p>These schemes, involving only a company -or two, will not be presented for your solution -by your battalion commander; you -must set them yourself, and their solution, -and the thinking necessary thereto are the -best methods an officer can get of training -himself without having his men on the -ground. In your mind’s eye, put your -company into every situation you can<span class="pagenum" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</span> -think of, and get it out again, and you -will have acquired an enormous reserve of -capacity for acting quickly and rightly -when your men and your enemy are both -on the ground. But beware of dealing in -too short distances, or you may produce -unreal pictures of war. Do not imagine -manœuvres at four hundred yards from the -enemy when every man exposed would be -hit in a few minutes. The clearness and -decision of thought you acquire will be -reflected in the orders you give. Your -men will give you their confidence when -they see, as they are quick to do, that you -know your job. There is nothing more -disheartening for a subordinate, be he -private or colonel, than to feel he is under -control of a duffer, whose mistakes he will -have to correct. This feeling saps discipline, -and quickly destroys the fighting -value of a body of men. In peace training, -the men become sulky at being -“bothered about,” lose interest in their -work, and wish themselves done with -parade. In war, their personal characters -usurp the control of their actions, and they -become a mob in uniform.</p> - -<hr class="tb"> - -<p>But in addition to possessing the confidence -of the men in your tactical ability, -you should seek all other means to increase -your influence over them. Gain their<span class="pagenum" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</span> -respect in other ways, by honesty of purpose, -by example, tact, devotion to duty, -and so on. Gain their goodwill by watching -over their individual and collective -interests, though in this you must play to -the gallery sufficiently to let them identify -you as the source of benefits received. -Keep an even temper, and do not show -anger without good cause. Personal attachment -to their officer shows itself most -when men’s powers are taxed by hardship, -fatigue, and danger; it is then a great -auxiliary in maintaining discipline among -the mass.</p> - - -<h3>VI.</h3> - -<p>As regards the <em>moral</em> of the men, -I.T., 1 (4 to 10) must be referred to. -You <em>must</em> introduce discipline—the habit -of subordinating personal inclination to -the orders of the superior promptly and -without cavil. If your men are raw, you -have to go slow just at first till they all -know what is expected of them. Let -them understand that orders are not given -haphazard, but are invariably based on -some good reason, which, being so, there -is no need for reasons to be always stated, -nor for recipients of orders to feel unhappy -for want of them. If you can induce a -feeling among the men that slackness on -parade, slowness in obeying orders, and so<span class="pagenum" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</span> -on, are bad form, and tend to disgrace the -company, you will do well, and this good -spirit will enable you to enforce discipline -without having recourse to punishment, if -you are vested with the power of inflicting -it.</p> - -<p>I have already said that when in close -order during tactical exercises, you should -maintain discipline in the ranks. I now -go further and say that you should maintain -it when the men are extended or -detached from the company singly or in -small groups. Evidently the discipline -here needed is something more than mere -mechanical obedience. What it is, is to -be found in T. & M.R., 39 (4), and F.S.R. 12 -(13), and I.T., 116 and 117. Make the -men understand that when they are extended -they must obey their unit commander’s -orders and signals as to fire and -movement at once, and without hesitation, -and must be always on the look-out -for them. Allow no talking, except what -relates to the business in hand, such as -passing of orders or information, results -of fire, and so on. Hold the men responsible -that if they are out of reach of the -control of their leader, it is their duty to -carry out the spirit of the orders under -which they set out. To bring their -responsibility home to them, you must -make a point of calling men occasionally<span class="pagenum" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</span> -to give an account of what they did when -detached, and why they did it, so that they -may pause for a moment if they are of the -sort that take advantage of opportunity -to sit behind a hedge and smoke a -cigarette when they ought to be up and -doing.</p> - -<p>Here you will naturally say that this is -all very well, but how is one to look after -men scattered here and there over several -hundred yards of rough country? Here -come in the non-commissioned officers, of -whom, so far, no mention has been made, -and also your subaltern officers. Since -success in battle will depend largely on the -efficiency of fire unit commanders, and the -normal fire unit is the section (I.T., 6 (4)), -it is evident that the section commander is -a very responsible person, and much must -be expected from him.</p> - -<p>Your subalterns and platoon sergeants -you must use as your delegates in supervising -and leading the platoons to which -they belong, except when they are needed -to act specifically as platoon commanders, -keeping themselves constantly on the -move among the men, looking at the details -of the work, sighting of rifles, aiming, -use of cover, choice of lines of movement, -not lying down themselves nor participating -in the operation as combatants. When you<span class="pagenum" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</span> -wish to give them practice in setting exercises -themselves, turn the whole company -over to one of them and act yourself as -critic, or act as subaltern under his orders. -This is one means of supervision.</p> - -<p>The next is your non-commissioned -officers. They are in direct command, -and you must hold them responsible for -their sections, but when their units -are acting in conjunction with others, it -is evident they cannot act both as commanders -and instructors unless certain -concessions are made, for if the non-commissioned -officers as well as the men of a -section were to act as they would have to -do under real fire, each non-commissioned -officer might be able only to supervise a -man or two on his right and left, the rest -being too far off. Therefore, at the beginning -of an exercise, you should tell the -non-commissioned officers whether, in -addition to giving executive commands, -they are to be at liberty to move about -freely and act as instructors also. Needless -to say, in instructional exercises, and -until the men are quite seasoned, you -should let them do this, but, on the other -hand, in exercises meant to illustrate -actual conflict and the limitations imposed -by the presence of an enemy, they should -pay attention to those limitations so that -they, as well as the men, may be prepared<span class="pagenum" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</span> -to endure the disabilities imposed by Service -conditions.</p> - -<p>Next comes yourself. Once you have -given your subordinates your orders for -any exercise, leave them to carry it -through, and make yourself as ubiquitous -as may be in supervision. Keep criticism -for the end, and interference only -for the prevention of absurdities. To -make yourself ubiquitous, the best way -is to use your horse, and make -the noble animal do the running about -with you on his back. You can then get -through about six times what you can on -your own feet, by cantering from one -section to another, and you get a better -view of the whole performance, but you -must remember when correcting anything -the men are doing that you are mounted, -while they are probably kneeling or lying, -and much that you see is invisible to them. -Equip yourself with a pair of field glasses, -and also with a megaphone, which latter -should be about fourteen inches long, and -carried by a strap over the shoulder, the -strap punched so as to be capable of being -made long or buckled up close under the -arm, according as you need to use the -megaphone, or wish to get it out of your -way. Use your glasses to look at what -sections and individual men in them are -doing. They will reveal to you small<span class="pagenum" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</span> -mistakes that escape notice at some -distance with the unaided eye. The megaphone -saves you a lot of small excursions -to get to earshot of men, and also a lot of -shouting at a distance, which is fatiguing, -and is apt to lead to exacerbation of -tempers, both of the shouter and the -listener. Moreover, it enables you to hear -as well as speak from a distance. This is -done simply by holding it aimed at the -other man with your ear instead of your -mouth at the mouthpiece. Use your -whistle to call attention to orders or -signals, carry it in your hand, not in your -pocket, and put a loop in the cord and -pass the loop over your middle finger, or -you will be always dropping it. Instead -of a cane, carry a small semaphore flag, -and give your signals with it. This saves -a good deal of arm-waving, and tends to -smarten up movement, as it is more easily -seen than the arm. By bringing all these -aids into your service, you will find that -you can make your influence felt, although -the sections are separated by the greatest -distances which they are ever likely to be -called on to take up in battle.</p> - - -<h3>VII.</h3> - -<p>Besides discipline, there are certain -other moral influences which give strength<span class="pagenum" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</span> -to an Army. These are indicated -in I.T., 1 (4 and 5). The two mighty -forces of religion and patriotism are -not treated of here, as they have their -roots not in any system of training, -but in the upbringing of the youth -of the nation, but there is one force -which you, as a humble commander, can -call into play, and that is shame—the -dread of losing the respect of oneself and -of one’s comrades. During peace training -you may make men dread the public -shame of misbehaviour by the aid of those -means of supervision which I have suggested, -but in war the power to supervise -is greatly curtailed, and it is very desirable -to find something to replace it, and, at the -same time, to supplement a too absolute -reliance on the stoutness of men’s hearts, -for this may prove a broken reed when -the troops are largely composed of unseasoned -soldiers.</p> - -<hr class="tb"> - -<p>To a certain extent, the organisation of -the company into permanent sections provides -us with the substitute we desire, as -the men of sections are likely to be -cognisant of how their comrades behave -when out of view of the rest of -the company as long as the whole -of the men of the section are in -view of each other; but this will not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</span> -always be the case: for example, in wood -fighting or in house fighting, both of -which would assuredly occur if our men -have to fight in Europe. In such fighting -everything comes down to the pushfulness -of the individual soldiers, for even sections -will lose their leaders. Therefore let us -carry the principle of the company -organisation logically one step further, and -make the men of a file as they fall in on -parade in the section act in conjunction for -the remainder of that parade. This -arrangement is recognised in the last edition -of the Musketry Regulations, and has, -at various times, been adopted in former -drill books of our Army, and has given -excellent results, while, if the present -book does not prescribe it, at least -it countenances it (I.T., 123 (12)), and -I strongly recommend your introducing -it into your company. It is likely -to produce emulation in the fire fight -among men whose hearts are in the -right place, and in the assault it must produce -the advantages of combination, for -two men coming on with the bayonet in -conjunction are far more likely to do -someone an injury than if they each came -on independently, since in the latter case -a cool and skilful antagonist might dispose -of one and then the other, even as the -Japanese are said to have stepped aside<span class="pagenum" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</span> -when charged by the Russians, who, running -forward blindly and head down, fell -an easy prey to their alert little enemies, -and were bayoneted in succession as they -arrived. The proof of this pudding is the -eating thereof, and if your company ever -happens to be alongside a company told -off daily into haphazard sections, as -is sometimes done, in spite of rules, -you will then see the difference, even -if it is only at manœuvres. In close -order they may still look alike, but let -them be extended in rough country, and -you will see that yours is the blade of -steel; the particles of its metal are coherent; -it will bend, but not break. The -other is of wrought iron, polished on the -surface but of brittle material, and sure to -fly to pieces in any rough usage. By this -file organisation you will produce in the -men in the ranks the highest degree of -cohesion—the habit of regulating their -own actions in accordance with the -actions and needs of others in furtherance -of one general aim.</p> - -<p>Having secured this cohesion among the -men, you have still to produce it within -the company as between platoons and -sections. For cohesion is the coping stone -of the edifice of efficiency, and rests on a -basis of discipline, moral and training. -It makes possible the application of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</span> -the principle of mutual support which -is indispensable in the attack (F.S.R., -105 (4)), and it enables retirements -and defensive action to be carried out -without disorganisation, and with the -minimum of loss. Whenever sections -act together, see to it that the non-commissioned -officers keep an eye on the -movements of the others, and question -them as to the extent their orders to their -sections should be influenced by the needs -and movements of the others. By this -means they will be induced to check the -inclination to play only for their own -hands, and to remember always that their -unit is part of a combination which can -best attain success by acting accordingly.</p> - - -<h3>VIII.</h3> - -<p>Training is the preparation of officers -and men for the duties which they will -carry out in war. These duties consist in -the application of the principles contained -in the training manuals, and it is your -business to provide concrete examples. -But in these days of long range arms combats -take a very long time, and you cannot -expect in a parade of perhaps one or at -most two hours, and with a limited extent -of ground, to carry out all the varied -phases of an operation which, in warfare,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</span> -would take anything from six to eighteen -hours to complete, and would extend over -perhaps five or six miles of country, even -if we limit ourselves to the extreme ranges -of heavy artillery, and take no account of -movements not within the range of possible -fire. Therefore, in your training, you -must be analytical, choosing for one -parade such phase or phases as you have -time and ground for, and doing the others -later on. When your company knows all it -can be taught thus piecemeal, it will be -early enough to try to get time and ground -to perform continuous operations.</p> - -<hr class="tb"> - -<p>For instance, infantry in the attack will -usually have to go through three phases: -first, the advance to fire positions; second, -the fire fight (I.T., 121 (6)); and, -third, the assault, which latter must -be divided into the charge and the steps -which follow it according as it is successful -or not. You will have to train for -these three phases. The first, against an -enemy armed with guns and rifles, would -consist in opening out from column of -route into little columns—sections or -platoons—and moving forward in this -formation, the main object being to -escape being smashed to pieces by his -artillery fire before being able to do him -any damage (I.T., 118 (3)). Later, you<span class="pagenum" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</span> -would come under his rifle fire, and your -little columns must scatter out into lines -of men in extended order (I.T., 118 (5)). -These movements seem, and are, very easy, -but still they must be practised in peace -if they are to be done coolly and without -confusion in time of war when the first -intimation of the necessity for opening out -may be the shriek and crash of what will be -to most of the men the first shrapnel -they have ever seen, and withal aimed -at themselves. This phase requires the -presence of all four platoons of the company, -and so may be kept over till the men -have been trained in the phase which it -precedes, namely, that of the fire fight.</p> - -<hr class="tb"> - -<p>The fire fight begins when the attacking -infantry have got as far forward as they -can without having to reply to the enemy’s -fire, and it is quite distinct from the preceding -phase of passive endurance. Success -in the fire fight is an absolute necessity -for a successful assault. Possibly your -enemy has prepared your success before -war broke out by abstaining from training -his men in musketry, but even if his shooting -is inferior, the fire fight will call into -play all the qualities and skill of which -your men are possessed, both individually -and collectively. Accordingly you should -practise them in the fire fight from the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</span> -opening of their fire up to the assault, first -individually and then collectively.</p> - -<p>The assault can be dissected into the -fixing of bayonets with as little cessation -of fire as possible, the charge itself, followed, -according as it is held to have been -successful or not, by the rallying of the -troops, pursuit of the enemy by fire and -strengthening of the captured position, or -the withdrawal or such mitigation of the -results of failure as may fairly be attempted. -Thus, by considering the attack -as made up of phases as above, it is, I -think, possible and instructive to practise -each one of them separately, on a short -parade, and on limited ground, by placing -the men in the order in which they would -be at beginning of any one phase, and -carrying on from there.</p> - -<p>Before beginning any exercise, call your -non-commissioned officers out to the front, -and explain to them and to the men, in -very full detail, what the exercise is intended -to be, what points particularly -require attention, how you want it done, -and the sequence of events, if it involves -combined action between the different -units; whether the company is supposed -to be acting by itself or as part of the -battalion, and, if the latter, whether your -side are having the support of artillery fire -or not, where the enemy is, and what he<span class="pagenum" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</span> -is, i.e., is he infantry only, or has he also -cavalry and guns, what he is supposed to -be doing, attacking, defending, retiring, -marching, or what. Deal with all such -points before you start, otherwise you will -find your non-commissioned officers and -men filling in the blanks each according to -his own bent of imagination, and everyone -in consequence playing at a different game. -To be thus able to define the scope and -arrangements of the exercise, you must -have it clearly planned out in all detail in -your head. This you should do if possible -the day before the parade, so that you will -have the thing well thought out, and events -marshalled in logical sequence.</p> - -<p>At all exercises, if possible, have the -enemy represented by a skeleton force, as -directed by T. & M.R., 48, a few actual -men with blank cartridge, and a red range -flag or two to roughly define the enemy’s -position. Use for this purpose old soldiers, -if you have them, or, at least, men -who have already performed the exercise -you mean to do, and it is better to take -one or two men from each platoon than -to send off a whole section, and so -break up the company organisation. Six -or eight men are quite enough to form any -skeleton enemy that is needed for a company -to manœuvre against. You must -give the skeleton enemy definite orders as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</span> -to what they are to represent, where they -are to go, and what to do and not to do. -If they are given at all a free hand, especially -if under the enterprising British -subaltern, they are very apt to indulge in -far-reaching manœuvres, and subject you -to sudden raids and onslaughts which upset -your scheme for the parade, and leave -you no enemy at the very point you wished -to have him. If you cannot arrange for a -skeleton enemy, at least never fail to indicate -some position as supposed to be held -by an enemy. If your exercise ground is -limited in extent, fix the enemy’s position -outside it, regardless of whether you have, -or have not, licence to traverse the intervening -space, so as to avoid carrying out -your exercise within impossibly close range -of the enemy. In default of a skeleton -enemy to provide you with a target, tell -your men to aim at any members of the -public who are about the enemy’s position. -This is better than snapping at inanimate -objects, as it gives more interest and so -keeps up careful aiming. As regards the -general method of training, follow commonsense -and the manuals, and work from -individual up to collective, bearing in mind -always that collective work is built up of -the work of the individuals who throughout -have to be kept up to the collar by the -various arts which I have touched on. The<span class="pagenum" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</span> -less of the iron hand that is shown the -better.</p> - - -<h3>IX.</h3> - -<p>I make no mention of scouts, as they are -specialists. They must be selected after -you have got to know all the men of your -company and their capabilities. Their -training as scouts cannot be carried out by -you personally at the same time that you -are training the company. To be really of -use, it will be a whole-time job for one -officer, and you will either have to turn -them over to one of the subalterns, or go -with them yourself, preferably the former, -if the subaltern is capable. When they -are trained and fall in on parade as scouts -in their sections, it is a good plan to have -places permanently reserved for them as -third files from the left of sections (the -blank file’s place) so that they can leave the -ranks without disturbing the formation for -forming fours.</p> - -<p>As regards dress one thing is quite -certain, and that is that with only -one suit of uniform men cannot appear -clean and smart off duty in it, and yet use -it for field work with all the lying down -and knockabout wear involved. In time -of national danger, appearances will go to -the wall, and men will do their work at the -expense of the fit of their one and only suit -of uniform.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</span></p> - - -<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTES:</h3> - -<div class="footnote"> - -<p><a id="Footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="label">[1]</a> A cause now exists, and the men have come out.</p> - -</div> -</div> - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_I">EXERCISE I.<br> -<span class="smcap">Individual Advance in Extended Order.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>The exercise portrays what men will -have to do when the rifle fire of the enemy -becomes effective, and necessitates extension -of the small columns which are used -to dodge his shell fire (I.T., 118 (3)). This -will be somewhere over one thousand yards -from the enemy, and perhaps fourteen hundred -may be taken as a maximum. From -the point at which extension from the small -columns is made up till the time of the -assault, a line of men in extended order is -the suitable formation, unless there is some -covered way leading forward which can be -traversed in file or other formation. Once -the advance has begun it should be -carried through as quickly as possible -without exhausting the men too much, and -fire should not be opened until it is absolutely -necessary to neutralise that of the -enemy, firstly, because it lessens the speed -of the advance and so increases the time -during which the attackers are exposed to -the enemy’s fire; secondly, because once<span class="pagenum" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</span> -men start firing it is more difficult to lead -them forward; and, thirdly, because it uses -up cartridges whose value and difficulty of -replacement increases at every yard -nearer the enemy’s position.</p> - -<p>The exercise is then to train men to gain -ground to the front with the minimum of -exposure to the enemy’s fire, and as quickly -as may be, firstly, without firing, and, -secondly, while firing themselves, but in -the latter case speed must be subordinated -to the development of a fire of sufficient -accuracy and volume to largely neutralise -that of the enemy, for at this stage of the -battle advances under fire will only be -possible if it is inaccurate; and the only -certain means of causing it to be inaccurate -is by disturbing the enemy’s nerves and -aim by bringing to bear on him the fire -both of supporting troops and of the firing -line itself (I.T., 118 (6)).</p> - -<p>The regulations do not encourage the -opening of fire by units less than two -platoons at ranges over one thousand yards -as the results do not compensate for the -delay. Under one thousand and up to six -hundred it is desired that fire should -be controlled and directed, i.e., the -amount, and the target should be specified -by commanders (I.T., 116). Under -six hundred yards it is recognised<span class="pagenum" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</span> -that individual fire gives good results, -and, moreover, control becomes almost -impossible.</p> - -<p>Divide your exercise accordingly. First, -teach merely the advance without firing, -letting the men know that they are not to -fire, as a rule, without orders under six hundred -yards, and then let them advance -firing at each halt behind cover, choosing -their own target and times of firing as they -would do in the stage of “close fire,” i.e., -six or perhaps eight hundred yards up to -assaulting distance, which latter is about -two hundred yards from the enemy’s line of -defences.</p> - -<p>This parade is one that can be done with -very few men present, but it is necessary -to form them up into sections with a large -proportion of non-commissioned officers. -Keep the men in their proper sections, but, -if necessary, join two or three together, so -as to form sections with three or four non-commissioned -officers to each. Thus, if you -form four sections, they should each be in -reality a boiling down of the platoons. In -future exercises I will also suppose that you -thus concentrate your men, keeping the -members of each section together, and -form them into sections of size suitable to -the work of the day, and no further allusion -will be made to this.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</span></p> - -<p>Before taking the men on to the exercise -ground, you should choose a point on it -from which you intend to start your advance. -Some fourteen hundred or less -yards from this choose a position for your -skeleton enemy, who will consist of three -or four old soldiers with forty rounds of -blank each. If men are not available, put -up a few red range flags. Whichever are -used, put them into some position that an -enemy might reasonably occupy; do not -simply dump them down on to the ground. -The skeleton enemy must be told to show -up occasionally, and to open a slow but -regular fire as soon as they see your men -advancing, but only to keep it up as long as -your men show themselves in making their -advance. A complete cessation of fire will -denote that your men are making such good -use of cover as to be invisible to the -enemy. Let your men also know that -these instructions have been given, and -that such an advance is the ideal to be -sought for, provided always that it is not -absurdly slow. If neither men nor flags are -available you must make believe and point -out a supposed position at a supposed -distance. I have already pointed out the -advantages of having a skeleton enemy to -work against.</p> - -<p>In front of your starting point, and about<span class="pagenum" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</span> -four hundred yards from it, decide on some -point at which you will let the men halt -after they have made their way across the -intervening space. Here I will refer you to -the diagram. The line AA´ is your starting -point, CC´ the enemy’s position. Your -exercise consists in showing individual men -how to gain ground from AA´ as far as -BB´, distant about four hundred yards -from AA´, with the minimum of exposure -to the enemy’s aimed fire. Draw up the sections, -supposing there are two, on the line -AA´, fifty to one hundred yards apart, and -let the men sit down facing away from -CC´ and, if possible, under cover, so that -they may not see how their comrades -negotiate the course. Space the available -non-commissioned officers of each section -along the course from A to B and A´ to -B´, with orders to supervise and criticise -the advance of each man within the limits -of their beats. Allow a belt of twenty to -thirty yards broad from A to B and from -A´ up to B´, within which men must seek -their cover. This belt is made broad here -to afford instruction, but when the men -work together in their sections, it will be -much narrower, as they will then be extended -at intervals of five or six paces only. -Start off one man at a time from each section -to cross from AA´ to BB´, to move as -if under fire from the enemy in rushes from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</span> -one cover to another. As soon as a man -reaches BB´ he may fall out and watch the -movements of the remainder. Do not send -off a fresh man until the preceding one has -nearly reached BB´, so that your non-commissioned -officers may have good opportunity -to look at each man as he goes. As -for yourself, be active in supervising both -sections, using your horse if you have one.</p> - -<p class="center bold p2">DIAGRAM I. FOR EXERCISES I. & II.</p> - -<hr class="r15"> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>CC´ = Enemy’s position about 1400<sup>X</sup> from AA´. Enemy<br> -<span style="margin-left: 4.5em;">being represented by men with blank cartridge</span><br> -<span style="margin-left: 4.5em;">or flags.</span></p> -</div> - -<figure class="figcenter illowp100" id="i_b_044" style="max-width: 39.8125em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/i_b_044.jpg" alt="DIAGRAM I. FOR EXERCISES I. & II."> - <figcaption class="caption"> -</figcaption> -</figure> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>AA´ = Starting points 1400 yards from enemy’s -position.</p> - -<p><span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Men start from AA´ to cross to BB´</span><br> -<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">without exposing themselves to the</span><br> -<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">enemy at CC.´</span></p> - -<p><span style="margin-left: 1.5em;">Crosses indicate cover, and the chain</span><br> -<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">dotted lines routes by which men</span><br> -<span style="margin-left: 3.5em;">may advance.</span></p> - -<p>AA´ to BB´ is about 400<sup>X</sup></p> -</div> - -<p>The following are points to be attended -to:—Before leaving their cover, men must -decide where their next halting place is to -be, and make for it quickly, and with -decision. There must be no emerging into -the open, and then looking about for a bit -of cover to go for. The length of each -rush should not be enough to let the enemy -have time for deliberate aim—fifty yards or -so is quite the limit for this. If there is -no cover the men must lie down flat between -each rush. Occasionally it is -advisable to make a long rush from one -good position to another at sprinting -pace without stopping at all (I.T., 121 -(12)), so this should be practised sometimes, -the non-commissioned officers at that -part of the beat being ordered to tell the -men what is needed. Once a man has decided -on his next halting place, and is in -wind, he should leave his cover with a -jump. The slow uprising of a figure is -sure to draw the enemy’s attention, and -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</span>make his fire more accurate than it would -be if no intimation were given him. Similarly, -on reaching cover, men should fall -down quickly, and not lower themselves -slowly to earth.</p> - -<p>Insist on a careful choice of cover, a very -small depression or elevation, even six -inches, is enough to give cover from view, -and therefore helps in escaping aimed fire, -but in peace time men will not take trouble -over apparently trifling things like this unless -it is rubbed into them by close supervision. -Noticeable objects should be -avoided as the enemy may have taken their -range, and they help him to define a point -on which to concentrate fire. If a man -makes mistakes and shows indecision at -any part of the course, call him back to the -last cover he left, and let him start again -from there after pointing out what he has -done wrong.</p> - - -<h3><em>II. The advance combined with individual -fire.</em></h3> - -<p>The second part of the exercise is done -in the same way as the first, the men advancing -and taking cover as before, but -now using their rifles. They have to be -taught to use the cover to advantage, both -as a protection and as an aid to their shooting, -and to take pains in searching for a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</span> -good target, and in their sighting, aiming -and firing. For purposes of instruction, six -hundred yards is rather a short range to -open fire at, and I recommend your making -a start at eight hundred or so, i.e., two hundred -yards beyond BB´ towards the enemy, -working up to four hundred. This necessitates -judging distance at beyond the practically -point-blank ranges of the Lee-Enfield -rifle, and makes the men use their -eyes keenly to spot the enemy, while it -avoids a certain amount of unreality which -is apt to attach to instructional movements -carried on in front of a skeleton enemy at -the deadly short ranges under three hundred -yards.</p> - -<p>Points which should be considered -are:—</p> - -<p>To fire from the right and lower edge of -any cover, not over the top.</p> - -<p>Make the men keep a count of the number -of times they snap over the course (i.e., -cartridges used), and report to the non-commissioned -officer at the finish of their -course.</p> - -<p>Let the men do their own judging distance, -and let non-commissioned officers -drop at once on any man who either fails -to do so, or forgets, as they often do, to -adjust the backsight.</p> - -<p>Cultivate a habit among the men of looking -about for different targets, not firing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</span> -only straight in front of themselves, but on -their right and left, so that when they come -to fire collectively they may feel nothing -new in being told to open the enfilade fire -recommended by I.T., 116 (11), and also -get the custom of watching for the enemy -all along his front.</p> - -<p>These two exercises of advancing with -and without firing are the groundwork of -the fighting efficiency of the soldier in the -attack, and will be found to call for every -natural and acquired qualification the individual -possesses. Good shooting, quick -judgment, activity, wind, and everything -else are needed if the work is done with -full observance of the conditions which -would exist under fire. Put the men through -exercises of this sort several times, and, -if possible, on different ground, till they -acquire quickness in choosing cover and -the arts that make an expert fighter. Confidence -in themselves will come with the -skill they acquire, and with confidence -comes decision of mind, which is really -more important than bodily efficiency. If -you have time, a useful rider to this exercise -is to work the men by pairs, as is recommended -in the Musketry Regulations -for the observation of fire, and so introduce -them early to the use of the file organisation -which I have advised you to adopt.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_II">EXERCISE II.<br> -<span class="smcap">Retirement by Pairs.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>A sound provision against panic among -young troops is to accustom them to regard -a retirement as all in the day’s work, and -not as an exceptional undertaking which -their anxiety may invest with possibilities -of disaster. The essence of successful retirement -in face of an enemy lies in the -continuous opposition, or appearance of it, -offered to the enemy by one portion of the -troops, while others draw off to take post -to cover the withdrawal of the rearmost -portion. I.T., 137, gives the idea in -few words. It does not mention individual -training in this, but it is useful to put men -through the movements, both to cultivate -cohesion in the ranks, and as a tactical -exercise. It may happen in war that an -extended line has to give ground when -engaged with the enemy, and this under so -heavy a fire as to make movement except -over short distances impossible without -great loss. Such a withdrawal would mean -that the troops are in a very tight corner, -and would test them very highly, but that -is another matter. It may happen, and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</span> -should be prepared for. A withdrawal -under these conditions might perhaps be -carried out by the alternate movement of -men in files covered by the fire of the -others, until such a distance from the -enemy had been obtained as to allow sections -or companies to take up the -alteration. Up to that distance it will be -simply a reversal of what was done in -Exercise I., but worked by files—a front -rank man and his rear rank man, one -going back a short distance, and the other -firing to cover the movement. Again, men -on patrol or otherwise detached may have -to retire to avoid capture, or for many other -reasons, when they might not be under -close and heavy fire, but still would be -under the necessity of preventing the -enemy closing in on them or surrounding -them. In this case, the length of each -withdrawal would be much longer than in -the former case; one man would fire while -the other made off perhaps two or three -hundred yards at his best speed. Train -for both contingencies; it can be done in -one and the same parade. Skeleton enemy -as usual. For the withdrawal under -heavy fire, let the sections sit down and -fall out at BB´ (Diagram I.), and put out -the non-commissioned officers between BA -and B´ A´ as before. Call out the men by -files, tell them to work back to A and A´,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</span> -one firing, the other retiring. As a rule they -should retire past each other before halting. -The same points must be observed as in -Exercise No. <span class="allsmcap">I</span>, and the quicker they are -in movement the better, but they must be -taught to go in quick time also when so -ordered (I.T., 137 (4)).</p> - -<p>For the retirement of a file as on patrol, -do exactly the same, but you should work -over six hundred yards of ground or so to -correct any tendency to import the short -rush into this exercise, which would be out -of place, and also to let men have more -practice in looking for suitable fire positions -from which they can both fire on the -enemy, <em>and from which they can get away -when their turn comes</em>, a point they often -neglect at first. The different nature of -the two exercises must be made quite -clear.</p> - -<p>At this exercise you should bring before -your men the need of using all sorts of -<em>ruses</em> in a retirement, the use of rapid fire -just before withdrawing, the sham withdrawal -acted by ceasing fire, and retiring -a few yards, but only to halt and re-open -fire after a few seconds if the enemy has -been tempted to expose himself, thinking -the coast clear, the real withdrawal effected -so carefully that the enemy is not sure -whether you are there still or not, and so -on; and make them put their own ideas of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</span> -these plans into action and tell them if they -are doing what is feasible on service or -not. Bar all “manœuvre slimness,” i.e., -anything that could not be done on service.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_III">EXERCISE III.<br> -<span class="smcap">Individual Training in use of Fire -and Fire Discipline.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>Early lessons in fire discipline can be -given in single rank on the parade ground, -but the open country and extended order -are wanted for training men to the fullest -extent under service conditions. Only in -the open country can be got the variety -of targets, ranges and the visual training -which are necessary for a complete education. -Men must be taught, and taught -again, that the taking up of extended -order, and movement over all sorts of -ground, in no way mean that they are -to pass at once beyond the control of -their unit leaders, or that it is optional to -continue to take any sort of pains with -their shooting just because their non-commissioned -officers cannot stand over them, -but have to shout orders from a distance.</p> - -<p>This exercise consists in advancing -and retiring in extended order with fire -and the use of cover when halted; but to -allow for more prolonged shooting practice -and closer supervision than are possible -when carrying out an attack or retirement<span class="pagenum" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</span> -as on service, the halts are longer -and movements should at first be made -in quick time.</p> - -<p>Put out your skeleton enemy on a good -broad front, so as to allow room for -change of targets, and do not have them -all in one straight line, so that each target -shall call for a change of sighting. Let -the sections work independently of each -other under their section commanders, -who, with the other non-commissioned -officers, will have to act both as commanders -and instructors. Bring the -sections up to about twelve hundred yards -from the enemy; get them into a line with -intervals between them, i.e., spaces -measuring from the flank of one to the -flank of the other, sufficient to admit of -each section being extended to two or -three paces between men without its flank -men coming too close to those of other -sections, e.g., with two sections of eight -file, i.e., sixteen men each; you must -leave room for half of each to extend to -two paces towards the other, and keep a -fair interval; that is, from the centre of -each of the above sections of eight men -in each rank you want 8 ÷ 2 (half the -number in the front rank) × 2 (two ranks) -× 2 (two paces extension) = 16 paces for -the line extended and an interval of, say, -30 yards, which gives 46 yards between<span class="pagenum" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</span> -each section centre to centre. Now, let -the section commanders order the men to -extend, lie down, take cover and open -fire. The unit commander, the non-commissioned -officer in charge of the section, is -to name the target and distance and also -the rate of fire, rapid or slow, at all distances -over six hundred yards from the -enemy (I.T., 116 (5)), unless it is desired -on occasion to train men to do this for -themselves. After fire has been delivered, -direct section commanders to proceed -with the exercise, giving orders for advancing, -halting and firing, the advance -to be made from cover to cover as in -Exercise No. <span class="allsmcap">I</span>, but in quick time. Yourself -supervise in chief, and tell section -commanders when you want to give -orders as to the firing or movement, and -let them give the executive commands, -after which you and they should pass -along the lines and scrutinise each man’s -actions in carrying out the orders, questioning -them, and repealing hints you -may have given when telling them the -object and methods of the practice, if -they appear not to be giving them effect. -The value of the practice depends on the -orders you give as to the firing and the -following are suggested:—</p> - -<p>(<em>a</em>) Switching the fire of all the rifles -on to different parts of the enemy’s position,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</span> -sometimes straight in front, <em>but -quite as often</em> at his extreme flanks. This -is to introduce the use of enfilade fire -(I.T., 116 (11)) and the habit of giving support -by fire to other units (F.S.R., 105 (4)), -by concentrating the fire on to particular -targets.</p> - -<p>(<em>b</em>) Distributing the fire laterally along -the whole or a part of the enemy’s front -(I.T., 116 (10)). This may be done by -giving the section a particular extent of the -enemy’s front, e.g., “from the dry tree to -the gate in the hedge.” The section commander -then allots those of the enemy, -who can be viewed within his bit of front -to individual men, or preferably files of -men, who are to treat them as their especial -charge and keep on firing at them -till otherwise ordered, or till the enemy -shifts. Of course, if there is not enough -of the skeleton enemy to give each file in -the section a live antagonist (and there -won’t be on your parades), the commander -must indicate bits of cover -which individual men of the enemy might -be expected to use and tell his men to fire -at these spots. This is a most important -practice, and needs a good deal of attention -and application before the men get -really quick at it. It means, of course, -that on service you will make it your -business to allow as few of the enemy’s<span class="pagenum" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</span> -riflemen as possible to be free of the distraction -of having some bullets landing -about them, to upset their nerves and aim. -Unless some plan is adopted to do this -all along his line, it is all too probable -your men will be exposed to some accurate -fire from rifles held in steady hands, -and even one rifle so held has, to my -knowledge, caused a loss of eleven men -in as many minutes. This lateral distribution -is rather difficult, but it is easy, -compared with the concomitant task of -spotting where the men of the enemy are -hidden, if they really try to hide, at anything -but the shortest fighting ranges. -The only remedy for this is for each private -to carry field glasses of sorts; you -will not get them from Government, but -if any of your men are keen enough to -go in for spotting a hidden enemy for -themselves with glasses and would bring -their own to parade, forbid them not, but -encourage it. I have been told that in some -of the yeomanry corps in the South -African war nearly every trooper raised -somehow and somewhere a pair of glasses—some -were mother o’ pearl and silver-mounted, -but did the spotting all right -in spite of that.</p> - -<p>(<em>c</em>) Passing orders and changing targets. -Under heavy fire non-commissioned -officers will not be able to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</span> -move along the line, and orders must -be passed either by word of mouth -or by written messages passed from hand to -hand; the former is apt to be slow, and the -orders garbled en route unless practised -beforehand; the latter is not very practical -as men in action are too busy to read bits -of paper or trouble themselves to see that -they are passed on (I.T., 119 (4)). To -practise the verbal method while the men -are engaged in firing at any particular -target, give orders to one man in a low -tone (you would have to speak loud if ball -cartridge were being used) to fire at some -other target, and to pass the word. The -man then tells his neighbours on each side, -and yourself and a non-commissioned -officer then follow the order each way, and -when a man varies it admonish him to repeat -just what he got from the last speaker, -no more and no less. In a little time the -men will become exact in taking and passing -messages. This method should be confined -to directions about firing; orders for -movement should invariably be given by -commanders by word themselves or signal, -and men should not be allowed to repeat -these, as it may lead to grave mistakes on -service, as a signal may be seen and acted -on by someone for whom it was not intended.</p> - -<p>(<em>d</em>) Besides firing at the skeleton enemy<span class="pagenum" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</span> -or bits of cover, let fire be directed at -civilians who are moving about in the field -of view. Call on some individual man by -name to choose some such target, and tell -him he has to pass the word to the rest of -his squad what target he has chosen and -to fire at it. This gives practice in target -definition, i.e., describing its position so -that other men can know just where to look -for it. It is not easy in a landscape devoid -of noticeable objects to do this quickly, -but it is important, as the difficulty of locating -a well-concealed enemy with smokeless -powder requires that every pair of eyes in -the ranks should be engaged in the search -till all the positions of the enemy’s riflemen -are seen, and the information given to -everyone in the firing line. Until this is -done, the affair is one of trying to neutralise -aimed by unaimed fire, a pretty hopeless -task. Hence train your men to use -their eyes for seeing and their tongues for -description.</p> - -<p>(<em>e</em>) Accustoming the men to judge distance, -and use their backsights without -orders. Judging distance for the men as a -formal practice is confined to ranges under -800 yards, but it does no harm to let them -judge greater ranges. Let the unit commanders -define targets to be fired at, omitting -to state the range, and let the men<span class="pagenum" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</span> -judge it for themselves and fire. Walk up -the line and see that no man forgets to -adjust his backsight for the distance he -estimates. If possible, have the correct -ranges taken previously with a range -finder, and let the men know what they are -after they have aimed. Each change of -target gives the men a useful lesson in -judging distance.</p> - -<p>(<em>f</em>) Having put the men through all -sorts of paces in the way of firing while -advancing and retiring, in quick time do -the same thing again, but with the movements -in double time, and, in addition, -carry out the increases and decreases of the -extension, inclines and changes of direction -given in I.T., 93, throughout insisting -on the same steadiness in firing as -when in quick time. All this will at first -probably get the men “rattled,” and the -benefit of it is that after some of it they -will get over being “rattled,” and will not -let hurried orders or speed of movement -interfere with deliberation and steadiness -in shooting.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_IV">EXERCISE IV.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Assault.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>Exercise III. can suitably be wound up -by a practice in delivering an assault, as -this does not take long, and the moral -may be pointed that all fire training is -only a preparation for a successful -assault. The fixing of bayonets before -assault commonly leads to a complete -cessation of fire in the firing line. This -is quite wrong, as such complete cessation -of fire by the firing line must largely surrender -for the time being that superiority -of fire which facilitates the delivery -of the assault (I.T., 121 (7)), for it -gives the enemy a chance to take aim -again. Supporting fire by artillery or -infantry not in the firing line cannot be -relied on when the firing line has reached -assaulting distance. Therefore, do not -have a simultaneous fixing of bayonets, -but let one-half fix while the other fires, -and the best arrangement is evidently one -that ensures a fire being kept up along -the whole front and not in patches. The -system I have found most satisfactory is -to fix bayonets by ranks, the front rank<span class="pagenum" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</span> -fixing while the rear rank continues firing, -and then the rear rank fixing while the -front rank fires. It may be done by odd -and even files, or other ways, but, the -company being organised in files, the -same men are usually in the front and -rear rank, and there is no difficulty in -their remembering which they are. The -important thing is to adhere to one -system once it is adopted, and have it -well understood by all. It does not -matter much if a few men fix bayonets -out of turn, so long as the fire is merely -diminished and not stopped during the -time bayonets are being fixed. In the -charge, the men should work by their -files, i.e., the two men of each file should -act together and run at the same objective. -The meaning of this is that in actual -conflict two men would go together for -the same individual enemy, and between -the two of them they would be pretty sure -to bring him to an untimely end, if the -enemy really waited for the steel, and -with less chance of his doing damage than -if the combat took place man-to-man; -thereafter they could turn their attentions -to some other person.</p> - -<p>For the practice choose and indicate -any position for assault; work sections -up to about two hundred yards -from it, and then order rapid fire and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</span> -bayonets to be fixed. As soon as all -are ready, order the charge to be sounded. -(I.T., 124). When the men hear the -bugle they must at once jump from their -cover and go straight and hard at the -position; there must be no waiting by individuals -to fire a last shot or two. The -rush should be made suddenly and -swiftly, so that the enemy has no time to -see what is happening before the men are -well on their way at him. When the -position is reached, pass right through it -and well beyond it, to escape hostile gunfire -(I.T., 124 (5)), and then order the -“Halt,” when the men may lie down -under cover and open a pursuing fire. -Walk along the line and see, with the -help of non-commissioned officers, whether -men of each file are together; if so, it will -be proof that they have obeyed the directions -to keep together during the charge. -Allow a minute or two of the pursuing -fire, then let section or platoon commanders -sound their whistles, close and -reform their sections under cover. On -the whistle-sound (a succession of short -blasts), men rise and double to where -the commander is, resume their places, -and lie down. This re-organisation -is very important for you as company -commander, for by it you get your -men formed up quickly into platoons<span class="pagenum" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</span> -and ready to be closed into company or to -take fresh orders in the minimum of time. -The usual thing seen is that after the -assault the ground is covered with a mixture -of men of all companies staring -about, and apparently thinking the show -at an end, whereas on service this is the -very time you may expect either a counter-attack -by infantry or a burst of artillery -fire directed on the lost position.</p> - -<p>To repeat the orders of the assault: -“Rapid Fire; Fix Bayonets; Charge; -Halt and Take Cover; Commence Fire; -Rally and Close Under Cover,” and be -ready for further happenings.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_V">EXERCISE V.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Section and Platoon in the -Attack.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>Having trained the individual men in the -work needed of them, the next step is to -make use of that individual skill to the best -effect in combination under orders of a -commander. The section is the lowest unit -recognised for <em>training</em> (I.T., 107), and -it also is the normal unit used in firing -(I.T., 6 (4)). When the company is advancing -in the attack, or retiring, its sections -and platoons will often be widely -separated from each other, and the company -commander cannot look after each -one in detail, so that the platoon -commanders, and under them the section -commanders, must be fully competent -to lead their men without supervision, -in accordance with the general -intention given them before the company -opened out. So the training of men -in combination must be accompanied by -the training of your section and platoon -commanders.</p> - -<p>The duties of fire unit commanders are -laid down in I.T., 116 (5), and those of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</span> -section commanders in I.T., 116 and 123 -(10). Before you proceed with this -exercise have up these non-commissioned -officers and devote ten minutes to an exposition -of what is contained in the above -paragraphs. Dilate on them, and show -how neglect of those duties hampers the -company commanders. At the same time, -desire them to maintain among the men -during sectional exercises the standard of -individual training which was obtained in -the preliminary exercises. Unless they -do so the men will soon cease to apply what -they then learnt, and so forget it in battle -until the occurrence of casualties impresses -its value afresh in their minds. Also -give them the gist of what follows as to the -advance and description of fire phases.</p> - -<p>The exercise gives commanders the -opportunity of doing what they will -have to do when the company is attacking -or retiring, but without their having to keep -an eye on the movements of the other -platoons. The men should now be extended -at full intervals as on service, five or six -yards apart, this being held to be the most -that is needed. Put out the skeleton -enemy in groups, one group as objective -of attack for each section or platoon on -parade, and the groups sufficiently apart to -prevent them interfering with each other -when extended as above, for they are to act<span class="pagenum" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</span> -independently. Take up the advance as if -at fourteen hundred from the enemy, when -his rifle fire on open ground would compel -you to change from small columns of sections -or platoons into the line of extended -men (I.T., 118 (5)). The advance up to -assaulting distance, from fourteen hundred -yards, consists (I.T., 121 (7)), in the first -place, of an advance to fire positions. Now -Musketry Regulations lay down that fire -by less than two platoons is of little effect -over one thousand yards, so do not -encourage commanders to open fire till -one thousand yards at least, and use the -space fourteen hundred to one thousand -yards for instruction in getting their -sections or platoons forward as quickly, -and with as little exposure, as possible. -Secondly, the advance consists -of a fire fight combined with further -advances up to the assaulting position. In -this fire fight controlled collective fire is -better than individual fire (I.T., 116 (7) -(iii)), so up to six hundred yards let firing -take place, only on the specific orders of -commanders, who accordingly are to name -the targets and ranges. In this phase -therefore make them choose forward fire -positions and work their units forward, -using controlled collective fire at the same -time.</p> - -<p>Under six hundred yards it is apparently<span class="pagenum" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</span> -held best to accept the inevitable and allow -individual fire, the unit commanders being -still responsible for getting their men forward -up to the position of assault—about -two hundred yards from the enemy. Still -at this close range unit commanders should -do what they can to direct the fire, and -especially they should see that men fire -slowly and carefully. In general the rate -of firing or snapping is far too fast, and -pouches would be empty long before the -assaulting position would be reached.</p> - -<p>Owing to the great importance of training -the sections, it is advisable to let them -do this exercise, through both the phases -below, separately from each other, and not -in platoon. When they know all about it, -let them work in platoon.</p> - -<p>Having drawn up your sections in line -at fourteen hundred yards, order the section -commanders to extend and move on, -and signal the skeleton enemy to open fire.</p> - - -<h3><em>First Phase: Fourteen to One Thousand -Yards, Gaining Ground Without Firing.</em></h3> - -<p>Practise the section commanders in all -ways of getting their sections forward -without undue exposure or delay, by -rushes of the whole section, man-by-man -from one and both flanks and -by files, together, and any other way<span class="pagenum" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</span> -that suggests itself. Stand over the -section commanders in turn and tell -them to advance the section by one -method and then by another, and ask them -which seems most suitable for various conditions -of fire and ground (I.T., 118 -(4)). The advance should be steady -and determined. Before starting the -advance from one position to another, -section commanders are to decide and -<em>must tell the men</em> to what point they mean -the next advance to be made (I.T., 108 -(2)), in the same way as individual men -were taught to mark their next halting -places.</p> - -<p>Attention must be paid to the way in -which advances are inaugurated. Rushes -must be sudden and simultaneous -(I.T., 92 (5)). The men have been -trained to leave their cover quickly. -The unit commander must give his -directions for the next move without -getting up (if himself lying) and -tell the men to be prepared; when -all are ready, he and the men must -jump up together and rush at once on the -word or signal. The object of this, of -course, is to avoid a concentrated fire being -directed on the unit commander, and, -perhaps, the two or three men nearest him, -if they get up before the others, which -would make it likely that some of them<span class="pagenum" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</span> -would be hit immediately, while the rest -of the unit looked for a new leader, and so -no advance take place; whereas if everyone -gets on the move together a casualty -or two will not bring the whole to a standstill. -Of course, commanders should lead -the way, but they must get in front by -sprinting the first few yards.</p> - - -<h3><em>Second Phase: One thousand to Six Hundred -Yards (Collective Fire) and Six -Hundred to Two Hundred Yards (Individual -Fire).</em></h3> - -<p>As soon as a section begins to fire, it -becomes possible for it to practise the -lessons in the use of fire which were learnt -in Exercise III., such as concentration and -distribution of fire. From one position the -commander must choose his next fire position, -and work his section up to it in whatever -way is most suitable. On flat and -open ground this position may simply -be the halting place of the next rush, -thirty or forty paces to the front, but -it is more instructive and practical to -have positions far enough from each other, -say one hundred and fifty or two hundred -yards, to necessitate the advancing section -making several successive rushes and using -various devices to gain ground without -attracting the enemy’s attention. Practise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</span> -sections in all ways of advancing from one -position to another, as was done before -firing began, and encourage the use of -covered ways. This exercise, if properly -done, represents what the section -would have to do in battle. For the purpose -of instruction, the unit commanders -should be allowed to move about as instructors, -but when all ranks have been -through the exercise and know what is -needed, you should practise it under service -conditions, and tell unit commanders -to behave as if under fire; this is important, -as it lets all see how much will be -asked of the individual man under fire, -and how difficult it is to exercise any wide -control.</p> - -<p>For the same reason you must in this -exercise begin the practice of ordering -casualties of leaders, and carry it on -through the whole of the rest of the training. -Order section commanders to -be casualties, and let the next senior -man carry on, then order that man -to become a casualty, and let the next one -take command. Collect these casualties -with you and let them go round with you, -and have for a time the onlooker’s view -of the game. Do not stint in ordering -them, but let every man be ready to take -up command. This readiness to assume -command and to carry on the advance in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</span> -spite of the absence of leaders is most valuable -in battle and on parade for training, -keeps men’s attention fixed on the business, -and helps to counteract disorder when -companies and sections get mixed up in -reinforcement in battalion attack.</p> - -<p>Under six hundred yards let the men -use individual fire, choosing their own -targets; at this time try to get them into -the way of looking for the targets which -most require to be shot at at the moment—they -must be always looking along the -enemy’s line, and must not acquire the -paralysing habit of only seeing straight in -front of themselves.</p> - -<p>Call on unit commanders to keep in -view the question of expenditure of ammunition. -It is no good ordering men to -snap-fire 200 times in the course of an -advance when they would only have 100 -rounds in their pouches on service, and no -means of getting more; when blank is -being used they should see that the ammunition -of casualties is collected and -redistributed.</p> - -<p>At some time in the course of this exercise -the section must be practised in improving -cover as if under fire, i.e., working -lying down. The nature of the work -depends on what tools you have, but it -should be attempted if possible. Order -the section to do it when halted together<span class="pagenum" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</span> -in some fire position. At first they will -shape badly and expose themselves a lot, -but if you have time for practice they get -into the way of digging in very quickly. -If there are stones pile up “schanzes.” -Attention should be paid to concealment -of the cover, so as not to make it a target -for the whole countryside, and it must give -cover from fire or view, or both; one often -sees men making molehills which show up -their position without being capable of -stopping a bullet. Better not make them -at all than that way.</p> - -<p>Wind up the advance occasionally by an -assault, as it is a mistake to let the idea -take hold that the fire fight is the end of -all things. This, I think, is the reason -that the word “skirmishing” has disappeared -from the book of training, as it -connoted an indecisive action, whereas the -whole spirit of the present training is that -it shall be directed to the delivery of an -assault and the ousting of the enemy from -his position. Scouts are the only people -who may have to skirmish in the former -accepted meaning of the word, and they -only do so until the firing line joins them, -or they withdraw after reconnoitring.</p> - - -<h3><em>In Platoon.</em></h3> - -<p>Next work the sections together in -their platoons on similar lines. Practise<span class="pagenum" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</span> -again all ways of gaining ground; by -rushes of the whole platoon, or if one or -more sections, man by man, and so on, as -taught to the section. Fire should be -directed by the platoon commander, and -controlled by the section commander. -Teach the lateral distribution of fire along -a given front among the four sections of -the platoon. Teach also the principle of -covering fire, one section being sent to -make its way with every use of cover to a -forward fire position, while the remainder -continue firing. The first section, on -arrival at the new fire position, opens fire, -and the others follow in due course, one -section only being dumb while the movement -is in progress. If there is a choice of -good lines of advance it is better that -sections should not follow each other on -one line, as the enemy may have noticed -the move and be waiting for them.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_VI">EXERCISE VI.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Section and Platoon in -Retirement.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>For the general principles of retirements -see I.T., 137. The platoon, when working -with the company, will take its turn at -being the rearmost portion of the troops, -and will have the difficult task of getting -away while in touch with the enemy, but -its retirement will be covered by the fire -of other portions of the company. On -the other hand, if a platoon or section finds -itself beyond support from other troops, as -might happen often enough, it will have -to act itself as a rearguard and retire by -alternate parts.</p> - -<p>In both cases great advantage is gained -if the position held can be vacated so -stealthily that the enemy shall not be -aware of its having been vacated till the -defenders are well on their way to the rear. -For this reason it will be worth while to -accustom the men to employ, when practicable, -a procedure used in mountain -warfare, withdrawing the bulk of men -first and leaving only a few quick-footed -men to keep up appearances and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</span> -fire as long as possible and then retiring -them at speed. Also all men must be -taught to grovel backwards on their -stomachs from the crest of their fire position -till sufficiently under cover, if there is -cover, to stand up without being seen, after -which they rise and make off.</p> - -<p>Send out the skeleton enemy with instructions -to follow up the retirement -slowly, and not to close in on the sections, -as it is easy and tempting to do this when -there are no bullets in the rifles.</p> - -<h3>(<em>a</em>) <em>As a Section or Platoon Acting with the -Company.</em></h3> - -<p>Do the practice first by sections and then -in platoon. Draw up the unit on a fire position -about eight hundred yards from the -enemy, the men in extended order, lying -down, and open fire on the enemy. Tell -the commander to choose his next halting -place and retire his unit on it, -which he should do on the lines before -indicated. The halting places should be -chosen as far apart as two to four hundred -yards; short retirements merely prolong -the time exposure to fire and should not be -used unless the enemy are very close or the -fire very heavy. Once the men are clear -of the position, they should move as fast -as they can, trusting to escape casualties,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</span> -by speed, the alteration of range, and the -fire of the few men left on the position. -As a rule, carry out all retirements at the -double, so that the men shall not be confused -by the hasty movement. As soon -as the first party has reached the new -position, the fringe of men left on the -old one should creep back and go as -hard as they can to rejoin their -section or platoon, and they should be -taught to judge the time of going for -themselves, so as not to “let in” the section -or themselves, by going too early or -staying too late. Repeat the movement to -one or two further positions. It is a -strenuous practice and makes demands on -the men’s limbs, wind, and willingness, -but the rearguard is the post of honour -and danger. Order casualties of leaders -from time to time, and let the men be -called to move in quick time sometimes, -which they would have to do if there were -signs of unsteadiness.</p> - -<h3>(<em>b</em>) <em>As a Section or Platoon Acting Alone.</em></h3> - -<p>Act on the same lines as before, but let -the commander run the show, which he -should be able to do, after having done it -under supervision. One party (a file or two -in the case of a section, or one or -two sections in that of a platoon) gets<span class="pagenum" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</span> -back to a fire position and opens fire to -cover the retirement of the other. In -general, it is better that both parties -should not fall back on one and the same -fire position; on the contrary, if they act -on a wide front in ordinary country—say, -three hundred yards apart—their fire is -equally effective, but the enemy is broken -up, and the danger of their being outflanked -or surrounded is less. For the -same reason it is good practice, if the platoon -is strong, to send out groups of four -or five men still further on the flanks, and -a group to precede the whole on the line -of retirement by six hundred yards or so, -in order to occupy positions and deny them -to the enemy, and after one or two turns -of this exercise tell the skeleton enemy to -follow on harder and try to work round -the flanks. In this part also continue to -order casualties of leaders.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_VII">EXERCISE VII.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Section and Platoon in -Independent Attack.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>It is very important to secure the intelligent -co-operation of section and platoon -commanders in the operations in which -their company or battalion is taking part. -I have read that in the Russo-Japanese -War the result of one of the battles—I -think at Penlin, 31st July—turned on -the action of an infantry section who -gained a footing on the extreme flank of -the Russian line, and drove off the defenders -in the immediate vicinity, opened -a way for the advance of the greater -numbers, and led to the outflanking and -retreat of the whole Russian force. If you -give your unit commanders some chances of -carrying out attacks, acting as if unsupported -by other troops, they will find -themselves faced with the same problems -which confront commanders of larger -bodies in the attack, and they will be -more likely, when acting in combination, -to look beyond just the limits of their own -commands; they will be led to comprehend -the object of operations and the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</span> -difficulties in the way, and will become -quick to seize any opportunity to further -the general plan without waiting for -orders. It is true that so small a body as a -section would seldom be formally told to -attack an objective single-handed, but there -are often occasions on service when a -platoon might have to carry out an attack -on a small scale, as when a few of the -enemy’s riflemen are making themselves -unpleasant, while not in sufficient force to -do more than “snipe,” or to require the -diversion against them of a whole company. -Though a section as now constituted is a -very small unit to work with, I think no -excuse is needed for performing the attack -with the smallest unit, having in view the -excellent training it forms for non-commissioned -officers and men. However, for -this practice, it is advisable to form sections -somewhat above the usual strength, by -joining two together, so as to give at least -eighteen rifles in the whole. After having -put the sections through the exercise, you -will, of course, let the platoon commanders -carry out the attack with their platoons.</p> - -<p>Put out a skeleton enemy of three or -four men for each platoon or section, or -one only for all to attack in turn, and -post this enemy in some commanding -place, with a good field of view and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</span> -fire so that if possible the unit shall -have twelve to eight hundred yards to -manœuvre over before coming to close -quarters. As an example, give out the -supposition that this enemy are a cavalry -patrol of the enemy, who have dismounted -and are using their rifles on the -company as it is on the move from somewhere -to somewhere else. The section or -platoon is ordered to drive them off, neutralise -their fire, or hold them in check, in case -they should be the forerunners of a greater -number. The enemy should begin to fire -on a signal from you (with your flag), -which you should give as you tell off -the commander for the duty. If the -other units are to attack the same -enemy in turn, you should halt them -under cover or turn them to the rear, so -as not to see too much of the method the -first lot choose to carry out their job.</p> - -<p>The method of the attack will depend -on the nature of the ground—what suits -one case may not suit another, and there -may be two or three courses open in -attacking any one position. The commander -should accordingly look well -at the ground before deciding how he will -carry out the attack, but there are certain -principles common to attacks, great or -small, which he should put into practice.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</span> -He should secure himself from interruption -on his flanks and rear, and he should -provide a supporting fire to distract the -enemy and cover the advance of his main -force. He cannot make large detachments -or indulge in wide patrolling, nor -would such small bodies as platoons be sent -off to attack if such were advisable; but, -at least he can post a file or two -on some high ground, or, failing that, -on one flank out of decisive range of the -enemy, i.e., about eight hundred yards -from him, with orders to keep up a steady -fire until his advance masks their fire. -This will prevent, or at least give warning -of, an attempt to cut in on the rear. -He may also send a file perhaps two or -three hundred yards to either flank, to -move parallel with his advance and prevent -his being enfiladed at short range, -if the enemy should be tactless enough -to avail himself of a chance of meeting -the advance by a counter-attack. Until -he sees pretty well what he has in front -of him, he should divide his party -into two, sending one to engage the -enemy and keeping the other as a -reserve to support the first by fire if they -get into difficulties, and to be available -to carry on the attack after the other has -got the enemy well busy, either by reinforcing -it directly, or, better still, by<span class="pagenum" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</span> -continuing the advance along a fresh line -leading to some position from which the -enemy can be finally turned out, either -by fire or by a charge, the first half -joining in and advancing as soon as the -enemy has turned his attention to the -new attack. Both parties should keep -scouts or a patrol of some sort out in front -of them until the foreground is proved -not to contain any hidden body of the -enemy, or until the opening of fire by -their own side makes it necessary for the -scouts to merge into the firing line. I -have seen on service a half-company go -off to take post as a piquet on a long -ridge; it neglected the above precautions, -beyond having some scouts in front. -There were four or five of the enemy on -the ridge, and they waited till the scouts -were close, shot some down and drove -the others to cover, and then turned their -fire on to the half-company, who were -also driven to ground, and, as there was -little cover, they were tied up till set free -by some more infantry, who had to be -specially sent off to move along the ridge. -Had the half-company moved in two -portions, the first would have contained -this weak enemy, and the rear party -could easily have circled round and got -on to the ridge farther along, which would -at once have caused the enemy to clear<span class="pagenum" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</span> -out. See F.S.R., I., <span class="allsmcap">I</span>, as to the results -of the violation of the principles of leading -troops, and as therein directed, impress -the principles taught on the minds -of your non-commissioned officers, who -are commanders, albeit only of platoons -and sections.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_VIII">EXERCISE VIII.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Platoon as an Advanced Guard -and as a Flank Guard.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>(<em>a</em>) When the company is on the march, -it should always be preceded by an advanced -guard—either a party of scouts, -or, more usually, by one of the platoons. -After the advanced guard comes in contact -with the enemy its further action -becomes either an attack to drive off the -enemy, or a defence to delay his advancing, -according to his strength and -tactics; so I propose here merely to indicate -suitable formations of march in -ordinary, i.e., non-mountainous country, -so that the platoons may be practised in -taking them up without delay on being -told off for the duty. The exercise takes -little time, and can be done on the same -parade as the flank guard exercise.</p> - -<p>An advanced guard may come under -Are at any moment, and to provide -against surprise (F.S.R., 64), its leading -portions may move in extended order. -The duties are given in F.S.R., 68, and -apply quite completely to so small a body -as a platoon. The platoon should be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</span> -divided into a vanguard and a main guard. -For the vanguard, a common plan is -simply to extend a section on either side of -the road, but I prefer to divide the section -into three patrols, or more if strength permits, -who work along in a general line—one -to search the road and its immediate -vicinity, and one on each side. The -nature of the country regulates the -breadth of ground the centre patrol can -search from the road, and the distance to -which the others are sent out on each side. -The other sections follow as main guard, -not so close as to be at once mixed up -with the vanguard if fire is opened on the -latter, nor so far as to be unable to support -it quickly with fire. The advanced -guard is responsible for keeping touch -with the main body (the company) -(F.S.R., 64 (4)), but the company commander -should satisfy himself that this -is being done. If view is restricted, the -main guard must drop a connecting -file to keep connection. This file must -march with their beards on their shoulders, -to see what the company is doing, and -let the commander know, and also -to signal to the company, if the platoon -has had to halt. If the country is open, -the commander should still tell off -a file for this duty, who will march with -the platoon, but be continually on the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</span> -look-out to the rear. The platoon -commander ought, of course, to keep a -watch himself, but may have other things -to attend to, and it is well to take precautions -against the platoon either getting -too far in front or letting the company -get too close to it, by marching on while -the platoon is investigating some suspicious -locality.</p> - - -<h3>(<em>b</em>) <em>The Platoon as a Flank Guard.</em></h3> - -<p>A platoon may sometimes be used as a -flank guard, as when a small convoy is -on the march with only a company or two -as escort. Flank guards are dismissed in -a few words in F.S.R., 70. It is worth -while to practise them once or twice to -avoid delay in taking up the formation -when the march is being started, or in improvising -a method of fighting off the -enemy if he attacks.</p> - -<p>Represent the convoy or whatever it is -by a man with a red flag to move along -the road; the platoon is then to move along -parallel to the road, and far enough off -to afford protection from effective rifle -fire, i.e., at least eight hundred yards in -open country. The skeleton enemy should -be instructed to keep about the same distance -again on the flank beyond the -platoon, and to move along parallel with it<span class="pagenum" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</span> -without closing in, opening fire on an -agreed signal.</p> - -<p>The march formation should be on the -same principles as those for the advanced -guard. The platoon should move in two -bodies, and patrols or scouts should precede -it, both in the direction of the march -and towards the flank which is being -guarded. It is important to keep touch -with the main body by connecting files at -all times, otherwise if the road changes -direction out of view of the flank guard -it may separate them too far or bring -them too close to the company.</p> - -<p>The method of fighting merely to hold -off the enemy resembles that used by a -rear guard for the same purpose, i.e., fire -and movement by alternate portions. -When the enemy opens fire on your signal, -the patrol on the flank either falls back, -or the platoon reinforces it. The patrol -in the line of advance should still continue -to precede the movements of the -platoon in that direction, and should be -told to conform to its movement. The -platoon replies to the enemy’s fire as soon -as possible and begins the lateral fight—one -half is sent, if possible under cover, -to take up a fire position farther along the -direction of the line of march, preceded -by the patrol, which, to some extent, -secures it from surprise from that direction.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</span> -As soon as the leading party has -found a fire position and opens its fire, -the other follows it, and either halts -alongside it, so allowing it to go off to a -new position, or continues its movement -beyond it and takes up a third position to -cover the further movements. The latter -method is the quicker, as it saves the time -of replacing men of the first party in -their fire position by those of the second. -The exercise need not be prolonged, as a -few of these lateral movements are quite -sufficient illustration to enable the men in -future to take up their duty quickly.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_IX">EXERCISE IX.<br> -<span class="smcap">Preliminary for the Attack by the -Company in Battalion.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>A company attacking as part of the -battalion is sure to find the men of different -platoons mixed up in the course of the -attack with those of other platoons, both of -that company and of others. Before -practising the attack, accompanied with -this mixture of platoons, it is advisable -to train them and their non-commissioned -officers for their duties without -allowing any mixing up. This may be -done by bringing all the platoons of the -company up into one line, and then -extending each on its own ground. The -result is that each platoon may be taken -to represent the leading platoon of four -companies told off to furnish the firing -line and supports (I.T., 122). The four -platoons form thus the firing line, the -other three supposititious platoons of each -company being in support. This formation -would be taken up when the enemy’s -rifle fire began to be effective, i.e., at or -under fourteen hundred yards. Within -this distance the firing line has to press<span class="pagenum" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</span> -on through the zones in which it uses collective -and individual fire up to assaulting -distance, being reinforced as needed, -firstly by the supports, and finally at the -time of the assault by all or part of the -local reserve, which, in this case, would -be composed of the four companies of the -battalion not detailed to furnish the firing -line and supports.</p> - -<p>Put out a skeleton enemy with orders to -remain in one position, and fire slowly, -but continuously. Draw up the four -platoons, or as many as are present of the -company at fourteen hundred yards or -so from the enemy, in one line and at -sufficient intervals to allow of their extending -to five paces, <em>plus</em> some space -between flanks of sections after extension, -to allow plenty of choice of lines of advance. -Indicate to each platoon a part of -the enemy’s position which it is to regard -as its final objective of assault (I.T., -121 (3)). Have the men extended to five -paces, and carry out the attack right -through on the lines of Exercise V., and -finish with an assault and rally after it. -Each company would have an officer with -its platoon in the firing line to direct the fire. -If fire is opened between fourteen hundred -and one thousand yards, it will not -be effective against ordinary targets unless -the whole four platoons direct their fire<span class="pagenum" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</span> -on the same target. Under one thousand -yards fire should be controlled by section -commanders and directed by platoon commanders.</p> - -<p>Practise concentration of the fire of the -four platoons on one part of the enemy’s -line and lateral distribution of fire <em>within -the limits of that part</em>. Give each platoon -a fraction of this fraction of the enemy’s -frontage to deal with, and let the platoon -commander again tell off his sections to fire -at various marks inside <em>his</em> limits. Again -switch the fire of all four platoons on to -some other particular bit of the enemy’s -position, as done in previous exercises.</p> - -<p>To do this you must introduce and work -with thoroughness a system of inter-communication -(I.T., 119), but it should be -one approved and adopted by your -battalion commander, otherwise each company -of the battalion may be found using -a different one. It is to be understood -that orders as to the direction of fire in -no way interfere with the gaining of -ground to the front, a platoon firing at -one object ceases fire in order to advance, -but resumes its fire on the same object -when it again halts.</p> - -<p>As soon as section fire is opened, -encourage mutual support, some part of the -line firing while others advance, and make<span class="pagenum" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</span> -section commanders continue to observe -this principle.</p> - -<p>At some one parade for this exercise -halt the whole line during the attack and -practise entrenching under fire, the men -working lying down (I.T., 121 (13)). -Thereafter resume the advance.</p> - -<p>Move about yourself and let your section -commanders do so also, and check -any slovenly work on the part of the men -in using, quitting, or getting into cover, -and in the use of their rifles and judging -distance if, as should often be done, it -is left to them to estimate how far they -are from the target of the moment.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_X">EXERCISE X.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Company in Attack with the -Battalion under Artillery Fire.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>When the battalion is moving forward -to attack, and before the enemy’s rifle fire -is more than a distant and future danger, -that of his artillery becomes an imminent -and formidable menace as soon as the -limits of its range are crossed, because of -the suddenness with which it is capable -of dealing destruction. Whether his -artillery actually opens on the battalion -is another matter. If the battalion shows -up as a tempting target in column of route -or mass, he most certainly will fire -on it, but if it is skilfully led it may -possibly escape his notice altogether; at -the same time, it is hardly likely that it -can move from five thousand to fourteen -hundred yards from the enemy’s infantry -without giving some indications of its -movement, and the probability is, that at -some part of the advance it will find -itself the recipient of the enemy’s attention. -To escape the effect of this fire, -the battalion and the company will have -to break up into small shallow columns<span class="pagenum" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</span> -such as platoons or sections at least 50 -yards from each other laterally (I.T., -118) and two hundred yards from -front to rear; in fact, a lot of little -groups of men sufficiently apart to -prevent the burst of one shell covering -more than one group. The advance -in this order constitutes the first phase of -the infantry attack. The company must -be practised in getting into this formation, -and moving in it so as to avoid confusion -in action, and also to let non-commissioned -officers and men understand -that this formation does not free them -from the control of their commander.</p> - -<p>At manœuvres and exercises the adoption -of this formation is sometimes -burked on various pretexts, of which the -most heinous is to say that the results of -artillery fire are overrated, and the risk -run in keeping in closed formation is more -than compensated for by the comfort of -the men, maintenance of control and -saving of time. This theory I fancy had -its origin in the South African War, -where the Boer artillery was skilful but -exiguous, if judged by European standards. -I have not been under shell fire -myself, but I have seen the results of it -on a column of about two hundred men -who came along a watercourse two -thousand yards or so from the guns, in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</span> -something resembling a march formation. -The guns had the range, and the enemy -left about fifty dead in that watercourse -in a few minutes, so personally I am -going to open out my company and trust -to my peace training of it to keep it in -hand and get it along fast enough to be -on the spot when wanted.</p> - -<p>I need hardly give details how to practise -this. The point is, to get the -company opened out quickly and without -confusion, and this is to be done by telling -your platoon commanders what you -want and where they are to go, and not -by any drill. Platoons may further split -up into columns of sections. Leave it to -your platoon commanders to have the sections -moved apart to intervals of fifty yards. -If the enemy’s artillery is straight in front, -a diamond formation seems suitable—a -platoon at each angle—the length of the -diagonal front to rear being over two hundred -yards and side to side over one hundred; -or the platoons may simply follow -each other at two hundred yards distance, -though this is not a very handy arrangement. -But, subject to keeping the distances -large enough, it is not the formation -that matters, but the way it is taken up, -and I will leave it at that.</p> - -<p>At the end of this phase of endurance -of the enemy’s artillery fire the company<span class="pagenum" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</span> -comes under rifle fire and has to take to -extended order, and on service it would -perhaps have to do this and plunge into -the attack without the platoons closing in -from the scattered formation in which -they have so far moved. But for the -first few times you should close up at -fourteen hundred yards and start from -there, so as to tell the men what is next -to be done when they come under rifle -fire, and in any case the size of your exercise -ground would probably necessitate -your doing the two phases over more or -less the same bit of ground.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XI">EXERCISE XI.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Company in Attack with the -Battalion, under Rifle Fire.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>The immediate objects of the fire fight -within effective rifle range are to produce -a fire sufficiently heavy to overcome -the fire of the defence, and to reach -a position from which the assault can be -delivered (I.T., 121 (5 and 6)). In theory, -then, the desideratum is to get so many -men up to about two hundred yards from -the enemy that they form a line practically -shoulder to shoulder, in order that -their fire may be at least as heavy as that -of the enemy, if the latter are also in one -continuous line, and in default of circumstances -admitting of effective covering -fire being maintained from positions in -rear or on a flank. On this supposition it -is frequently argued that a battalion and -its companies, when advancing to the -attack, should do so on a front not -greater than that which the battalion -would occupy if it were in single rank, but -this does not really follow. The nature -of the ground may be such that to attempt<span class="pagenum" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</span> -to build up a shoulder-to-shoulder firing -line all along the enemy’s position within -charging distance, may be merely to send -men to useless destruction by exposing -them on fire-swept spaces, where they are -sure to be knocked over before they can do -any good. On the other hand, there may -be other points where men may be massed -so as to give not only a firing line of -maximum density, but also a supporting -force both to replace casualties and to -carry out the assault. These are the points -which it is of importance to gain and -hold in strength sufficient to carry out the -object of the attack—the assault. It is -the duty of the battalion commander to -give each of his firing line companies -some such point as their objective, and to -define the frontage and direction of -their attack. It is similarly the duty -of the commander of a firing line -company to give each of his sections -an objective within the limits assigned to -his company (I.T., 122 (4) and 123 (3-)). -The problem for solution is, how to get to -those points, and so it does not appear to -matter much what frontage the battalion -and its companies occupy when they start -off for the attack at the fourteen hundred -yards limit of effective rifle fire, provided -of course, they do not encroach on the -frontage of other units. Indeed, an attack<span class="pagenum" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</span> -which starts on a wide base and concentrates -only in its later stages seems -much more likely than one which starts -from base equal to a single rank frontage -to keep the enemy uncertain of its -objective, and to be able to bring oblique -or enfilade fire to bear on portions of his -line. Therefore, when practising the company -in attack, do not be bound by cast -iron rules as to the breadth of the zone of -ground within which you are to bring -your company from fourteen hundred -yards up to the charging position. Four -platoons following one straight behind the -other, at two hundred yards distance, -make a very unwieldy procession, and, in -general, I would advise you to use something -in the nature of a diamond formation -at first, the three platoons in rear -making their own way forward till they -reinforce the leading portion which finally -consists of the whole company.</p> - -<p>Put out the skeleton enemy on a front -of, roughly, what your company will -occupy in single rank, and let the position, -if possible, have within it two, or at -most, three points, which you can assign -as objectives to the platoon commanders. -You must consider this position as having -been assigned to you as objective by your -battalion commander, the ground on the -right and left of it being the prey of other<span class="pagenum" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</span> -companies, and not the object of your -assault, though it should, nevertheless, -frequently be the object of your <em>fire</em> -during the advance.</p> - -<p>Draw up the company at about fourteen -hundred yards from the enemy. Tell -the platoon commanders the relative positions -the platoons are to take up when the -advance begins, roughly the distances -between them (I.T., 123 (7)), the direction -of the attack, if the enemy’s position is not -quite clearly to be seen, the frontage on -which the company is free to manœuvre, -and the points which the sections are to -regard as their objectives; the details -contained in I.T., 123 and 124, may -also be enumerated if the commanders -are not experienced. As regards these -details, I recommend that scouts be -formed not in a line of men extended -at wide intervals, but as a line -of patrols of four or six men each, and -you or a subaltern should halt them early -in the attack and tell them to send back -word that they are held up by fire, or -that they have defined the enemy’s position; -on this the nearest platoon reinforces -them, and the process of building up the -firing line begins from that point. As -regards inter-communication, use connecting -files and semaphore signalling to join -up the various parts and make real use of -them, but avoid sham messages.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</span></p> - -<p>As soon as the object and manner of -the attack have been detailed to all, tell -the platoon commanders to move off their -platoons to their positions and extend them -ready to advance, and the scouts to get -off in front. Five paces is the least extension -to ensure that a bullet aimed at -one man may miss him with a fair chance -of not hitting his neighbour. Do not let -the scouts go too far away, because at -this time of getting to grips with the -enemy, their usefulness, when acting with -their companies is mainly limited to -guarding against ambush at close range, -and as ground scouts to prevent the company -coming against some unseen obstacle, -barbed wire, donga, canal, or what not.</p> - -<p>As soon as all are in position, the company -may be considered as being in the -formation in which it would have arrived -at the point where, in addition to the -enemy’s artillery fire, it comes under -heavy and fairly accurate rifle fire. Give -the signal to advance, and let the platoon -commanders begin to work their platoons -forward, using what covered ways they -can find. After a little of this, have the -scouts halted and reinforce them by one -platoon, order fire to be opened, bearing -in mind that one platoon’s fire is probably -useless at over one thousand yards from -the enemy, but if your company is in the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</span> -diamond formation the platoons on each -flank will probably be able to fire, and -with favourable ground, e.g., a knoll, or -bluff somewhere on the line of advance, -the rear platoon also will be able to fire -over the heads of the firing line. There -is no danger in this if the men hold their -rifles straight, and it would assuredly -be done in war. I have myself seen it, -and the chances of an accident are minimised -by practice in peace. During this -early opening of fire use every effort to -keep the fire from being merely a make-believe, -i.e., send word round by your -connecting files or semaphore to fire at -certain targets, and see that section commanders -direct their fire accordingly. -In battle the information as to which part -of the enemy’s position seemed most to -demand attention would, of course, reach -you from those of your side who were -suffering fire coming from that part of the -position, and the result of your passing -the word to fire at it as above would be -that a shower of bullets would come dropping -all round it, to the upsetting of the -aim of the hostile marksmen. Under -cover of this fire your firing line may be -allowed to gain a little ground, platoons -moving alternately so as to avoid a cessation -of fire. Thereafter continue to gain -ground, and gradually reinforce the firing<span class="pagenum" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</span> -line till all your supports are absorbed -and the whole company is in the firing -line. When this has taken place the line -will consist of a mixture of men of -different sections and platoons. Avoid -unreal movements in attempting to keep -the men of each unit together in reinforcing -and recognise that admixture is -unavoidable. (I.T., 93 (11) and 123 -(9)). The organising of the resultant -disorder is one of the essential -objects of training for the attack. Make -your section commanders call on the -men to right and left of them, if -they are nearer them than any other unit -commander, to act under their orders. -Thus: “Private A to Private J under my -orders.” Have this done constantly till -it becomes a matter of course. The men -of files can always hang together, but -prove that this is being done by asking -men where their file mates are. Get this -system started as soon as reinforcement is -begun, and keep it in full swing throughout. -Once it is started, these extemporized -fire units must apply the principles -learnt by the intact sections and squads in -Exercise IX., i.e., supporting fire by part -to cover movement of the others, control -and distribution of fire, etc., and so work -on up to assaulting distance and deliver -an assault. After this, let section and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</span> -platoon commanders reform their men -and units as quickly as possible, and -then reform the company under your -own orders. At subsequent parades -introduce casualties among the section and -platoon commanders, and let the senior -privates in each of the mixed up fire units -step into their places and carry on the -attack without halt or confusion.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XII">EXERCISE XII.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Company in Attack Acting -Alone.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>On service a company may often have -to attack some post of the enemy without -having the support of either artillery or -infantry, and exercises framed to illustrate -these conditions are very useful in -developing the initiative of all ranks. In -paragraph V. of the preamble I gave an -example, and I think, if you will peruse -it again, you will see what sort of thing -you should arrange for the exercise. At -inspections one sometimes sees a company -sent off by itself to carry out such an -attack, and the method often adopted is -to tell off the company into the firing line -and supports, and, perhaps, a reserve. -The whole then go straight for the object -and perform a sort of travesty of what -the company does when acting as part of -a battalion. By this time I trust you will -be quick to perceive that this is just what -it ought not to do. As an isolated force -it has to do much more than simply to -form a firing line and bring off an assault. -It must secure its flanks, have a real<span class="pagenum" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</span> -reserve, employ a flank as well as a -frontal attack, provide for its own withdrawal -if worsted, be prepared to deal -with a counter-attack, and observe all -the principles laid down in I.T., 121. -<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">Mutatis mutandis</i>, your reserve may consist -of only a platoon, your flank -guards a file or two of men, your -flank attacks a section or platoon with -a subaltern accompanying it, and so -on, but the precautions must be taken -and the principles put into practice, -or your attack would run risk of failure. -You would do it all on service; therefore, -do it all in peace. Carry out such exercises, -carefully planned, and with observance -of service conditions, and I am quite -sure you will see what a great deal there -is to be done in this direction before you -feel yourself and your company quite -competent to undertake a similar task in -the field. That first exercise against a -skeleton enemy will be the forerunner -of many others. Your criticism of the -action of your non-commissioned officers -must be carefully considered, as there are -usually several justifiable ways of doing -a thing, and it should always be constructive -and not merely destructive (T. & M.R., -2 (2)).</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XIII">EXERCISE XIII.<br> -<span class="smcap">The Company in Retirement.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>The men have been practised in retirement -in pairs in Exercise II., and the sections -and platoons have also learned their -part in Exercise VI. It remains to train the -company for this duty, which it might have -to do either as acting as rearguard to -the battalion, whether the latter was, or -was not, in conjunction with other troops, -or as if effecting its withdrawal when -isolated. In both cases the procedure and -distribution are pretty much alike. In the -former case, the company, if it gets into -difficulties, <em>may</em> be able to get help from -the rest of the force, but in the latter it -will not be able to do so, and the commander -should be especially careful to have -in hand some portion of his company which -he can use to extricate any detachment -which gets “tied up.” On the other hand, -it is very desirable that the main body -should not be called on to reinforce the -rearguard when the company is not acting -alone. So that in both cases you should be -prepared to meet eventualities from your -own resources. Again, a rearguard is<span class="pagenum" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</span> -bound to have the majority of its force in -action in order to hold back the enemy -and present an appearance of force, so that -it is not always possible to set apart a -portion of so small a body as a company to -act solely as reserve, and to remain continuously -outside the actual combat. The -solution of the difficulty seems to lie in -an intelligent application of the principles -of rearguard fighting given in F.S.R., 71 to -73, and the early but timeous withdrawal -from the fighting line of a portion of the -company who move back to a position in -rear from which they can cover the withdrawal -of the remainder, but are still available -to be thrown into the fight, if it is -necessary to inaugurate some sort of a -counter attack to give portions heavily -engaged a chance to break away from close -grips. It is important in this exercise to -teach non-commissioned officers and men -to be ready to adopt quickly any method -of withdrawal that may be ordered, because -the nature of the ground must -determine the way in which a withdrawal -can best be effected, and the nature of the -ground may vary every few hundred yards. -Therefore I merely suggest some ways of -practising retirements, and during the -course of the exercise you should change -from one to another, and also encourage -commanders to act on their own initiative,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</span> -when, as will probably happen, your system -of inter-communication fails to act with -sufficient speed and accuracy. I.T., 137, -gives general rules as to the action of platoons -and sections, and the standard set up -in Exercises II. and VI. should be adhered -to. Send out the skeleton enemy with -orders to follow up the retirement, but not -to close in under six hundred yards.</p> - -<p>(<em>a</em>) Get the whole company deployed -into one line of platoons, with intervals between -them, occupying a wide front, four -to eight hundred yards, the men at five or -more paces extension. This may seem too -wide a front, but, after all, the intervals -between the platoons are only two hundred -and forty yards, and an enemy trying to -break straight through the line would be -under fire at one hundred and twenty yards -or less, while a wide front is the best -precaution against having your flanks -turned and your retreat intercepted.</p> - -<p>Send back a platoon from one of the -flanks to take up quickly a position in rear -clear away from the firing line; three hundred -to six hundred yards is not too much; -let it open fire, and let the remainder of the -firing line work back by retirement of -alternate sections, each running back thirty -or forty yards, beginning this movement -from the flank from which the first platoon<span class="pagenum" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</span> -went, the platoon on the other flank holding -on and only giving ground when the two -centre platoons have got well on their way -to the line on which the first platoon is -halted. This is a slow retirement, but -gives a maximum of continuous fire and -the flanks are strong.</p> - -<p>(<em>b</em>) With the whole company extended in -one line, and no intervals between platoons. -Retire by short rushes of alternate sections; -the rushes must be quite short, twenty -yards at most, so that the sections that have -retired can fire through the intervals of the -rear portion of the line the instant that it -begins to retire. This is meant for use -after an unsuccessful assault, and only on -flat ground.</p> - -<p>(<em>c</em>) With the company extended in one -line, but with intervals between the -platoons. Order the flank platoons to -retire and take post to cover the withdrawal -of the two centre platoons, who -remain in position till the flank platoons -are ready to open fire. Watch how the -platoon commanders handle their platoons; -they should do so artfully, as taught -in Exercise VI.</p> - -<p>(<em>d</em>) Retire by half-companies, two platoons -together, using your subalterns as -half-company commanders, and putting the -onus of finding suitable covering positions<span class="pagenum" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</span> -on them, merely telling them to cover each -other’s retirement.</p> - -<p>(<em>e</em>) With the company all holding one -position, leave the scouts or picked men to -cover the retirement by rapid fire, and -withdraw the remainder at full speed, then -cover the retirement of the scouts by the -fire of the whole from a position in rear. -Watch that the scouts creep back from -their cover without letting the enemy know -they are going; and of this screen of scouts -the flank men ought usually to be the last -to go in order to make the enemy believe -that the position is still occupied.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XIV">EXERCISE XIV.<br> -<span class="smcap">Outposts.</span></h2> -</div> - -<h3>I.</h3> - -<p>The general rules for outposts and the -part played by an outpost company are to -be found in I.T., 147 to 157, and it is necessary -accordingly to train for those duties in -peace. Let us begin from the beginning, -and see what infantry outposts are and -what they have to do. A line of infantry -outposts will very often have to be taken up -after a day’s fighting, or in close proximity -to the enemy before a battle. The commander -of an outpost battalion will be -told by the staff to take up with his battalion -a certain length of the front, say, -from Farm A to Hill B, inclusive—perhaps -a mile or even two in extent. He -cannot possibly have time to ride all along -the front and fix places for piquets and -sentries. Instead of this, he looks at the -ground and comes to the conclusion that -it will require, say, all his four companies -in the outpost line. He divides up his -front into four parts, and gives each of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</span> -his companies one part. It is his duty to -see that the eight companies form along -the line that combines the best facilities -for defence and reconnaissance to the -front. Accordingly, he tells the captain -of A Company to take from Farm A to, -say, the wood X, inclusive, the captain of -B Company from the wood X, exclusive, -to, say, the stream ML, inclusive, and so -along. The captains of companies then -have to go off and take up their frontages. -As beforesaid, infantry outposts must -expect to take up their line close to the -enemy, and often when dusk is falling. -This gives you your clue as to how it -should be done. You must march your -company in fighting formation, so as not -to be ambushed—a screen of scouts -or other covering troops in front and -on the flanks, a party, section, or platoon -ready to succour the covering party, and -hold up the enemy, and a reserve ready -to act under your orders, either for attack -or defence. Your movement and the -taking up of your line should be unseen by -the enemy; therefore, move carefully -under cover both from distant and close -positions, from which you may be seen. -The line must be taken up quickly. The -main thing is to get it occupied; therefore, -it is a mistake to halt the company -while you plod round the whole of the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</span> -front and plan just where each piquet and -sentry will be. Instead, take a good look -at the line as you march and decide what -are the essential points to be held for -defence and as observation points. As -soon as your scouts have made good the -ground a little in front of those points, -send off what you think are necessary, -sections or platoons, to seize these -points, and act as piquets till you go -round and adjust details. Thus your -company will occupy the line in rough-and-ready -fashion as quickly as they can -advance. When the company breaks up -to go to the piquet posts, go with any one -of the piquets which is to be on one flank -and settle the exact position of the piquet -with reference to the line you intend to -hold as your line of resistance, and any -other details which you think the piquet -commander should attend to, such as what -localities should be patrolled, and estimate -the number of men required. Any surplus -sections should accompany you from this -piquet, and you and they then go along the -line to the other piquets which you arrange -similarly, using the surplus to reinforce -those piquets that need them, and if at the -end you have still a surplus of men you -may either form them as a support in rear -or dismiss them to remain with their own -platoons. For purposes of messing on service -the latter is convenient, but, tactically,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</span> -a support is often needed, in which case the -men’s comfort must take second place.</p> - -<p>You must make a clear distinction -between day and night outposts, though -you practise the latter by daylight. Infantry -outposts by day and until the -enemy advances, are firstly patrols and -look-out men, whose business is to look -for any movement on the part of the -enemy, and to prevent his seeing their -own side’s doings, and to report what -they see of the enemy’s, and, secondly, -a line of piquets who occupy the line decided -on as the line of resistance, and who -may fall out and rest while things are -quiet, with supports and sometimes a -reserve behind them. The patrols are -active agents in getting information in -front of the outpost line, and they -will mostly consist of mounted troops -except in close country or thick weather. -The look-out sentries are passive obstacles -to the enemy’s patrols or scouts -penetrating the line; the piquets are the -reserve of force ready to be called into -action when needed. But a line suitable -for observation and resistance by day is -seldom suitable by night also. Fighting -by day is done by shooting, and rough -ground affording cover is likely to be -chosen for the advance of the attackers. -By night, however, the attack will be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</span> -made with the bayonet, and the attacker -will avoid broken country, which will -confuse and delay his advance. Choose -your outpost line accordingly. By day -seek for a good field of fire, mutually -supporting positions, and good facilities -for observation, and strengthen the position -you mean to fight on. By night -close the likely ways by which an enemy -may advance by putting piquets on them -in strengthened positions with obstacles -prepared in front, and patrols lying out -on intervening ground to intercept scouts. -Thus, in an undulating hedge-covered -country with many roads, by day your -piquets would be behind the crests of the -undulations, sentries only on the look-out, -and patrols scouting in front. By night -your piquets would be on the roads, which -they would block with barbed wire or -abattis of cut hedge stuff, and your patrols -in the fields between and lying out along -the road in front at some place where they -could watch anything passing, and get -back to the piquet line without running -risks of being shot by their own side. We -will see below what training is required -for non-commissioned officers and men in -their duties on piquet, patrol and sentry. -When you have trained them in these -duties, take up an outpost line as a tactical -exercise with your company, acting as<span class="pagenum" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</span> -an outpost company by day, and then as -by night, and if you have scouts send -them out to act as an enemy’s patrol in -front to see how much of the operation -of taking up the line is visible to them; -then, after a certain hour, let them try -to make their way through the line unseen. -They must not work round the flanks as -<i lang="la" xml:lang="la">ex hypothesi</i>; these are held by other outpost -companies; finally, let them start -sniping the outposts as if ushering in an -attack, and let your piquets take up the -line of resistance, your patrols falling -back on the firing beginning.</p> - - -<h3>II.</h3> - -<p class="center"><em>The Training of Men and Platoons in -Outpost Duties.</em></p> - -<p>An outpost company will more often -consist of two or more small piquets of -one or more platoons with a support, than -simply of one large piquet with its support, -so that when you come to train the whole -company, as above, in taking up a part -of an outpost line, the performance of the -work will depend largely on the ability -of your platoon and section commanders -to direct the men in their duties. -Unless they are capable of doing this, -time will be wasted as you will be occupied -with one portion of the line while<span class="pagenum" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</span> -the rest are doing nothing and awaiting -your arrival, for in this class of work the -instructor must remain for some time with -each piquet while the men are being put -through the various duties, and cannot -supervise concurrently at all points. -Therefore, it is best, before taking the -men out for instruction, to give a day or -two solely to the instruction of subalterns -and non-commissioned officers. When -they have got a knowledge of what is -required, have the men out, divide them -into piquets under subalterns and section -commanders, who will put them through -the duties, and the work will go on on -proper lines, and you will be free to go -round and supervise each in turn.</p> - -<p>You will have four subalterns, sixteen -section commanders, and other non-commissioned -officers, a total of twenty rifles -or so, but if you are short of non-commissioned -officers, have out enough privates to -give you sixteen or twenty rifles. Form -them up as a piquet and make the supposition -that it has just received its orders to -break off from the company and go to a -certain point in the outpost line and take -up its duties there.</p> - - -<h3><em>Day Piquets.</em></h3> - -<p>Indicate some such point as a day piquet -position at a reasonable distance from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</span> -where the piquet is when you give it its -orders, and let the senior non-commissioned -officer march it there, as on service, -the point chosen being, if possible, such a -one as would be occupied on service.</p> - -<p>(<em>a</em>) This advance to the piquet is the -first duty. In spite of the company covering -troops being supposed to be somewhere -in advance, the piquet on its march should -be protected by a small patrol (F.S.R., -64 (1)). In taking up the position, it -must not let the enemy see it; that is, -neither the men nor their commander -should show themselves. Very often the -men are kept under cover, but the commander -wanders about fixing places for -sentries in full view of everyone. He -should lie down and peep over the crest -or whatever it is while making his plans.</p> - -<p>Having arrived at the piquet position, -indicate a position on the right and on -the left where other piquets are supposed -to be and proceed with:—</p> - -<p>(<em>b</em>) Duties of outpost sentries.—These -are given in I.T., 152. Post as many -groups as will use up the whole -strength in places which would need -watching on service; if there are not -enough such places near by, then merely -for the purpose of this semi-drill, post two -or more groups close together. A -group consists of one or two men<span class="pagenum" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</span> -on duty, and their reliefs, who lie -down near them. These groups are relieved -every eight or twelve hours. Let -it be understood that the position of their -own piquet is occupied by the reliefs of -these groups and of patrols, and it is a -good plan to show the position by a flag. -The sentries must see without being seen, -know where other groups are, where their -own and other piquets are, be told to -challenge and halt anyone approaching as -in I.T., 152 (3), and what to do if -attacked. Let them do this to you personally, -as if you were someone not belonging -to the troops, and impress on -them that they must be careful to teach -it to their men so that <em>no stranger may -ever be allowed to get close</em> to a group, -and to shoot if he does not halt. Neglect -of this simple rule has led to many mishaps -in all armies. Concealment is not -easy, but must be got somehow—by -artifice, if the ground is unfavourable. -After putting all through “sentry go” -close to the groups and teach them:—</p> - -<p>(<em>c</em>) Patrolling, for which see I.T., 111 and -156. Patrols are not meant for fighting, -but to get information or watch dangerous -places. But they may have to fight -to avoid capture, and they do no good -by walking blindly into an ambush. -To bring back information or news that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</span> -the enemy are coming on, it is evidently -essential that whatever happens to the rest -of the party, one man at least should -always be able to escape, and to avoid -ambush the patrol should move in a formation -which will prevent a surprise overwhelming -the whole party. In short, one -portion must scout, and the other be prepared -to cover their movement and help -them to get away, if possible, but in any -case to get away itself and carry news of -the enemy. But patrols must be limited -in strength, or they will not be able to -escape notice, and must make up for their -weakness by cunning and stealthiness of -movement.</p> - -<p>For patrolling by day, tell off the whole -strength into patrols of four or six men, -one of whom will command in each patrol. -Let each take up the formation it would -usually adopt; that is, one or two files in -advance, followed by the rest at a distance -sufficient to prevent the surprise of the -whole by one and the same opening of -fire. Teach the method advocated for -movement across country, i.e., a careful but -rapid advance from one cover to another, -also how to approach suspicious localities. -The leading file halts and looks -for any signs of the enemy; meanwhile -the rear file comes nearly up to -it; the leading file then moves forward<span class="pagenum" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</span> -while the rear file lies down with -rifles loaded and sighted, ready to fire -at once to cover the others if the enemy -shows himself. If the locality to be -searched can be outflanked, the leading -files should move round one or both flanks -before closing in on it. If it is one that -cannot be outflanked, as, for instance, a -straight edge of a large wood, they should -approach it under cover, creeping up a -hedgerow perhaps, and so get inside. If -there is no cover they may try some ruse -to draw the enemy’s fire before getting -too close, halting as if they had seen -something, shading the eyes with the -hand, pointing and then starting to run -back as if alarmed, which might lead the -enemy to open fire to prevent their escape. -But it is rather hard to get men to do -this play-acting unless there is a real force -of “Blue” or “Red” enemy against -them. The commander of the patrol, -when approaching any place, should tell -his men what they are to do if it is seen -to be held by the enemy, i.e., to lie still -and watch, or retire. If the latter, he -should fix some place in rear where the -patrol could rally after getting out of -harm’s way.</p> - -<p>Show them how to look over a ridge, -wall, or hedge, without attracting notice, -taking off their headdress and raising the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</span> -head slowly, keeping the rest of the body -carefully under cover, and also to move -unseen, keeping in the shadow of hedges -or roadside trees, and covering up any -polished metal work of their uniform; to -lie up on any place that commands a good -view, and look long and carefully all over -the country to catch sight of anything. -Finally to report what they see, and to -do this at once, if there is need, by sending -one, or better, if the patrol can spare -them, two men back to the piquet with a -<em>written</em> report, the rest still remaining in -observation. Without having an actual -force opposing you, you can only do this -exercise with some appearance of reality -by giving out verbal situations to the -patrol. Thus: “Go and reconnoitre that -wood which an enemy may be holding.” -On this the patrol would get into formation -and move forward. Then, when -approaching the wood, “You have seen -small parties of the enemy beyond the -wood both on its right and left, and they -are perhaps in the wood also; try and get -into it unseen,” if there is any cover, or, -if not, “show what you would do to draw -their fire before getting close.” Then -“the wood is held by the enemy, withdraw -your patrol if you can.” As the -patrol attempts to retire “a heavy fire is -opened on you as you retire, showing that<span class="pagenum" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</span> -there is at least a company in the wood, -your first duty is to send news of this -to your piquet—how and whom would you -send, and how would you frame your -message?”</p> - -<p>(<em>d</em>) Duties on piquet.—Close the platoon -and take it to the place where the piquet -is to be. A piquet on arrival at its position -has at once to strengthen the position -against attack, and this without waiting -for orders (I.T., 151 (4)). But as we are -here only training the non-commissioned -officers in their duties we will not ask them -actually to dig trenches or make loop-holes -and entanglements; indeed, this, as one -may term it, executive work, has its proper -place in “Defence.” Bearing in mind, -then, that we are dealing with a day outpost, -ask or show the platoon how to -strengthen the position. Bring out a few -picks and let them spitlock on the ground -the lines of any trenches that might be -needed, paying great attention to the siting -of the trench so that fire could be brought -over all the ground in front. Let them -indicate with exactness where and how -they would improve and adapt existing -cover. Great regard need not be had to -the number of men in the piquet, as outposts, -if attacked, should make as much -show of force as possible, and it does good -and not harm if there are alternative loop-holes<span class="pagenum" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</span> -facing in different directions; also -accommodation must be provided for -the support. The commander should -look for ground outside the outpost -line from which enfilade rifle or artillery -fire might be brought to bear on -him, and mark how he would protect -his men from it by traverses, breaking the -line of loop-holes into short lengths, keeping -under lee of existing cover and so on. -The strengthening of the piquet must be -done with the aid of common-sense. It will -seldom be enough to propose to dig one bit -of trench all in one piece and hope the -enemy will be good enough to come and -knock his head against it. Cover may be -made or adapted in several separate -groups, if this is needed, so as to make it -possible to bring fire to bear on any part -of the ground in front. The piquet must -be prepared to make as brave a show as -possible, therefore the commander, while -strengthening the point near which his -piquet is to rest, must decide what he will -do if attacked. Probably there will be -within the limits of his piquet’s frontage -one or two other points which might be -useful for defence, and he must not expect -attack just from one direction. With -regard to such alternative positions he -should settle when and how he will use -them, and whether he can afford time and<span class="pagenum" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</span> -men to strengthen them, and, last but -not least, whether he will be able to get -men from one to the other if the enemy -does develop a strong attack. If he can -do all these he will have added immensely -to his power of defence, provided he -handles his men skilfully, as he will be -able to hold one position till the enemy -thinks he has defined its location, then -dodge to another, while they will go -on firing at the old one, and so make his -piquet appear many times stronger than it -is. Concealment of the defence is very -important, and the non-commissioned -officers should be reminded that this must -be attended to. They may forget it as -there is no actual digging.</p> - -<p>(<em>e</em>) Duties in Piquet.—The position of -the piquet and alternative defence positions -having been fixed, and trenches or other -defences marked out on the position, and -on the alternative positions if any, assemble -the platoon at the piquet and show the -non-commissioned officers how to tell off -reliefs and other duties. Each group furnished -by the piquet consists of -three to eight men, and mounts one or two -men as sentry, as the circumstances of the -post require (I.T., 152 (3)), the sentry, -single or double, being relieved in turn by -the others of the group. The whole group -is under command of the senior soldier or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</span> -a non-commissioned officer. The men -who are to form the reliefs of the groups -stay with the piquet, which usually is composed -solely of the reliefs of groups and -patrols. Extra men who have no specific -duties are not advisable unless the position -is very exposed. Suppose your group -sentries are single, and the groups of three -men each, and relieved every eight hours, -then for every group posted and in position -there will be six men in the piquet resting -and waiting their turn, each group thus -needing a total of nine men—three out, six -in. Patrols start from the piquet or support, -as the commander of the company -directs, and the piquet commander may -send them out on his own initiative, if he -thinks it needful. As they are practically -all on duty as long as they are out, a turn -of four hours is enough for them, or, rather, -a third of the daylight time. Take your -patrols from this piquet to be four strong, -there will be for each patrol eight men in -the piquet and four out on patrol, a total -of twelve needed to furnish each patrol.</p> - -<p>In telling off a piquet on the above conditions -of relief, and before dismissing the -men to rest, the commander must pay attention -to two main points. Firstly, he -must tell off the reliefs, and give each relief -a place to rest in. Men on outpost -are usually tired and need all the rest they<span class="pagenum" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</span> -can get, especially if they are up all night. -Therefore reliefs should be kept together -and rest in one place, so that the commander -can find them at once without -stirring up the others to see who’s who. -Secondly, the men must be told off to alarm -posts, which they are to occupy in case of -attack—each relief and each man of it -should be given a position on the entrenchment -which he is to hold. To ensure that -they will do this at once and without confusion -they should be made to go to these -places and occupy them before being dismissed. -There will then be no needless -running about with consequent casualties -if fire, either of artillery or infantry, suddenly -opens.</p> - -<p>Say you have sixteen rifles (non-commissioned -officers and others) in your instructional -piquet give out that it is to furnish—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent">1 Sentry over the piquet.<br> -2 Groups of three men each, Nos. 1 and 2.<br> -2 Patrols of four men each, Nos. 1 and 2.</p> -</div> - -<p>The sentry over the piquet alone being -actually posted, the two groups and two -patrols being supposed to be out in front, -as this part of the lesson is only concerned -with the inside work of the piquet, and -you have already shown them this work on -sentry and patrol. As your strength is not<span class="pagenum" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</span> -sufficient you must make a further supposition, -and make believe that for the -reliefs of the groups one of your rifles represents -three, and for those of the patrols -one rifle represents two. Appoint one of -the non-commissioned officers in turn as -commander, and let him tell off accordingly.</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent">3 Rifles for piquet sentry, one of whom he actually mounts.<br> -1 Rifle (representing three) as second relief, No. 1 group.<br> -1 Rifle (representing three) as third relief, No. 1 group.<br> -2 Rifles (representing two each) for second relief, No. 1 patrol.<br> -2 Rifles (representing two each) for third relief, No. 1 patrol.<br> -<span style="padding-left: .8em">And a similar number for No. 2 patrol and No. 2 group.</span></p> -</div> - -<p>Having told off these reliefs the commander -should then tell them where they -are to have their resting places and where -their posts are in case of alarm. At this -time also he would give out any special -orders which concern the piquet. Then -without dismissing the men he should -order them to go to their resting places, -and as soon as they are there order them -to occupy their alarm posts, which should -be done in double time, the men lying -down on the places that have been marked<span class="pagenum" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</span> -out for entrenchment or improvement of -existing cover. Make this falling in on -alarm posts a standing order in the company. -After this has been done, and each -man knows exactly what he has to do on -the alarm, the men should be dismissed to -their resting places, which, as before said, -should be separate for each relief and apart -from each other. After being dismissed, -the men would on service be allowed to -make themselves as comfortable as possible. -Other duties of the piquet commander -are:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (1) The opening of communication with piquets in right and left and the support.</p> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (2) The fixing of places for purposes of nature.</p> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (3) The arrangements for getting up food to his men if they have not their rations with them.</p> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (4) Keeping his piquet in a state of readiness; besides keeping accoutrements on, the men -should have their rifles at their sides when resting, and take them with them wherever they -go. There should be no such thing as piling arms on outpost.</p> -</div> - -<h3><em>Night Piquets.</em></h3> - -<p>In the dark the bullet is a fool unless<span class="pagenum" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</span> -fired at close quarters. No practicable -amount of shooting, even at only a -hundred yards distance, will dislodge determined -men posted under cover, and a -serious attack must be made with the -bayonet or by shooting within the distance -at which a man may be distinguished—ten -yards or so. F.S.R., 138 (2), lays -down for the British Army that the -bayonet only is to be used in night attacks, -and we may assume that any civilized -army we may have to meet will pursue -similar tactics. Aerial reconnaissance may -nowadays allow an enemy to locate the -position held by the main body of his -opponent, in spite of its being covered by -outposts, but such reconnaissance does not -admit of any hope of a successful night -attack being made on that main body by -eluding or passing through the outposts, -because the surface of the ground cannot -be sufficiently searched from above to discover -the small obstacles which must be -avoided or known if the advance of a -large body of men is to be carried out at -night. So we may take it that now, as -formerly, any large attack will fall first -on the outposts, supposing, as we must, -that these are placed so as to hold or -watch all possible lines of advance. In -addition to this, outposts must expect isolated -attacks made against one or two<span class="pagenum" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</span> -points held by them which the enemy -desires to gain possession of. The duties -of outposts by night are, then, to hold -and defend the outpost line in sufficient -strength to prevent any large body of the -enemy breaking through, or getting a -footing in some tactically important position -on the line, and also to prevent the -enemy’s scouts from getting through and -making observations, and, lastly, but of -most importance, to get news of the enemy -both as a means of forestalling any -attack, and for the use of the force commander -in framing his plans. Bringing -the matter down to the level of a piquet -of an outpost company, it seems to resolve -itself into night patrolling and night -defence of a position. As before pointed -out, enclosed country allows of piquets -closing the lines of advance by which -large bodies can only hope to move undiscovered, -while intervening ground can be -searched by patrols. On the other hand, -open country leaves the front vulnerable -everywhere, and calls for a greater number -of piquets and closer patrolling than -are needed by day.</p> - -<p>Of course, elementary instruction in -these duties must be carried out by daylight -to allow of supervision; so now -assemble your platoon of non-commissioned<span class="pagenum" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</span> -officers and give out that you are going to -practise night work. Choose some place -for your night piquet, realistic as may be, -a bridge, a cutting, or anything else that -constitutes a defile or otherwise blocks a -likely line of advance from the enemy’s -direction. Also choose, and point out to -the platoon, positions where the adjoining -piquets on the right and left would be. -Give out the following instructions to the -non-commissioned officers:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (1) Piquets must take up their night - positions when it is getting dusk, - the strengthening of the piquet - and construction of obstacles - being done in advance, secretly if - possible, and towards evening the - working party should withdraw - and leave the intended night position - empty till it is time to move - into it, further work being completed - by twilight.</p> - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (2) The provision of obstacles is - more necessary than entrenchment, - as securing the piquet from - being rushed while completing - the latter.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (3) Men must rest on their alarm - posts, and bayonets may have to - be kept fixed by all, if there is - a possibility of a sudden attack - (I.T., 151 (7)), to ensure instant - readiness.<span class="pagenum" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</span></p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (4) All piquets must stand to arms - one hour before light and remain - ready for action till the patrols - have found that there is no sign - of an immediate attack. When - relief takes place in the morning, - night outposts will not return to - camp till the patrols report all - clear.</p> -</div> - - -<p>After this, let the non-commissioned -officer in command withdraw the piquet -from its day position and march it to the -night position. On arrival ask the non-commissioned -officers in turn where they -would place the piquet exactly and where -they would put their obstacles. Obstacles -for a night piquet should be under close -fire, i.e., ten or twenty paces, but, in -addition, booby traps and alarms may be -placed further in front. Barbed wire is -the best of all obstacles. The actual -defensive measures to be taken do not -differ from those taken for the defence of -any position not on outpost.</p> - -<p>The position of the piquet and obstacles -being decided on, let the non-commissioned -officers mark on the ground the -actual work they would undertake, having -regard to the time available, which you -should tell them, and, on the same lines<span class="pagenum" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</span> -as for the day piquet, let them as commanders -in turn divide the men into reliefs -of sentries and patrols, tell them off -to their alarm posts, and order them to -occupy them once as if on alarm.</p> - -<p>A piquet by night, no matter how well -entrenched, has a very limited field of -action. Even with most carefully arranged -night rests for the men’s rifles its fire effect -is small except at close ranges, and to resist -attack by relatively larger bodies it -must in general keep behind its defences. -Hence a well organised scheme of patrols -is necessary to supplement the passive opposition -which the piquet can offer. The -patrols are charged with the duty of bringing -news of any advance of the enemy to -attack, and, if he is close enough, of spying -out his movements on and within his outpost -line, of preventing his patrols or scouts -penetrating their own line, of watching any -localities which are of particular importance -and unoccupied by piquets, such, for -example, as villages beyond the outpost -line which the enemy might try to occupy -by night, and, lastly, of keeping up communication -between the various bodies of -the outposts. The strength of patrols is -limited by the necessity of their being able -to do this work without making a noise, -and a strength of three to eight men is -advised. A patrol performs its duty of observation<span class="pagenum" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</span> -either by going from point to -point, or by watching one particular place, -when it is called a “standing patrol.” If a -piquet posts any group sentries by night, -away from the piquet, such groups have -just the same work as standing patrols, -except that they may be ordered to maintain -their position in case of attack as -they are near support, whereas patrols -would fall back as soon as they had made -sure the enemy was advancing, and possibly, -if in accordance with their instructions, -after treating him to a short burst of -rapid fire. An ordinary patrol will also -have to halt and listen perhaps for long -periods, and so becomes for the nonce a -standing patrol.</p> - -<p>Form up the platoon at the piquet position, -and let the commander tell it off into -three patrols to practise this duty, disregarding -reliefs, all three to be sent out at -the same time in different directions, one -man in each to be commander. Before -they start off, tell them the following, which -piquet commanders must see to:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (1) If there is no countersign published - for the force, piquet commanders - must arrange either a - word or a sign by which men may - know their own side in the dark.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (2) Patrols going out are to tell the - nearest sentry which way they are - going (I.T., 156 (5)).</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (3) For patrols a code of signals<span class="pagenum" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</span> - should be arranged, e.g., a hiss or - half-whistle, to call attention, - answered by the same to show - that the man called has heard it, - followed by the signal, whatever - it is:—a double hiss for “come up - to me,” a click of the tongue for - “retire,” but anything will do provided - it cannot be clearly heard - much further off than the listeners - for whom it is intended, and is - neither a very common nor a very - uncommon sound.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - (4) The piquet commander must tell - patrols how long they are to stay - out and any places he thinks must - be visited, in addition to what they - themselves may find advisable, on - closer acquaintance with the ground.</p> -</div> - - -<p>A suitable formation for a night patrol -of six men would be four in the advanced -party, followed at ten to fifty paces by the -rear party or two. The reason for the -stronger party being ahead is, firstly, that -fighting at night begins with suddenness -and ends rapidly, while reinforcement of -one party by another is slow and uncertain, -and, secondly, to ensure that some -part of the patrol may have a good chance -of getting away with news, whatever happens<span class="pagenum" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</span> -to the rest: Bayonets should be fixed -and rifles sloped on the right shoulder, the -right hand holding the small of the butt so -as to come to the charge at once, and not -to have any chance of a rifle falling on the -ground.</p> - -<p>Tell patrol commanders to get their -patrols into formation and practise movement -in silence along a road and on -ordinary road. If along a road, let them -move on each side of it, off the metal on -the roadside grass or dust, and under trees -or close to the hedge or wall. On ordinary -country the ball of the foot should be put -down first as if to feel the surface, before -putting the full weight of the body on the -advanced foot. A stick or broom-handle, -<em>à la</em> “boy scout,” is invaluable in moving -over unexplored ground, as by it the real -nature of objects dimly seen at one’s feet -can be made out, and awkward spills -thereby avoided. The movement of -patrols under these conditions will be very -slow over any but quite level ground. As -the patrols move let them practise the code -of signals, halting, advancing, coming up -into one line, etc., also the keeping up of -communication by one file moving back and -forward between the two parts of the -patrol. They should practise also breaking -up and scattering as if attacked by -overwhelming numbers, each individual<span class="pagenum" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</span> -getting away as quickly and quietly as -possible, and the whole rallying again at -some place in rear. The patrol commander -as he goes out must fix these rallying -places, usually one is enough over the -whole of a patrol’s beat, and they should be -<em>outside</em> the outpost line. Have the patrols -moved so that on their beats they may -meet each other once or twice, and use the -sign to reply when challenge is made. As -a second practice, direct one of the meeting -patrols to consider itself hostile, and -let the commander of the other patrol -excogitate how he would deal with men -who did not stand fast on being told to -halt and could not give the countersign.</p> - -<p>Next tell the patrols to get into position -to watch various localities, a farm steading, -a ravine, or such like, as they would have to -do for limited periods as patrols reconnoitring -on their beats, or for the whole -night as standing patrols. One of the best -ways in which patrols can fulfil their office -is by halting and listening with ears near -the ground for sounds of human movement. -There is no rule for thus lying up except -that they must not get caught themselves. -A couple of men should be left quite clear -of the patrol to get away if the others -strike trouble, and the commander of the -patrol should have word passed to these -two from time to time that all is well with<span class="pagenum" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</span> -the rest, or they may wait in their place -while the others have been quietly -downed.</p> - -<p>Lastly, let patrols return to the piquet, -and learn how to approach without getting -themselves fired on, or causing useless -alarm. A good way is for two of the patrol -to advance a few steps at a time when near -the piquet, halting and quietly code-signalling -the piquet sentry till they get His attention -and warn him that the patrol wants -to come in.</p> - -<p>It has taken longer to write about outposts -than it may take you to put your men -through them, and I have purposely been -discursive because a knowledge of what is -needed from outposts is more important -than any set exercise, and also because -this duty is the one which newly raised -troops are most likely to perform negligently, -and at the same time the one which, -if neglected, allows the enemy to bring raw -troops to quick demoralisation. I have also -purposely written as if unlimited ground -were available, and, speaking generally, I -think it is. You can, and should, practise -your piqueting and patrolling on the -ordinary countryside, with its main and -bye-roads, paths, fields, and hedges. The -practice of outposts when piquets are not -entrenched, causes no damage, so that -leave to move over the fields should not be<span class="pagenum" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</span> -hard to get, but even if it cannot be got, -the principal and most important work of -patrolling and watching all roads and paths, -will be done on the ground on which they -would be done on service. If fighting ever -takes place in Britain, which Heaven forefend, -outpost lines will be along the ordinary -country and not on Salisbury Plain, so -do not go into wild and desolate places -for your outposts, but take the ordinary -country round where you are.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XV">EXERCISE XV.<br> -<span class="smcap">Defence.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>The subject of defence is treated of in -F.S.R., 107-110, I.T., 125-135, and in -Chapter VII., M.F.E., 1911. The duties -required of the company commander and -his subordinates are briefly defined by I.T., -132, to be similar to those they carry out in -the attack. The whole spirit of the regulations -is that the active Defence is merely a -means to an end, viz., the ultimate assumption -of the offensive, which may be carried -out either by the same troops which have -acted on the defensive or by fresh troops -detailed for the purpose. In both cases -the troops that have acted on the defensive -must be ready to become the aggressors. -Therefore, in training your men, you -should keep this constantly in view and -conserve a spirit of aggressive mobility. -Men must not be allowed to think that -once a position has been taken up and -entrenched it is to be their location till -fighting ceases; on the contrary, they -should be encouraged to look for opportunities -while still on the defensive, -to occupy alternative positions which<span class="pagenum" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</span> -will make the task of the attacking -enemy more difficult. Quickness -in seizing and strengthening a position -must be combined with mobility in -leaving it to take up and strengthen a -new one. Of course, the time available -regulates the work that can be undertaken -(M.F.E., VII. (2)); deep trenches and -concealed head cover cannot be made with -an enemy pressing in to assault, but the -first requirement is the ability to choose -positions that give a good field of fire -and to strengthen them as thoroughly as -the time available and the proximity of -the enemy admit.</p> - -<p>In dealing with a company, the onus of -choosing what localities it is tactically -necessary to occupy and strengthen rests -with the company commander, subject to -the orders of his battalion commander. -In the same way as on outpost, you will -be given a bit of ground to defend, either -acting with the battalion or as an isolated -company, and the rest will be on your -head. I do not propose to deliver a -treatise on the tactical occupation of -ground, but instead I will ask you to procure -and read two books. The first is -“The Defence of Duffer’s Drift,” by -Backsight Forethought (W. Clowes and -Sons), the second is “A Staff Officer’s -Scrap Book,” by Sir Ian Hamilton<span class="pagenum" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</span> -(Edward Arnold). They are both most -readable books, and are quite free of -soporific effects. The first is small, and -deals with the efforts of a half-company, -under Lieutenant B. F., to defend a drift -over a South African river. In the second -the author takes you along with him -through the Russo-Japanese War, of which -he was a privileged spectator, and in your -journeyings you look on at victories and -defeats in the making, while the causes -that led to them, great and small, are set -forth, along with many shrewd comments -on human nature and how it translates -itself in the day of battle. Every fight -bears its own lesson of what to do and -what not to do in defence, and this told -in no pedantic strain, but with the saving -grace of humour, to mitigate the darker -side of human carnage. Read them both, -get to yourself the wisdom and understanding -with which they are filled, and -you will know how to take up a position -for defence.</p> - -<p>Having educated yourself to choose the -points of a defensive position that must -be occupied if the position is to be effectively -held, you have still to train your -men to the work of defending them, and -they must learn to be able to do without -the help of a supervising officer, as will -often be the case on service.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</span></p> - -<p>Daylight defence is almost entirely a -matter of fire, the immediate object being -to make it impossible for the enemy to come -to close quarters. Platoon and section commanders -then must be able to dispose their -men with this in view to the best advantage -within the limits of the ground -allotted to their units, and the men must -be able to site their trenches or whatever -form of cover has to be constructed so -as to use their rifles to the best effect. It -is no good to teach men to dig trenches -and make loop-holes unless they know the -proper places for them. (M.F.E., 18 (7)).</p> - -<p>At the same time, practice in digging -and the use of tools is very necessary for -men who are not accustomed to such work. -The hands of the untrained man blister -and his muscles tire under the unusual -effort, while he expends much energy with -results small in comparison with what he -can accomplish once he has learnt to use -his strength well. Moreover, a certain -amount of technical skill is required in -making any but the most simple cover.</p> - -<p>To practise the execution of work, you -<em>must</em> have ground which you are at liberty -to turn up, as well as some materials for -loop-holes and obstacles. These may not -be obtainable at any and every parade, -but you can give practice in the selection -and siting of trenches on any bit of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</span> -country without causing damage, the men -merely spitlocking or marking with stones -or anything else the position of the -trenches on the surface of the ground, and -describing what they propose doing.</p> - -<p>I would, therefore, advise that you -make your training consist of two parts, -firstly the siting of trenches and the planning -by unit commanders and men of -defensive work, the choice and occupation -of alternative positions, and the assumption -of the offensive from the defensive, -all this without actually breaking ground, -and, secondly, ground and tools being -then available, the performance of a course -of making real cover and obstacles.</p> - -<p>But the first part cannot be carried out -unless the men have a knowledge of what -trenches, loop-holes and so on are like, -and the objects with which they are made. -In a company of raw recruits taken from -the populace at large, there will be plenty -who have no ideas on the subject at all. -You must then precede your exercises either -by a short lecture, materials for which you -will find in plenty in the “Defence of -Duffer’s Drift,” and the manuals of training, -or, better than a lecture, by showing -them specimens of entrenchments made by -regular troops. The main points to insist -on are the securing of a field of fire, the -necessity of concealment of the defences,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</span> -the importance of head cover as a help to -the delivery of an accurate fire by letting -men keep the enemy in view without showing -up themselves, the avoidance of enfilade -fire by making traverses, or by taking -advantage of intervening high ground, -the provision of cover from downward -shell fire by making the trenches deep and -steep enough to let men stand close up -to the edges, and, in the case of isolated -posts and points held as pivots of a position, -the necessity of preparing an all-round -defence so that these pivots will be -able to continue fighting whatever happens -on the intervening ground. The course -of work actually performed for the second -part should include digging all kinds of -trenches, by which the men will learn to -use their tools to the best advantage, and -their hands and muscles will become -hardened, the use of the excavated earth -to form parapets and parados (cover from -fire from the rear of the trench; forty -inches of earth are needed to keep out a -bullet), the drainage of trenches, the making -of traverses against enfilade fire, the -making of loop-holes and head-cover with -the aid of all sorts of materials, sand -bags, brushwood and heather, straw and -twigs, stones and bricks (which must be -covered with earth to deaden the effects -of splinters), packing boards, and so on,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</span> -the concealment of trenches and loop-holes -so as to be invisible to the enemy (this is -of great importance), the masking of loop-holes -when not in use to prevent light -showing through, the making of dummy -trenches and loop-holes to draw the -enemy’s fire away, the improvement of -existing cover, such as loop-holing walls -and the use of hedges with or without -ditches, making sangars, if stones are -available, the making of obstacles of -barbed and plain wire, and measuring and -marking of ranges round a position, which -should be done by some means not obvious -to the enemy, and clearing the field of -fire. It will seldom be practicable to -obtain subjects for practical demonstration -of some of the latter in peace time; -people will object to their walls being -experimented on or their shrubberies laid -low, and so even here a description of the -method will have to be substituted for -actual performance. For night defence -the construction of night rests for rifles is -needed. The best I know is a packing -case, filled with earth, with the front and -rear edges notched to hold the rifle stock. -The magazine is laid hard up against the -outside of the rear edge and the notches, -front or rear, slowly deepened with a penknife -till the sights bear on the target; -afterwards earth is banked up outside the<span class="pagenum" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</span> -box and head-cover made above. The -foregoing may seem a formidable list, but -they are things that will undoubtedly be -required as soon as you get on shooting -terms with an enemy; while if you exhaust -this list and feel the want of further -occupation, the Engineering Manual will -supply you with further subjects for your -activities.</p> - -<p>Pending your getting facilities of -ground, tools, and materials to execute -work, you can proceed with the first part -of training outlined above. If your non-commissioned -officers have not had experience, -take them out as an instructional -section in the same way as when teaching -outpost work, and put them through the -exercises which follow. But if they are -already fairly competent, take the men -on parade, forming them, if possible, into -not less than two sections.</p> - - -<h3><em>Instruction in Siting Trenches.</em></h3> - -<p>Choose any position on undulating -ground, form the men in extended order -in one line in rear of it, and order them -to move up, and mark where each would -place his trench in order to fire on an -enemy advancing from the front. In -doing this it should be an invariable rule -that men must lie down, bring the rifle into<span class="pagenum" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</span> -the firing position, look along the sights, -and move forward or back till they see that -they have got the best position to sweep the -ground in their immediate front (see -M.F.E., 31 (3)). Dead ground close to -the trench gives the enemy a place in which -to collect and organise an assault. Take -the men in the same way on to other positions -and repeat the lesson till they all -understand that the <em>first thing to be done -is this aiming with the rifle to secure a -good field of fire</em>. At first halt them -close to what you see is the best line, and -afterwards halt them thirty or forty yards -from it, and then give the order to choose -sites. For instance, halt them on the top -of a convex slope and let them find out -that the best place to bring fire on to flat -ground at its base is somewhere on the -enemy’s side of the convexity, for if the -trench were made on the top of the slope -the ground immediately in front would be -hidden by the convexity. The section -commanders must help the men in choosing -sites.</p> - -<p>After the men have fixed and marked -the proposed sites, let them lay down their -rifles three paces in rear and kneel or lie -down at the rear edge of the site as if -waiting to commence work while you and -section and platoon commanders go round -and examine the line. Ask details from<span class="pagenum" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</span> -the men—how high they would make the -parapet, how thick it should be, how they -would make head-cover, how they would -conceal the work, and so on.</p> - - -<h3><em>Traverses and broken lines of Trenches.</em></h3> - -<p>Repeat the exercise as above, but this -time have the men in sections or small -groups, and the trenches made not in one -line, but in short lengths, separated by -traverses. You will have to explain the -construction and use of these to prevent -enfilade fire (if not from long range), and -to localise shell bursts. Again, have lines -of trenches mapped out in short lengths -on an irregular front, some a little forward, -some a little back, with the earth -at each end, banked up on the flanks with -the same object (M.F.E., 33).</p> - - -<h3><em>Short Trenches for Two Men.</em></h3> - -<p>Bring the men extended to six or eight -paces on to a position, and let the men of -each file close to two paces from each -other. Each file is then to choose and -mark a site for a short trench to hold both -of them, or, as it would formerly have -been called, a rifle pit, marking where -they would make loop-holes to fire both -to the front, and obliquely towards the -right and left, so as to rake the ground<span class="pagenum" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</span> -in front of the line of the other men’s pits. -This arrangement is not officially recognised, -and it does not give the closest -possible firing line, but it is an excellent -way of making men think for themselves.</p> - -<p>When the men have got their bearings -in the matter of taking up a line for entrenchment, -make them get into the way -of changing from defence into attack. -Take up a position as before, and as soon -as the trenches are marked out, indicate a -position at some distance as an objective -for attack and start an advance against -it, as done in the attack practices, forming -a firing line rapidly of some named -platoons and the support of the others. A -skeleton enemy kept hidden till needed -adds much to the realism.</p> - - -<h3><em>Defence of Pivots (M.F.E., 50 (3), and -I.T., 129).</em></h3> - -<p>Find a position in which there are some -points separated from each other which -command the ground between, and also -form such pivots for defence of the position -as are described in the paras. -above. According to the nature of -the ground, such pivots might be, for -platoons, as much as four hundred yards -apart, i.e., attackers coming between them -would be under fire at not more than two -hundred yards. Send a platoon under a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</span> -commander to each pivot, and let him -plan and mark out his defensive measures, -which must include:—</p> - - -<div class="blockquot"> -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 1. An arrangement for all-round defence, - so that the pivot may be - self-contained and capable of - continuing the fight, although - others may have been captured.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 2. The siting accordingly of trenches - and loop-holes to fire all round - and especially to sweep the front - and rear of adjoining pivots.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 3. The adaptation of existing cover to - save labour.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 4. The provision of protection against - enfilade and reverse fire, and the - <em>recognition of distant localities</em> - from which such fire, whether of - artillery or rifle, might be - brought to bear on the post.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 5. The marking of ranges in each - direction.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 6. The provision of obstacles.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 7. Any feasible scheme for alternative - positions which his men could - reach and occupy under fire.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 8. The concealment of the defences, - provision of dummy trenches, - and loop-holes and any other - shifts.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 9. The telling off and posting of - look-out men and fixing and - occupying of alarm posts when - work has been completed.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 10. Drainage and sanitation.</p> -</div> - - - - -<span class="pagenum" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</span> - -<p>The concealment of defences from aerial -reconnaissance will, perhaps, soon claim -more attention than it gets at present.</p> - -<p>Practise an attack after defence, starting -off one platoon under your own orders -to “go for” an indicated enemy, and -sending word either by messenger or by -semaphore to the others, either to join -you and form a firing line, or to move out -in support, but, if the latter, do not fail -to finally call them up to reinforce the -firing line; counter-attacks must usually -be made with a relatively strong firing -line and small support.</p> - - -<h3><em>The Company in Defence Acting Alone.</em></h3> - -<p>When you have put non-commissioned -officers and men through the preceding -course, plan some scheme on the lines of -the defence of Duffer’s Drift, to deal with -a company isolated and beyond reach of -immediate reinforcement. Any bridge -over a railway line, a group of buildings -supposed to contain stores, or a ford or -bridge over a river, will provide you with -an object to defend. Choose a line of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</span> -defence round it and determine what are -the essential pivots to be held. To do -this, so as to furnish an instructive lesson, -it will usually be necessary for you to -pay a visit to the place by yourself and -formulate your proposed defence before -bringing the company on to the ground. -Pay great attention to crossing and supporting -fire from the pivots, and look at -the surrounding country with a view to -meeting attack from any direction, for -in this case the company, as well as the -pivots in its line of defence, must be self-contained. -Also have regard to the certainty -that you will have artillery fire -against you, to which you will not be able -to reply, and in consequence your proposed -defences must include deep trenches -or recesses to shelter the men from shell. -Your defences will take the form of a -chain of isolated groups about the point -to be defended and separated from each -other by possibly several hundred yards. -It is no use simply to go and sit inside a -group of buildings which the guns would -knock about your ears and against which -the enemy can concentrate. The better -plan is to break up his attack and hide -your weakness by occupying well-strengthened -pivots, behind whose protection you -may have some freedom of movement, and -so be able, if the weakness or rashness of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</span> -the enemy gives opportunity, to inaugurate -local counter-attacks. These, if successful -in inflicting a sharp and sudden loss, -will make him hesitate to deliver a decisive -attack till he has found out all about -you. With one company you cannot -expect to achieve decisive results against -any considerable body of the enemy, but -must be content with keeping him in play -for as long a time as possible, and an -attitude of active bluff is the best means -of doing so.</p> - -<p>When you have got your plans completed, -take out the company as strong as -possible and complete in its proper platoons -and sections—if there are too few -men let one man count for two or three. -Send off platoons to occupy and plan the -defence of the pivots as done when practising -it before. Do the same scheme -on two separate occasions. The first time -do not send out a skeleton enemy, so that -the men may have time to look round, but -for the second time send out some scouts -under a subaltern, and let the platoons fall -out on their positions with patrols out in -front. Fix a certain hour by which you -expect the arrangements to be all ready, -and arrange for the enemy to advance at -that time, and open fire on the patrols if -they are met. When the patrols have -fallen back the enemy closes in and starts<span class="pagenum" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</span> -sniping at the position. Then bring off a -counter-attack, withdrawing some men for -the purpose from pivots that are not -threatened, and coming in on the flank of -the attackers. In theory, of course, you -should have a support or reserve available -for this, but it does no harm to move men -out of their trenches with the object of -assuming the offensive, while the men learn -the essential part of their work by all being -employed on the perimeter.</p> - -<p>Have out the company yet a third time -on the same or a similar scheme, pivots -and skeleton enemy as before. On this -occasion, if the scheme is the same, change -round the platoons to different pivots from -what they occupied before, and when the -arrangements for defence have been -settled, leave only sentries and their groups -on the pivots as look-outs, but have patrols -in front. Form the remainder of the men -into a support in some central position, and -tell them off to occupy as alarm posts the -pivots from which they were withdrawn. -When the skeleton enemy attacks, reinforce -the threatened part of the line by the -men of the units told off for its defence, -and with part, or even the whole of the -rest, make a counter-attack.</p> - -<p>It is very desirable, though unfortunately -not often possible, to perform these last -three practices on ground where you are at<span class="pagenum" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</span> -liberty to dig, and with an enemy of three -or four companies instead of a few snipers.</p> - - -<h3><em>Night Defence.</em></h3> - -<p>A night attack may be delivered as a -sequence to fighting by daylight, in the -course of which the enemy has established -himself sufficiently close to the defences -held by his opponent to see clearly the way -to reach the point against which he intends -to lead his force. Or he may deliver an -attack without previous fighting, hoping to -get the better of the defenders by surprise, -and basing his plans solely on the -results of reconnaissance. In the latter -case the attack must be preceded by a -night advance, long or short, according as -the defenders’ outposts and their patrols -have succeeded in keeping the hostile -troops at a distance or not, unless, indeed, -the troops or their scouts or spies have not -been in touch at all during the day in -which case an attack would not be a wise -proceeding, because the needful information -about the ground and your forces -is lacking. Such attacks as require a night -advance as a preliminary are likely to be -made either over open ground or along -roads, for the difficulties and delays occasioned -by moving troops over broken -ground which is not thoroughly known are<span class="pagenum" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</span> -very great. But in the first case, when -fighting has been going on by day, and the -two forces are in close contact at nightfall, -separated perhaps by only a few hundred -yards, the presence of broken ground -in front of the defences is no guarantee -that the enemy may not consider an attack -by night to have a reasonable chance of -succeeding against any of the points which -he has been trying to carry by daylight. -It follows then that in preparing a position -for defence the pivots must be ready to -withstand attack by night as well as by -day, and also that roads or paths leading -into the position from the surrounding -country should be held and defended by -night, in spite of their being innocuous by -daylight owing to being swept effectively -by fire from the adjacent pivots. It will -be admitted, I think, that fire by night is -ineffectual unless at very short ranges, or -when delivered by men of extraordinary -skill such as the up-country Boer and the -American backwoods-men were pictured -to be. A European enemy will seek to -bring off his attack with the bayonet. The -defenders will try to foil this attack, firstly, -by the use of fire at the close range, which -allows it to be effective, and, secondly, by -the use of the bayonet. This plainly -translates itself into obstacles to keep the -enemy under fire, obstacles to hamper him<span class="pagenum" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</span> -when at bayonet distance, and night rests -to help the accuracy of the fire in certain -desired directions. I have told you one -good form of night rest, and there are -several others, but all require some material -if they are to be even approximately accurate. -Failing material of any sort, tie -white rags round the muzzles of the men’s -rifles if you can get them. After a week -in the field your men will have nothing that -is not very dirty, but in a civilised country -some member of the population may perhaps -be found ready to oblige a soldier.</p> - -<p>Working still on your daylight scheme -show your non-commissioned officers and -men how to make night obstacles in addition -to those meant for daylight defence, -which latter may be any distance up to one -hundred yards in front of the trenches. -The night obstacles, on the other hand, -should be quite close, the fire obstacles as -close as ten yards, the bayonet obstacles, -say a narrow ditch and a wire, close under -the trenches so as to make a man stumble -when trying to reach the defender with his -bayonet. Make or plan these arrangements -round the pivots, and then practise -blocking and defending paths or roads by -the same methods as for pivots, but with -this variation, that a parapet which can -only be used for defence at night may be -as high as you consider needful without<span class="pagenum" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</span> -paying regard to its invisibility, while -those to be used by day are kept as low as -possible. In a practical exercise the men -to hold these night posts would have to be -furnished either from your support or by -thinning some of the pivots.</p> - -<p>Yet the most carefully arranged trenches -and obstacles will be of no value unless the -men occupy them in time to avail themselves -of their advantages. Time sufficient -to allow of this, must be got by -patrolling in front as for outposts, by making -automatic alarms in front of the obstacles -(M.F.E., 55 (12)), by having alert -sentries on the defence line, and by having -a good and well understood arrangement -of alarm posts by which each man shall be -ready to occupy at once, in silence, and -without confusion, the place which has -been assigned to him. Patrolling has been -dealt with under “Outposts,” the alertness -of your sentries will depend largely on the -state of discipline to which you have -brought your company, and on the commonsenseness, -to coin a word, of their -training. Alarm posts are practised in the -same way as on outpost. In many corps -it is a standing order that when in camp or -bivouac, on manœuvre as well as on service, -men are to fall in on their alarm posts -once a day, the usual times being at retreat -or on arrival in camp (F.S.R., 48<span class="pagenum" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</span> -(2)), and this is done whether in Brigade -(F.S.R., 47 (2)) or not. If such is the order -in your battalion, adhere to it within your -company when detached, if not, do it -off your own bat. It does not fatigue the -men and ensures attention being paid on -all occasions to this important duty.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XVI">EXERCISE XVI.<br> -<span class="smcap">Hasty Expedients.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>I.T., 93 (iii.), directs the training of the -section to include rough and ready expedients -so as to form a fighting front in -any direction. This training is of great -value, both from a disciplinary point of -view, as it makes men quick to move on an -order, and also from the point of view of -<em>moral</em>, as men accustomed to get sudden -and unexpected orders given under -imaginary circumstances will be more -likely to keep cool, when such orders are -necessitated by the stress of actual battle, -than men who have always been trained -in a deliberate fashion.</p> - -<p>Such sudden orders must in general -mean one of two things, either that the -enemy has got you, or you have got him, -“on the hop,” if I may introduce an expression -from the cricket field, and that -there is every chance of the bowler, whoever -he is, being badly scored off, unless -he treats the batsman to something more -difficult than the expensive half-volley. -If you are fortunately able to find the -enemy at a disadvantage, you will act<span class="pagenum" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</span> -against him by rifle fire alone; but, on the -other hand, you may find yourself caught -in a bad situation, by either artillery or -rifle fire, or possibly by cavalry, who -mean to use the steel. It follows then, in -practising expedients, based, as they -should be, on some possible situation, that -you should make the central idea either -offensive, as if attempting to bring your -men into a position to get the best results -from their fire, or defensive, as if to -escape, or mitigate shell fire or rifle fire, -to which you are subjected under adverse -conditions.</p> - -<p>Against artillery fire from ranges or in -positions at which you cannot reply effectively -with rifle fire, your action at first, -at all events, must be purely defensive, -i.e., all you can do, will be to escape -being overwhelmed by the shell fire, and -even at effective rifle range, the shields of -modern field guns, enable them to engage -infantry on very equal terms, so long as -the infantry is in front, or not far on a -flank, of the line of guns.</p> - -<p>In the days of muzzle-loaders, it was -the cavalry who possessed the power of -suddenly annihilating infantry, when -caught unprepared to withstand their -charge. The magazine rifle has reduced -this danger, but the quick-firing cannon -has now equal, if not greater, powers of<span class="pagenum" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</span> -dealing out swift destruction to any infantry -that it finds exposed in close -formation, if only the range be known. -At least once in the Russo-Japanese War, -and again in the Turko-Bulgarian war, if -we may believe the somewhat ill-authenticated -reports yet to hand, have artillery -wiped out of existence in a few moments -several hundred unfortunate infantrymen, -who were caught in the <i lang="fr" xml:lang="fr">rafâle</i> -fired at a range either ascertained previously, -or got at the moment by good luck -or good judgment. The contingency of -being thus caught by artillery is evidently -one that should be prepared for by infantry, -as was the forming of squares in the old -days, when a cavalry charge was an ever -present peril. In this case of artillery fire, -the conditions and the object desired are -practically always the same—the infantry -is in close order of some sort, and wishes to -break up into a congeries of small groups, -so as to isolate the effect of the burst of -each shrapnel. The matter of rifle fire is -different, as there are any number of ways -in which you may seek either to escape the -results of the enemy’s fire or attempt to -use your own, and this is the proper field -in which to practise expedients.</p> - -<p>Whenever you intend to carry out some -such movement to meet a supposed situation, -you must let the men know exactly<span class="pagenum" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</span> -what you are picturing, so that they also -may understand what is needed. The -essence of these practices is that they -should be performed without time for deliberate -thought—the men must learn to -think and act quickly. The most satisfactory -way is to be yourself mounted, as you -can then get the whole company to hear -you at once, whereas, if on foot, the men -who are farthest from you often lose the -first part of what you say; you then have -to repeat it, and the thing loses its character -of surprise for the rest, who have -already heard it once. Give out the -situation in a loud voice, and in as few -words as possible, then try and give the -very order you think you would give, if -the situation was a real one on service; -use your own imagination, in figuring what -you would say, and how you would say it. -To call attention, it seems legitimate to use -your whistle, as on service the men would -have some warning that things were about -to happen, either by the arrival of shell or -bullets, the sight of the enemy, or by the -signal of their own scouts. In giving the -situation, if you are receiving fire, give out -what kind of fire it is, the enemy’s position, -if it is allowable to suppose it known, or -if you are going to be on the offensive, give -out where the enemy is, and what he is -doing, and how you learn this, i.e., by your<span class="pagenum" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</span> -scouts, or by first-hand observation. For -example, while the company is marching in -fours along a road, you see, in imagination, -two shells burst simultaneously near by, -and about two hundred yards from each -other, and you wisely deduce that the -enemy is ranging on your company. Blow -your whistle and give out “Artillery fire -is opening on the company, from such and -such a direction—open out to columns of -sections.” If you have taught your men -what to do to escape artillery fire, they will -open out at the double into columns of -platoons, at not less than fifty yards interval, -measuring roughly at right angles to the -direction of the supposed fire (I.T., -118 (3)).</p> - -<p>In practising this opening out under -artillery fire, which, as I have said, is the -one specific hasty manœuvre performed -under conditions nearly always similar, it is -inexpedient to lay down any fixed rules for -the positions to be taken up by the -platoons. It sounds simple to say that the -platoons of the leading half-company go to -the right, and those of the rear half to the -left, but when men are marching at ease, -and shells begin bursting round them unexpectedly, -I do not think there will -be time for anyone to see which half-company -is leading. The main thing -is to get the platoons instantly away<span class="pagenum" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</span> -from the road on which the enemy has laid -his guns, and from each other. Direct -platoon commanders to lead their men at -the double in any direction away from the -platoon in front, except, of course, -towards the rear. In theory, of course, -this might result in all four making -out towards one flank, but, even so, -this is better than having any deliberative -halts on the road, and in practice the -platoons in rear can see which way those in -front are heading, and wheel to go to the -other flank. There is no advantage to be -had from getting the men in the ranks into -extended order, as the shrapnel scatter the -whole width of their bursting zone in an -impartial manner, nor is it any use to seek -such slight cover as gives only a screen -from view, unless with a view to getting -away from the shell-swept locality without -attracting notice. Platoon commanders -should, of course, make for any cover that -is sufficiently steep on the rear side to -shelter them from the downward dropping -shrapnel bullets. If there is no cover, the -best thing after getting out into the line -of platoons separated by fully fifty yards -intervals, is to move rapidly forward. If -cover exists with open ground round it, the -men may be got away by “dribbling” man -by man, in the hope that the enemy may -not spot the movement, and continue or -resume his shell practice, to defeat it.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</span></p> - -<p>As regards expedients against rifle fire, I -will only suggest a few, and leave you to -invent others suited to the nature of the -ground you have got to exercise on.</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 1. The company in close order is surprised - by a heavy rifle fire; there - is cover near by sufficient to hold - the whole company crowded together. - Order the men to get - into the cover helter skelter, and - then advance or retire, by the successive - movement of platoons or - sections, who take extended order - at their best speed as they emerge - from shelter. If facilities exist, - tell one or two platoons to reply - to the fire, from the cover, till - their own turn comes to move, by - which time the first lots that went - out should have got into position - to open fire.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 2. The company in close order is again - surprised by rifle fire, but there is - no cover near to act as a base. - Get the company quickly into extended - order, and let men reply - to the fire as soon as they have - extended, using studiously slow - fire.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 3. The company or platoons in extended - order have to change front - to meet an attack from a flank. - As in the book, call on them to<span class="pagenum" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</span> - line a hedge or ditch, facing so as - to fire in the new direction.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 4. Coming through a gap in a hedge - or wall, either in advance or retreat, - scattering off right and left, - so as to get out of the way of fire - concentrated on the gap.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 5. The scouts from a position some - distance from the company report - a body of the enemy unaware - of their presence and exposed - to fire. Bring the company - quickly up to the scouts’ position, - halt, load, and adjust sights under - cover and just short of the firing - position, and on your whistle the - men advance at once to the edge - of the fire position and surprise - the enemy by a simultaneous fire - from all the rifles.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 6. Taking up quickly an all-round defensive - position; the platoons or - sections go off and find the best - positions in different directions - which you merely indicate - roughly.</p> - - -<p class="no-indent" style="padding-left: 2em; text-indent: -1.5em;"> - 7. Hastily organised attacks, to dislodge - an enemy unexpectedly - found in occupation of a position, - also taking up action as flank and - rearguards under fire.</p> -</div> - - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="EXERCISE_XVII">EXERCISE XVII.<br> -<span class="smcap">Night Operation Training.</span></h2> -</div> - -<p>I.T., 113, gives some instructions as to -how men are to be taught to march and -to use their ears and eyes at night, while -F.S.R., chapter ix., goes into the subject -at length. These operations are -divided into night marches, night advances, -and night attacks. The men of a -company will not be fit to take a useful -part in night tactical exercises either in -company or in battalion, unless they have -had some elementary training as laid down -in “Infantry Training,” and have also been -practised in the two indispensable duties of -maintaining connection (F.S.R., 129 (4)) -and in reconnaissance (F.S.R., 130 (1)). -Night patrolling and the duties of night -sentries have been dealt with under outposts, -and I will not say anything more -about them here. The rest of the -elementary training contained in “Infantry -Training” requires no explanation, -and you can practise your men -in it in small parties. There remains -the maintenance of connection, -and I have found that training for this is -best done at first by daylight. It is very -simple, and after one or two daylight<span class="pagenum" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</span> -lessons the men will work quite well by -night, but to begin straight off under darkness -will only lead to waste of time, as -mistakes cannot easily be corrected, nor -the working of a system made plain. -The company should parade as strong as -possible in this exercise, as, with only a -few files on parade, the necessity of maintaining -connection, and the difficulty of -doing so, are not so obvious as when a -fairly large body of men has to be handled -without making a noise. Connection has -to be maintained within the company itself, -and also with the other companies in front -or rear, if in column of route, or on the -right and left, if deployed. In order to -practise this connection with other companies, -represent the front and rear, or flank -section commanders of the supposed adjacent -companies by a man for each company, -who should move where those -section commanders would be, i.e., in -fours, at the head or tail of the directing -flank, in line, on the flanks of the front -rank. Use these dummies as the recipients -of all orders and signals passed along, so -that your company may get the habit of -keeping touch with the others before it -works with the battalion.</p> - - -<h3><em>I. Connecting Files.</em></h3> - -<p>The only sure way of keeping connection -between bodies of troops moving in<span class="pagenum" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</span> -separate parties is by connecting files, who -keep within sight of each other and so can -seldom be at more than twenty yards distance -apart. These files must be taught to -pass commands with exactitude, and never -to open their mouths otherwise, i.e., they -must never speculate between themselves -“Are they advancing?” or so forth, or talk -at all, because the next file may hear some -word of their talk and mistake it for an -order. When connecting files are needed -they must take up their places without its -being necessary to tell them off loudly, and -when no longer needed they must close -into company in silence and in good order.</p> - -<p>Form the company into fours, turned to -a flank as in column of route: tell the -dummy section commander of the preceding -company to march off; string the company -out after him, the men marching off -in files at about ten paces between each -file without further command after the first -one has gone, each as it moves off touching -the next to follow, to give it notice. When -they are all strung out, let the rear dummy -section commander follow. Then pass -orders up the line; use only the form given -in I.T., 96 (3). To make sure that such -verbal orders have reached the intended -recipient, the only way, though a slow one, -is to require him to send back a report that -he has taken the action required. Thus, a<span class="pagenum" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</span> -message from the rear to the leading portion -to halt would be answered from the -leading portion by a report passed down -the line to the commander “The leading -portion, or, etc., has halted.” Let your first -order be to halt, passed from the dummy -company in rear up to that in front “From -Colonel A. to all companies—halt.” On receiving -the order one man of each file -halts on his ground and turns to the rear, -the other goes forward to the next file as -quickly as he can without noise, delivers -the order, and returns to his former place, -when he halts and faces the other way -from his comrade. Thus, on the completion -of the order to halt, one man of each -file will be facing each way. Bayonets -will usually be fixed in night operations, -and it is important, especially in Rifle Battalions, -to accustom men to carry the rifle -on the right shoulder, with the hand round -the small of the butt and never at the trail, -otherwise there is much danger of someone -getting a stab as well as an order.</p> - -<p>After the halt, get on the move again by -passing up the word to advance, and practise -any other likely orders:—“Go fast in -front,” “Go slow in front,” “The rear cannot -keep up,” and so on. Follow the orders -up the line and see that men do not tamper -with the form of the order en route, and -that they speak in a whisper when giving<span class="pagenum" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</span> -it over. Section and platoon commanders -must be told all orders as they pass, see that -their units conform, and look after the -maintenance of the distance between files.</p> - -<p>Next practise lateral communication, the -four platoons in one line in close order, -with company intervals between each, -representing the leading platoons of -four companies drawn up in line of -columns of platoons at deploying intervals -and ready for a night advance. -Lateral connecting files need to be -closer than when following each other, -so put out connecting files to the flanks in a -similar way to what was done before, but -at six, or eight yards interval. Then -move, halt, and deploy the supposed -column by means of these files, dressing -and interval being kept up by the files moving -up or stepping short, and closing on -or inclining from any named company of -direction without specific orders.</p> - - -<h3><em>II. Marching and Formations.</em></h3> - -<p>Form up the company and get it into -fours as if in column of route, dummy company -section commanders as before. Practise -marching off from the halt, and halting, -passing the word from the front or rear -company along the men on the flanks of -the fours. As the order comes along, -the flank men of the fours nudge or<span class="pagenum" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</span> -shove the other men in their respective -fours, and whisper to the flank men in the -four in front or behind. There is seldom -any need to speak, as a push or pull is -enough. The platoon commanders get -the word from the flank men of -the sections of fours, and from one -another as well, as they are to follow -the order along their own platoons, -and go forward or back to the commander -of the next platoon to whom they must repeat -it, and then resume their proper -places. The platoon commander of the -leading, or rear, platoon is responsible for -passing the word to the nearest platoon -commander of the next company. The -company officers must arrange also to hear -all orders, and should have fixed positions, -known to all, which they will only quit temporarily. -In marching off from the halt, -the rear portion of the company should -step out well, as soon as the order reaches -them, so as to avoid straggling, while the -leading fours preserve a uniform pace. In -halting in battalion, the leading fours -should close up on the company in front, -and continue to do so, till it is seen that it -has finished closing up; there is always -bound to be a good deal of straggling at -first owing to the method of giving orders. -When this system is in good working order, -move and halt the company on your own<span class="pagenum" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</span> -audibly whispered word of command, the -platoon commanders repeating it, the system -of communication being kept up as -before, but the men moving at once on the -word; this will give a fairly simultaneous -action throughout the company while ensuring -against loss of touch.</p> - -<p>On the same lines, practise forming line -from column of platoons, mass, and column -of platoons from column of fours, and -marching in line, paying attention throughout -to dressing and the covering of files in -line.</p> - - -<h3><em>III. Night Assault.</em></h3> - -<p>Choose a position as objective, and form -the company, in line or in column of -platoons, about three hundred yards from it, -with scouts about eighty yards in front of -the company (F.S.R., 137 (4)). This is the -formation which would usually be adopted -at the position of deployment. When the -scouts have got about one hundred yards -from the position, or up to a line which -they would recognise in the dark as being -in close proximity to it, they should halt, -and wait for the arrival of the company. -The whole then move silently forward towards -the position till you give the word -or signal for assault, when all charge. -Practise this stealthy advance right on to -the position, as if the enemy were not alert,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</span> -and also make the charge from some distance, -as would be done if the enemy -opened fire, which is recognised to be what -will most often happen. After the assault -the men should be rallied by the non-commissioned -officers taking all men within -their reach, and forming them into extemporised -sections ready to be reformed into -platoons and to begin entrenching.</p> - -<p>If by chance you get material, you may -introduce refinements, in the way of wire-cutting -men with each section, sand -bags with each man, and bags stuffed -with straw carried ready to throw on to -abatis or to fill up trenches, to be carried -in a fixed place in the company.</p> - - -<h3><em>IV. Night Entrenching.</em></h3> - -<p>Practise marching with arms and tools, -and taking up a position to be entrenched, -with especial regard to avoidance of noise. -When entrenching by night, the trenches -cannot be chosen to give a field of fire -unless it has been possible to obtain access -to the locality by day, and mark them in -advance; failing this the company commander, -as soon as the position is reached, -must send patrols, and go himself, to -ascertain that no commanding ground, at -least in the immediate vicinity, has been -left unoccupied, and, at the first light, all<span class="pagenum" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</span> -other such points within effective range as -it is possible to hold, should be secured -and entrenched, without orders from -higher commanders. A full illustration -of this, however, can only be done by -parading at night.</p> - - -<h3><em>V. Search Work.</em></h3> - -<p>Practise the company in going off, as if -detached from the column to get touch with -other troops, or to find a gate or bridge by -which some obstacle, wall, canal, etc., -met with, can be passed. The company -moves off dropping connecting files to -keep touch with the halted column, the -files halt at their distances, and pass word -if the company has achieved its mission, -and close on the company when the column -comes up, but not before, else the column -will be left out of touch; or, if the need -has passed and the company is recalled -to the column, the connecting files again -remain at their posts till the company is -gathered back on them.</p> - - -<h3><em>VI. Surprises.</em></h3> - -<p>When only a few men are on parade, -advanced education, combined with -some amusement, may be got by experimenting -in the best ways of laying out -obnoxious persons, such as hostile patrols, -who have to be rushed in silence (F.S.R.,<span class="pagenum" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</span> -138 (5)). Before beginning a stalk, the -quarry should be kept under observation -to see which way he looks when halted, -and any other idiosyncrasies. The assailant -should creep up to him either on his -flank, or from behind, moving one foot at -a time, and bending down, though not on -all fours. If the sentry looks his way, -he must stay absolutely motionless, till he -again looks away. My informant on this -matter was a friend of a successful rifle -thief in Upper India.</p> - -<p>After putting the company through the -above daylight course, you should, of -course, put theory into practice and do -some real night work whenever you get -the chance, putting out a skeleton enemy -or some observers to tell you how much -noise you make, and follow out the full -instructions as to orders, watchwords, -etc., given in F.S.R., 138 and 139. Test -your men as to their ability to see in the -dark; some men can see much more than -others; spot these men and tell them off -as “Night Scouts.” Even if they are not -otherwise qualified as scouts, they are -most useful in guiding the company over -rough ground.</p> -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="A_SCHEME_OF_A_COMPANY">A SCHEME OF A COMPANY -TRAINING.</h2> -</div> - - -<p>I give below, as an example of the application -of the foregoing exercises, a -scheme of company training which I -actually carried out. This was in the days -before platoons, so I have altered the -scheme to show what I should have done -had the company organisation been -what it now is. I was given from -Monday in one week to Saturday the next -week to march out into camp, about 10 -miles, and get back, i.e., two days of -march, and ten halted working days. I -had thirty-five rounds per man of ball -cartridge available for field practice -musketry, and a sufficiency of blank for -the requirements of skeleton enemy and -for use with the men in one or two of -the exercises. My men were Regulars, -and during the previous furlough season -I had grounded them piecemeal in field -work.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</span></p> - - - - -<table class="autotable"> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bt bb br"> DAY.</td> -<td class="tdrx bt bb br"></td> -<td class="tdlx bt bb br">Forenoon Work.</td> -<td class="tdlx bt bb">Afternoon Work.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">1</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Monday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">March out to camp. March discipline and work of connecting files. -Advanced guard. Sanitation. Water piquet and sanitary patrols. Pitched a perimeter camp as -for savage warfare. Trenched tents against rain, and made a shelter trench round camp. Alarm posts.</td> -<td class="tdrx bb"></td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">2</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Tuesday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Individual advance in extended order. Retirement by pairs.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Improved and deepened camp entrenchments, made loop-holes, night rests, and obstacles.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">3</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</span>Wednesday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Platoon and Section in attack as part of Company.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Field practice Musketry:—Individual advance in extended order. 7 rounds ball per man.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">4</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Thursday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Platoon in independent attack.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Field practice Musketry:—Section in independent attack, 7 rounds ball per man.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">5</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Friday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Platoon in retirement.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Preliminary training for Company attack. Fire discipline and control.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">6</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Saturday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Company in attack with the battalion.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Prepared target positions and markers butts for snapshooting.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">7</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br"><span class="pagenum" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</span>Monday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Company in attack with Battalion.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Snapshooting, 7 rounds per man.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">8</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Tuesday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Company in attack acting alone.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Snapshooting, 7 rounds per man.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">9</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Wednesday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Outposts.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Company in attack, 7 rounds ball.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">10</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Thursday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Defence.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Company in retirement.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx bb br">11</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Friday</td> -<td class="tdlx bb br">Night attack. Parade at 2.30 a.m.</td> -<td class="tdlx bb">Hasty expedients.</td> -</tr> -<tr> -<td class="tdrx br">12</td> -<td class="tdlx br">Saturday</td> -<td class="tdlx br">March back to quarters.</td> -<td class="tdrx"></td> -</tr> -</table> - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop"> - - -<div class="transnote"> - -<h2>Transcriber’s Notes</h2> -<ul> - -<li>Catalog page Changed Miscellaneous Tactica to: Tactical</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_62">62</a> Changed close and re-form to: reform</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_63">63</a> Changed expect either a counterattack to: counter-attack</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_67">67</a> Changed this exercise, though to: through</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_76">76</a> Added period after: left on the position</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_124">124</a> Changed trenches or make loopholes to: loop-holes</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_125">125</a> Changed the line of loopholes to: loop-holes</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_136">136</a> Changed: (I.T, 156 (5)) to: (I.T., 156 (5))</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_182">182</a> Added comma after: entrenchments, made loop-holes</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_183">183</a> Added period after: 7 rounds ball per man</li> -<li> pg <a href="#Page_184">184</a> Added period after: Friday Night attack</li> -</ul> - -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE TRAINING OF AN INFANTRY COMPANY ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/69943-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/69943-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a4a3332..0000000 --- a/old/69943-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/69943-h/images/i_b_044.jpg b/old/69943-h/images/i_b_044.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b7c04a1..0000000 --- a/old/69943-h/images/i_b_044.jpg +++ /dev/null |
